E-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System Operation Guide

e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System

Operation Guide Version: A Code: MN000002229

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd. April 2015

Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal. We will provide you with comprehensive technical support and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales representative, service representative or distributor for any help needed at the contact information shown below.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China Zip code: 430073 Tel:

+6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia) +91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia) +593 4 501 4529 (for South America)

Fax:

+86 27 8717 8521

Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com

Legal Notice

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd. (Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome) All brand names and product names used in this document are used for identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

All rights reserved No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission from FiberHome. Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Preface

Related Documentation

I

Version Intended Readers This manual is intended for the following readers: u

Commissioning engineers

u

Equipment maintenance staff

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

II

u

SDH theory

u

WDM theory

u

PTN theory

u

OTN theory

u

Data communication technology

u

Ethernet technology

Conventions Terminology Conventions Terminology

Convention FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management

OTNM2000

System FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2100 Network Management

OTNM2100

System

Symbol Conventions Symbol

Convention Note

Description Important features or operation guide. Possible injury to persons or

Caution

systems, or cause traffic interruption or loss.

Warning

May cause severe bodily injuries.

➔

Jump

Jumps to another step.

→

Cascading menu

Connects multi-level menu options.

↔

Bidirectional service

The service signal is bidirectional.

→

Unidirectional service

The service signal is unidirectional.

III

Operation Safety Rules

The network management computer should be placed away from direct sunlight, electromagnetic interference, heat source, humidity and dust, and with at least 8 cm distance from other objects in order to keep good ventilation. Use UPS power supply to avoid loss of network management data caused by accidental power failure. The computer case, UPS power supply and switch (or hub) should be connected to protection earth ground. To shut down the network management computer, first exit the operation system normally and then shut off the power supply. Do not exit the network management system when it is working normally. Exiting the network management system does not interrupt traffic in the network, but precludes centralized control of the networked equipment. The network management computer cannot be used for purposes other than network management. The network management computer cannot be used for purposes other than network management. Do not delete any file in the network management system randomly or copy any irrelevant file into the network management computer. Do not visit Internet via the network management computer. Doing so may increase data flow in the net card and hence affects normal network management data transmission or results in other accidents.

V

Do not perform service configuration or expansion during service busy hours via the network management system. Do not modify the network management computer’s protocol settings, computer name or LAN settings. Doing so may result in abnormal operation of network management system.

VI

VII

VIII

Contents Preface...................................................................................................................I Related Documentation ...................................................................................I Version ...........................................................................................................II Intended Readers ...........................................................................................II Conventions ..................................................................................................III Operation Safety Rules ......................................................................................... V 1

Preparatory Knowledge ...............................................................................1-1 1.1

1.2

2

Management System .....................................................................1-2 1.1.1

Management Model .........................................................1-2

1.1.2

Management Structure ....................................................1-3

Numbering Hierarchy .....................................................................1-5 1.2.1

Physical Part ...................................................................1-6

1.2.2

Logical Part .....................................................................1-6

OTNM2000 Basic Operations ......................................................................2-1 2.1

2.2

2.3

Login / Logout................................................................................2-2 2.1.1

Logging into the OTNM2000 ............................................2-2

2.1.2

Logging Out of the OTNM2000.........................................2-4

GUI Introduction ............................................................................2-4 2.2.1

System GUI .....................................................................2-4

2.2.2

Main Menu.......................................................................2-5

2.2.3

Shortcut Icons................................................................2-19

2.2.4

Commonly Used Shortcuts.............................................2-22

2.2.5

Object Tree....................................................................2-23

2.2.6

Display Pane .................................................................2-26

2.2.7

Task Panel.....................................................................2-26

2.2.8

Status Bar .....................................................................2-27

Common Operations....................................................................2-28 2.3.1

Customizing the Table....................................................2-28

2.3.2

3

2.4

Viewing the Command Manager ..................................................2-31

2.5

Locking / Unlocking the Client End ...............................................2-32 2.5.1

Locking the Client End ...................................................2-32

2.5.2

Unlocking the Client End................................................2-33

2.6

Monitoring the Network Status .....................................................2-34

2.7

Viewing the Version Information ...................................................2-35

2.8

Current User Logout ....................................................................2-35

Security Management ..................................................................................3-1 3.1

Basic Concepts..............................................................................3-2

3.2

Security Policy Management..........................................................3-5 3.2.1

Automatically Locking the Client End................................3-5

3.2.2

Setting the Automatic Exit ................................................3-6

3.2.3

Setting the User Login Detection ......................................3-8

3.2.4

Setting the Password Complexity Check ..........................3-9

3.2.5

Setting the Lockout Upon Incorrect Password Inputs ........3-9

3.3

Scenarios for Authority and Domain Division ................................3-10

3.4

Authorization Planning .................................................................3-11

3.5

Managing System Users ..............................................................3-13

3.6

4

Quick Copy of Table Contents ........................................2-30

3.5.1

Managing Object Groups ...............................................3-13

3.5.2

Managing Operation Groups ..........................................3-16

3.5.3

Managing User Groups ..................................................3-19

3.5.4

Managing Users ............................................................3-22

3.5.5

Authorization and Domain Division Example ..................3-33

Managing User Sessions .............................................................3-36 3.6.1

Monitoring User Sessions ..............................................3-36

3.6.2

Logging Out a User........................................................3-37

3.6.3

Sending Messages to Other Online Users ......................3-39

3.6.4

Monitoring the User Activities .........................................3-41

3.7

Managing the EMS_f Authority.....................................................3-41

3.8

Network Management Tool...........................................................3-43

Integrated Configuration Management .........................................................4-1 4.1

Modifying Project Attributes............................................................4-3

4.2

4.2.1

Adding a Manager Service ...............................................4-4

4.2.2

Modifying a Manager Service ...........................................4-5

4.2.3

Deleting Manager Services ..............................................4-8

4.3

Configuring the GNE......................................................................4-9

4.4

Managing Network Blocks............................................................4-11

4.5

4.6

4.7

5

Managing Manager Services..........................................................4-3

4.4.1

Adding a Network Block .................................................4-11

4.4.2

Modifying Network Block Attributes ................................4-13

4.4.3

Deleting a Network Block ...............................................4-14

Managing NEs .............................................................................4-15 4.5.1

Adding an NE ................................................................4-15

4.5.2

Modifying the NE Attributes ............................................4-16

4.5.3

Copying / Pasting an NE ................................................4-17

4.5.4

Moving an NE ................................................................4-18

4.5.5

Deleting an NE ..............................................................4-19

Managing Cards ..........................................................................4-20 4.6.1

Adding a Card................................................................4-20

4.6.2

Adding a Card Automatically ..........................................4-21

4.6.3

Replacing a Card ...........................................................4-23

4.6.4

Editing a Card................................................................4-24

4.6.5

Deleting a Card..............................................................4-25

Configuring NE IP Remotely based on SN....................................4-26 4.7.1

Configuring the Local NE IP Address..............................4-28

4.7.2

Configuring the IP Address of the Neighboring NE ..........4-31

Topology Management.................................................................................5-1 5.1

Topology Construction Flow ...........................................................5-2

5.2

Creating the Topology ....................................................................5-4

5.3

5.2.1

Adding a Topological Node...............................................5-4

5.2.2

Adding a Fiber Connection...............................................5-4

Adjusting the Topology Display.......................................................5-6 5.3.1

Setting the Topology Display ............................................5-6

5.3.2

Setting the NE Icon ..........................................................5-7

5.3.3

Setting the Fiber Connection Attribute ..............................5-8

5.3.4

Expanding / Collapsing Topological Links .........................5-9

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

6

5.3.5

Setting the Size of Display Area .....................................5-10

5.3.6

Setting the Background Image .......................................5-11

5.3.7

Setting the Color of the NE.............................................5-12

5.3.8

Setting the Color of the Line ...........................................5-13

Layer-based Topology..................................................................5-14 5.4.1

Setting Topology Layers.................................................5-15

5.4.2

Modifying Topology Layers.............................................5-17

5.4.3

Viewing the Layer-based Topology.................................5-19

Deleting a Topological Object .......................................................5-22 5.5.1

Deleting a Fiber Connection ...........................................5-22

5.5.2

Deleting a Node .............................................................5-23

Viewing the Topology ...................................................................5-24 5.6.1

Viewing the Main Topology.............................................5-24

5.6.2

Viewing the Airscape .....................................................5-25

5.6.3

Viewing the Subnet ........................................................5-26

5.6.4

Searching Objects .........................................................5-27

Managing the DCN Network.........................................................5-29 5.7.1

DCN Topology Management ..........................................5-30

5.7.2

DCN Configuration Management....................................5-33

5.7.3

DCN Status Monitoring ..................................................5-35

5.7.4

DCN Alarm Management ...............................................5-38

5.7.5

Automatic Discovery of Topological Links .......................5-40

Configuration Management ..........................................................................6-1 6.1

Time Calibration.............................................................................6-2

6.2

Management Configuration ............................................................6-2

6.3

6.4

6.2.1

Downloading the Management Configuration ...................6-3

6.2.2

Analyzing the Network Block Management Configuration .6-4

Structure Configuration ..................................................................6-5 6.3.1

Downloading the Structure Configuration .........................6-5

6.3.2

Analyzing the Network Block Structure Configuration .......6-6

Device Configuration......................................................................6-8 6.4.1

Downloading the Equipment Configuration .......................6-8

6.4.2

Reading the Device Configuration ....................................6-9

6.5

Refreshing Configuration Time .....................................................6-10

6.6

Configuration Check ....................................................................6-11

6.7

6.8

6.9

7

6.6.1

Configuration Check ......................................................6-11

6.6.2

Comparing the NE Configuration....................................6-13

Managing Card ............................................................................6-14 6.7.1

Configuring Card Parameters.........................................6-14

6.7.2

Copying Card Configuration ...........................................6-16

6.7.3

Delivering Card Control Commands ...............................6-17

6.7.4

Checking the Card Status ..............................................6-18

6.7.5

Synchronizing the Card Configuration ............................6-20

Managing NE Software ................................................................6-22 6.8.1

Downloading the Software .............................................6-22

6.8.2

Setting Delayed Enabling of the Card Software ..............6-24

6.8.3

Setting the FTP..............................................................6-26

6.8.4

Managing Card Software ...............................................6-27

6.8.5

NE Software Download ..................................................6-30

NE Communication......................................................................6-34 6.9.1

Pinging the NE...............................................................6-34

6.9.2

SSH ..............................................................................6-35

6.9.3

Telneting the NE ............................................................6-37

6.10

Optical Cable Router Settings ......................................................6-37

6.11

Setting the NE to the Not Started Status .......................................6-41

6.12

Backing Up DCG Files .................................................................6-42

Service Configuration and Management.......................................................7-1 7.1

PTN/IPRAN ...................................................................................7-4 7.1.1

Tunnel .............................................................................7-4

7.1.2

PW ................................................................................7-15

7.1.3

L2VPN Service ..............................................................7-20

7.1.4

L3VPN Service ..............................................................7-34

7.1.5

ATM Service ..................................................................7-37

7.1.6

Group Service................................................................7-40

7.1.7

Protection Ring ..............................................................7-41

7.1.8

VRRP Configuration ......................................................7-46

7.1.9

Creating Tunnels Quickly ...............................................7-48

7.1.10 Quickly Create Ethernet Service.....................................7-49 7.2

POTN/PE-OTN ............................................................................7-51 7.2.1

Optical Channel .............................................................7-52

7.2.2

ODUk Channel ..............................................................7-59

7.2.3

Client Service Channel ..................................................7-61

7.2.4

ODUk Protection Group .................................................7-63

7.2.5

OCh Ring Protection ......................................................7-64

7.2.6

ODUk Ring Protection....................................................7-65

7.2.7

Tunnel ...........................................................................7-66

7.2.8

PW ................................................................................7-66

7.2.9

L2VPN Service ..............................................................7-66

7.2.10 L3VPN Service ..............................................................7-67 7.2.11 Group Service................................................................7-67 7.2.12 Ring Protection ..............................................................7-67 7.2.13 IPRAN VRRP Config......................................................7-68 7.3

SDH/MSTP..................................................................................7-68 7.3.1

Circuit............................................................................7-68

7.3.2

VCG Channel ................................................................7-77

7.3.3

Protection Ring ..............................................................7-78

7.4

Service Template .........................................................................7-81

7.5

Routing Template.........................................................................7-85

7.6

Service Global Settings................................................................7-86 7.6.1

PTN NE Global Settings.................................................7-86

7.6.2

Enabling the Global Section Layer OAM.........................7-88

7.6.3

Enabling the Global Section Layer LM Frame .................7-89

7.6.4

Merging OTN NEs .........................................................7-90

7.6.5

Setting the OTN Channel Wavelength ............................7-99

7.6.6

Setting the OTN NE Optical Link ..................................7-102

7.6.7

Setting the OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead ......................7-103

7.6.8

Setting the OTN WSS Group........................................7-105

7.6.9

Setting the OTN OPM Wavelength Monitor...................7-107

7.6.10 Setting the OTN SAPU Protection ................................7-109 7.7

ASON Resource Management ................................................... 7-111 7.7.1

SPC Resource Management (SDH/PTN) ..................... 7-111

7.7.2

SPC Resource Management (OTN / POTS) ................. 7-111

7.7.3

Synchronizing SPC Port Resources ............................. 7-112

7.7.4

Synchronizing SPC Data.............................................. 7-112

7.7.5

Synchronizing SPC Channels ...................................... 7-112

7.8

Displaying Routes...................................................................... 7-113

7.9

Options...................................................................................... 7-115

7.10

Querying Services ..................................................................... 7-116

7.11

Managing Broken Services ........................................................ 7-119

7.12

Saving Configuration Data to the Database ................................7-122

7.13

Reading Configuration Data from the Database..........................7-123

7.14

Full Download............................................................................7-124 7.14.1 Saving Cross-connect Data (NE)..................................7-124 7.14.2 Delivering the Cross-connect Data (NE) .......................7-126 7.14.3 Saving SDH NE Cross-connect Data............................7-128

8

Alarm Management .....................................................................................8-1 8.1

Basic Concept ...............................................................................8-2

8.2

Setting Alarm-related Parameters ..................................................8-7

8.3

Viewing Alarms............................................................................8-10

8.4

8.5

8.3.1

Viewing Current Alarms .................................................8-10

8.3.2

Viewing Alarm History ....................................................8-12

8.3.3

Viewing Reported Events...............................................8-15

8.3.4

Viewing Environmental Monitoring Alarms......................8-16

Setting the Alarm Template ..........................................................8-18 8.4.1

Setting the Alarm Query Template ..................................8-18

8.4.2

Managing Alarm Statistical Templates ............................8-20

8.4.3

Managing Alarm Level Templates...................................8-23

Handling Alarms ..........................................................................8-26 8.5.1

Alarm Processing Flow ..................................................8-26

8.5.2

Synchronizing Alarms ....................................................8-28

8.5.3

Isolating Alarm...............................................................8-29

8.5.4

Confirming Alarms .........................................................8-29

8.5.5

Querying Correlated Alarms ...........................................8-31

8.5.6

Viewing Alarm-related Services......................................8-33

8.5.7

Alarm Statistics..............................................................8-33

8.5.8

Refreshing Alarms .........................................................8-39

8.5.9

Printing Alarm Data........................................................8-40

8.5.10 Manage alarm help ........................................................8-40 8.6

Saving Alarm History Data ...........................................................8-43

8.7

Managing the Alarm Filter ............................................................8-45 8.7.1

Setting the Current Alarm Filter ......................................8-45

8.7.2

Setting the Card Alarm Filter ..........................................8-47

8.7.3

Setting the NE Alarm Filter .............................................8-49

8.7.4

Managing Alarm Filter Rules ..........................................8-52

8.7.5

Setting the History Alarm Filter .......................................8-55

8.7.6

Viewing History Alarm Filter ...........................................8-56

8.8

Setting Alarm Suppression...........................................................8-57

8.9

Customizing Alarm Levels............................................................8-59

8.10

Managing Alarm Report ...............................................................8-60 8.10.1 Setting the Alarm Reporting ...........................................8-61 8.10.2 Viewing Alarm Report ....................................................8-62 8.10.3 Setting the Alarm Remote Notification ............................8-64

8.11

Setting Alarm Audio-video Reminder............................................8-69 8.11.1 Setting the Alarm Sound Reminder ................................8-70 8.11.2 Setting the Alarm Indicator Color ....................................8-71 8.11.3 Setting the Alarm Flickering............................................8-71

9

Performance Management...........................................................................9-1 9.1

Basic Concept ...............................................................................9-2

9.2

Setting Performance-related Parameters........................................9-2

9.3

Setting the Performance Parameter Collection ...............................9-4

9.4

Viewing Performance.....................................................................9-5 9.4.1

Viewing Current Performance ..........................................9-5

9.4.2

Viewing Performance History ...........................................9-7

9.5

Setting Performance Query Profile ...............................................9-10

9.6

Managing Performance................................................................9-12 9.6.1

Locating the Performance ..............................................9-12

9.6.2

Viewing the Accumulative Performance..........................9-13

9.6.3

Refreshing the Performance ..........................................9-13

9.6.4

Filtering the Zero-value Performance..............................9-14

9.6.5

Printing Performance Data .............................................9-14

9.6.6

Detecting the Real-time Performance .............................9-15

9.6.7

Viewing Performance Reports........................................9-16

9.6.8

Gathering Statistics of and Analyzing Performance History...........................................................................9-17

9.6.9

Clearing Performance Data............................................9-18

9.6.10 Managing the Performance Help ....................................9-20 9.7

9.8

Managing Performance History Data............................................9-22 9.7.1

Saving Performance Data ..............................................9-22

9.7.2

Saving the Performance History Data Manually ..............9-24

9.7.3

Managing Performance Reports.....................................9-27

Managing Performance Filter .......................................................9-27 9.8.1

Setting the Card Performance Filter................................9-28

9.8.2

Setting NE Filter Performance ........................................9-29

9.8.3

Setting the Performance History Filter ............................9-32

9.8.4

Viewing History Performance Filter.................................9-34

9.9

Gathering Statistics of Optical Power Information .........................9-35

9.10

Traffic Management .....................................................................9-37 9.10.1 Querying the Traffic Values ............................................9-37 9.10.2 Monitoring the NE Traffic................................................9-39 9.10.3 Monitoring the Second-level Traffic.................................9-43 9.10.4 Monitoring the Port Real-time Traffic...............................9-45 9.10.5 Monitoring the Long-term Traffic.....................................9-47 9.10.6 Setting the Traffic Threshold...........................................9-48

10 Log Management.......................................................................................10-1 10.1

Log Management Policy...............................................................10-2

10.2

Viewing Command Logs ..............................................................10-3

10.3

Viewing User Logs.......................................................................10-5

10.4

Viewing Business Logs ................................................................10-7

10.5

Viewing EMU Logs ......................................................................10-8

10.6

Viewing Reported Events.............................................................10-9

10.7

Uploading NE Device Logs ........................................................10-10

10.8

Managing the Command Log Filter.............................................10-10

10.8.1 Setting the Command Log Filter ...................................10-10 10.8.2 Viewing the Command Log Filter..................................10-12 10.9

Saving Command Logs..............................................................10-13

11 Statistical Management..............................................................................11-1 11.1

Service Data Query Report ..........................................................11-3 11.1.1 Gathering Statistics of Link Resource Usage ..................11-3 11.1.2 Gathering Statistics of Circuits on the Link......................11-5 11.1.3 Gathering Statistics of the Tributary Port Usage of the NE.................................................................................11-7 11.1.4 Gathering Statistics of the Tributary Port Circuit of the NE.................................................................................11-8 11.1.5 Gathering Statistics of Circuits Between NEs................ 11-10 11.1.6 Gathering Statistics of NE Cross-connect Capacity....... 11-11 11.1.7 Gathering Statistics of the NE Port Usage .................... 11-12 11.1.8 Gathering Statistics of the NE Port Protection LSP ....... 11-14 11.1.9 Gathering Statistics of the NE VPWS ........................... 11-15 11.1.10Gathering Statistics of the NE VPLS............................. 11-16 11.1.11Gathering Statistics of the Port Service Traffic .............. 11-18 11.1.12Gathering Statistics of the PTN Services /Labels .......... 11-20 11.1.13Querying Services at L2 / L3 Bridge Point..................... 11-22 11.1.14Querying PTN NE LSR ID Addresses........................... 11-22 11.1.15Querying the Used Labels............................................ 11-25 11.1.16Querying L2VPN Reports............................................. 11-27 11.1.17Gathering Statistics of the OAM&BFD Enabling Reports ....................................................................... 11-29 11.1.18Gathering Statistics of the OTN Station Capacity .......... 11-30 11.1.19Gathering Statistics of OTN Wavelength Resources ..... 11-32 11.1.20Querying the Protection Information ............................. 11-33

11.2

Stock Statistics .......................................................................... 11-34 11.2.1 Gathering Statistics of NEs .......................................... 11-34 11.2.2 Gathering Statistics of Cards........................................ 11-35 11.2.3 Gathering Statistics of Slots ......................................... 11-36 11.2.4 Gathering Statistics of Serial Numbers ......................... 11-37 11.2.5 Gathering Statistics of NE Fiber Connections ............... 11-38

11.3

Alarm Statistics.......................................................................... 11-40 11.3.1 Alarm Filter Statistics ................................................... 11-40

11.3.2 Gathering Statistics of Alarm History ............................ 11-43 11.4

PM Statistics.............................................................................. 11-45 11.4.1 Managing Bandwidth Usage Statistics.......................... 11-45 11.4.2 Managing 15-minute Traffic Statistics ........................... 11-49 11.4.3 Managing 24-hour Traffic Statistics............................... 11-53 11.4.4 Managing Device Environment Parameter Statistics..... 11-57 11.4.5 Managing Optical Power Performance Statistics........... 11-61 11.4.6 Gathering Statistics of NE CPU and Memory Usage ..... 11-64

11.5

Managing VOA Status Statistics................................................. 11-67

11.6

IP Statistics................................................................................ 11-70 11.6.1 Statistics of Management Interface IP Addresses ......... 11-71 11.6.2 Statistics of Logical Interface IP Addresses................... 11-72

11.7

Viewing the Opposite End Port Information................................. 11-73

11.8

Viewing Software Version .......................................................... 11-73

11.9

Viewing IP Configuration............................................................ 11-74

12 Data Management .....................................................................................12-1 12.1

Backing Up / Restoring the OTNM2000 Data................................12-2 12.1.1 Backing Up the OTNM2000 Configuration Data Manually........................................................................12-3 12.1.2 Backing Up Configuration Data via the Network Management Tool ...............................................................................12-4 12.1.3 Backing Up the Configuration to the File .........................12-7 12.1.4 Restoring the Configuration from the File........................12-7 12.1.5 Exporting the Dynamic Data...........................................12-8 12.1.6 Importing the Dynamic Data .........................................12-10

12.2

Managing Data Sources.............................................................12-13 12.2.1 Importing Configuration from the File ............................12-13 12.2.2 Clearing the Configuration Data ...................................12-14

12.3

Backing Up / Restoring Service Data..........................................12-15 12.3.1 Synchronizing All Configuration Data ...........................12-16 12.3.2 Switching to the Offline Mode .......................................12-17 12.3.3 Backing Up the Configuration to the File .......................12-18 12.3.4 Restoring the Configuration from the File......................12-18 12.3.5 Downloading Data to the Client End .............................12-19

12.3.6 Uploading Data to the Server .......................................12-19 Appendix A

OTNM2000 Service List .......................................................... A-1

Appendix B

Setting the Web Browser ......................................................... B-1

Appendix C

Abbreviations.......................................................................... C-1

Figures

Figure 1-1

Interrelationship between the Manager, the Agent and the Managed Object............................................................................................1-3

Figure 1-2

The OTNM2000 Management Structure.........................................1-4

Figure 1-3

Numbering Hierarchy .....................................................................1-5

Figure 2-1

The OTNM2000 Main GUI .............................................................2-5

Figure 2-2

Display Pane ...............................................................................2-26

Figure 2-3

The Task Panel Pane ..................................................................2-27

Figure 2-4

The Command manager Window ...............................................2-32

Figure 2-5

The Client Locking Alert Box ........................................................2-33

Figure 3-1

Setting Automatic Lockout of the Client End ...................................3-6

Figure 3-2

Setting Automatically Exiting the Client End....................................3-7

Figure 5-1

Network Topology Construction Flow..............................................5-2

Figure 5-2

Setting the NE Icon ........................................................................5-8

Figure 5-3

Setting the Fiber Connection Attribute ............................................5-9

Figure 5-4

Setting the Topology Area Size ....................................................5-11

Figure 5-5

Setting the Background Color.......................................................5-12

Figure 5-6

Setting the Color of the NE...........................................................5-13

Figure 5-7

Setting the Color of the Line .........................................................5-14

Figure 5-8

Viewing the Subnet ......................................................................5-26

Figure 5-9

Collapsing Subnet........................................................................5-27

Figure 5-10 Querying the NE Port ...................................................................5-38 Figure 6-1

The Time Calibration Alert Box .....................................................6-2

Figure 6-2

The Management Configuration Alert Box ...................................6-3

Figure 6-3

The management config data Window .........................................6-5

Figure 6-4

The Structure Configuration Alert Box .........................................6-6

Figure 6-5

The structure config data Window ...............................................6-7

Figure 6-6

The Device Configuration Alert Box .............................................6-9

Figure 6-7

The Refresh Config Time Alert Box ............................................6-11

Figure 6-8

The NE Config Compare Window ...............................................6-13

Figure 6-9

The Card Configuration Page.......................................................6-14

Figure 6-10 The Card Control Command Page ...............................................6-18 Figure 6-11

The Card Status Page..................................................................6-19

Figure 6-12 Adding a Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration ..................6-21 Figure 6-13 The Board software manager Window .......................................6-27 Figure 6-14 Imported into the Software Library ................................................6-28 Figure 6-15 Checking Card Software Information ............................................6-29 Figure 6-16 The Result of Pinging NE .............................................................6-35 Figure 6-17 The Optical Cable Router Setting Dialog Box.............................6-38 Figure 6-18 The NE Not Provisioned Tab ......................................................6-41 Figure 6-19 The Backup DCG File Dialog Box ...............................................6-42 Figure 7-1

PTN / IPRAN Configuration Item ....................................................7-4

Figure 7-2

POTN/PE-OTN Configuration Item...............................................7-52

Figure 7-3

OCh Channel Configuration GUI ..................................................7-53

Figure 7-4

Selecting SPC .............................................................................7-56

Figure 7-5

The ASON Advanced Settings Window ........................................7-57

Figure 7-6

ODUk Channel Configuration GUI................................................7-59

Figure 7-7

Client Service Channel Configuration GUI ....................................7-61

Figure 7-8

ODUk Ring Protection Configuration GUI .....................................7-63

Figure 7-9

OCh Ring Protection Configuration GUI .......................................7-64

Figure 7-10 ODUk Ring Protection Configuration GUI .....................................7-65 Figure 7-11

Selecting the OTN NE to Merge ...................................................7-91

Figure 7-12 The NE Merge Configuration GUI.................................................7-92 Figure 7-13 Merging NEs - Selecting the NE ...................................................7-93 Figure 7-14 Merging NEs - Confirming the Configuration .................................7-93 Figure 7-15 Merging NEs - Completing the Configuration ................................7-94 Figure 7-16 Inserting the NE - Selecting the NE ..............................................7-95 Figure 7-17 Inserting the NE - Confirming the Configuration ............................7-95 Figure 7-18 Inserting the NE - Completing the Configuration ...........................7-96 Figure 7-19 Splitting the NE - Selecting the Configuration................................7-97 Figure 7-20 Splitting the NE - Confirming the Configuration .............................7-97

Figure 7-21 Splitting the NE - Completing the Configuration ............................7-98 Figure 7-22 The NE Search GUI .....................................................................7-99 Figure 7-23 Accessing the OTN Channel Wavelength Window......................7-100 Figure 7-24 The OTN Channel Wavelength Window .....................................7-100 Figure 7-25 Accessing the OTN NE Optical Link Window ..............................7-102 Figure 7-26 The OTN NE Optical Link Window..............................................7-102 Figure 7-27 Accessing the OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Window ..................7-104 Figure 7-28 The OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Window..................................7-104 Figure 7-29 Accessing the OTN WSS Group Window ...................................7-106 Figure 7-30 The OTN WSS Group Window ...................................................7-106 Figure 7-31 Accessing the OTN OPM Wavelength Monitoring Window..........7-108 Figure 7-32 The OTN OPM Wavelength Monitoring Window .........................7-108 Figure 7-33 Accessing the OTN SAPU Protection Window............................7-109 Figure 7-34 The OTN SAPU Protection Window ........................................... 7-110 Figure 8-1

Checking the Current Alarm Information .......................................8-11

Figure 8-2

Option List of the Alarm Title Bar ..................................................8-12

Figure 8-3

Viewing the Alarm History ............................................................8-14

Figure 8-4

Option List of the Title Bar ............................................................8-15

Figure 8-5

The Set Current Alarm Query Condition Dialog Box..................8-19

Figure 8-6

Defining the Alarm Profile Name ..................................................8-20

Figure 8-7

The Alarm Statistical Template Tab ...........................................8-21

Figure 8-8

The Alarm Level Template Tab ...................................................8-24

Figure 8-9

Alarm Handling Process...............................................................8-27

Figure 8-10 Querying Correlated Alarms .........................................................8-32 Figure 8-11

The Current Alarm Panel..............................................................8-34

Figure 8-12 The History Alarm Statistics Tab ...............................................8-38 Figure 8-13 File Result List of Alarm History Statistics .....................................8-38 Figure 8-14 Checking Alarm Help ...................................................................8-41 Figure 8-15 The Custom Reasons and Measures Dialog Box .......................8-42 Figure 8-16 Viewing the Alarm Help ................................................................8-43 Figure 8-17 Setting the Current Alarm Filter ....................................................8-46 Figure 8-18 Setting the Card Alarm Filter ........................................................8-48

Figure 8-19 Adding a Alarm Filter Rule............................................................8-53 Figure 8-20 The Filter Window - Alarm History...............................................8-55 Figure 8-21 Viewing History Alarm Filter .........................................................8-56 Figure 8-22 Customizing the Alarm Level........................................................8-60 Figure 8-23 Setting the Reporting Condition....................................................8-61 Figure 8-24 Viewing the Reported Content......................................................8-63 Figure 8-25 Viewing the Filter Content ............................................................8-63 Figure 8-26 Setting the Filter Condition ...........................................................8-64 Figure 8-27 The Current Alarm Panel..............................................................8-70 Figure 8-28 Setting the Alarm Indicator Color ..................................................8-71 Figure 9-1

Setting the Performance Collection Mode.......................................9-5

Figure 9-2

Option List of the Performance Title Bar .........................................9-7

Figure 9-3

Setting the Performance Query Condition.......................................9-9

Figure 9-4

Option List of the Performance History Title Bar............................9-10

Figure 9-5

The Set Performance Query Condition Dialog Box....................9-11

Figure 9-6

Defining the Performance Profile Name........................................9-12

Figure 9-7

Viewing the Accumulative Performance........................................9-13

Figure 9-8

Detecting the Real-time Performance ...........................................9-15

Figure 9-9

Viewing Performance Reports......................................................9-17

Figure 9-10 Viewing the Performance History Statistical and Analytical Report 9-18 Figure 9-11

Checking the Performance Help...................................................9-20

Figure 9-12 The Custom Reasons and Measures Dialog Box .......................9-21 Figure 9-13 Checking All the Performance Help Information............................9-21 Figure 9-14 The PM Backup Management Tab..............................................9-25 Figure 9-15 File Result List .............................................................................9-26 Figure 9-16 The PM-REPORT Dialog Box ......................................................9-27 Figure 9-17 Setting the Card Performance Filter..............................................9-28 Figure 9-18 The Filter Settings Window - Performance History ......................9-33 Figure 9-19 Viewing History Performance Filter...............................................9-34 Figure 9-20 Viewing the Optical Power Statistics.............................................9-36 Figure 9-21 Setting the Performance Query Condition.....................................9-39 Figure 9-22 Viewing the Port Traffic ................................................................9-41

Figure 9-23 The Performance Collection Settings Dialog Box ......................9-41 Figure 9-24 Setting the Traffic Threshold.........................................................9-49 Figure 9-25 Setting the Delayed Time to Report the Threshold-crossing Alarm 9-50 Figure 9-26 Viewing Threshold-crossing Alarms .............................................9-50 Figure 10-1 Viewing Command Logs ..............................................................10-4 Figure 10-2 Viewing User Logs.......................................................................10-6 Figure 10-3 Viewing Business Logs ................................................................10-8 Figure 10-4 The Filter Settings Window - Command Logs ........................... 10-11 Figure 11-1

The Add Dialog Box - Alarm Filter Statistics ............................... 11-41

Figure 11-2

The Add Dialog Box - Bandwidth Utilization Ratio Statistics........ 11-46

Figure 11-3

The Add Dialog Box - 15min Traffic Statistics ............................. 11-50

Figure 11-4

The Add Dialog Box - 24hour Traffic Statistics............................ 11-54

Figure 11-5

The Add Dialog Box - Device Environment Parameter Statistics. 11-58

Figure 11-6

The Add Dialog Box - Optical Performance Statistics ................. 11-61

Figure 11-7

The Add Dialog Box - NE CPU and Memory Usage Statistics..... 11-65

Figure 11-8

The Add Dialog Box - VOA Status Statistics............................... 11-68

Figure 11-9

Viewing the Opposite End Port Information................................. 11-73

Figure 11-10 Viewing Software Version .......................................................... 11-74 Figure 11-11 The Browse IP Configuration Tab ............................................ 11-75 Figure 12-1 Dynamic Data Export / Import Tool ...............................................12-8 Figure 12-2 Selecting Items to Be Exported ....................................................12-9 Figure 12-3 Export Success Alert Box...........................................................12-10 Figure 12-4 Dynamic Data Export / Import Tool ............................................. 12-11 Figure 12-5 Selecting Items to be Restored...................................................12-12 Figure 12-6 Import Success Alert Box ...........................................................12-13

Tables Table 2-1

Description of Submenus under the System Main Menu ................2-6

Table 2-2

Description of Submenus under the View Main Menu .....................2-6

Table 2-3

Description of Submenus under the Business Management Main Menu .............................................................................................2-8

Table 2-4

Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu ....2-10

Table 2-5

Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu ....2-13

Table 2-6

Description of Submenus under the Alarm Main Menu .................2-14

Table 2-7

Description of Submenus of the Performance Main Menu............2-15

Table 2-8

Description of Submenus under the Statistics Main Menu ...........2-15

Table 2-9

Description of Submenus under the Security Main Menu .............2-18

Table 2-10

Description of Submenus under the Help Main Menu ...................2-18

Table 2-11

Description of Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar .................................2-19

Table 2-12

Shortcut Icons on the Main Topology ............................................2-21

Table 2-13

Description of Commonly Used Shortcuts.....................................2-22

Table 2-14

Description of the Object Tree Panes ...........................................2-25

Table 2-15

Description of Status Bar..............................................................2-27

Table 2-16

Access Method of Checking the Command Manager....................2-31

Table 2-17

Access Method of Monitoring Network Status...............................2-34

Table 3-1

Description of the Authority and Domain Division Scenario ...........3-11

Table 3-2

Authorization Planning Flow.........................................................3-12

Table 3-3

User Settings ...............................................................................3-25

Table 3-4

Creating User Groups ..................................................................3-34

Table 3-5

Creating Users.............................................................................3-35

Table 3-6

Access Method of Managing the EMS_f Authority.........................3-42

Table 3-7

Description of the Configuration Items in the EMS_f Management Tab ..............................................................................................3-42

Table 4-1

NE IP Address Settings................................................................4-30

Table 5-1

Description of the Network Topology Construction Flow ..................5-3

Table 5-2

Description of the Fiber Connection Attributes ................................5-5

Table 6-1

Access Method of Downloading Management Configuration...........6-3

Table 6-2

Access Method of Analyzing Network Block Management Configuration .................................................................................6-4

Table 6-3

Access Method of Downloading Structure Configuration .................6-6

Table 6-4

Access Method of Analyzing Network Block Structure Configuration .................................................................................6-7

Table 6-5

Access Method of Downloading Equipment Configuration ..............6-8

Table 6-6

Access Method of Refreshing the Configuration Time ...................6-10

Table 6-7

Access Method of Configuration Check ........................................6-11

Table 6-8

Operations in the Card Configuration Page...................................6-15

Table 6-9

Access Method of Synchronizing the Card Configuration ..............6-20

Table 6-10

Description of Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration ...........6-21

Table 6-11

Access Method of Delivering Software .........................................6-23

Table 7-1

Description of Circuit Basic Properties..........................................7-11

Table 7-2

Description of Bandwidth Settings ................................................7-12

Table 7-3

Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Source/ Sink Node, Source / Sink Port, and BFD) .......................................................7-12

Table 7-4

Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Routing Policy and Intermediate Route Constraints)...................................................7-13

Table 7-5

Description of Precreated Circuit Parameters ...............................7-14

Table 7-6

Description of Revert Properties...................................................7-14

Table 7-7

Description of the Working / Protection Path Properties (when BFD or Proactive OAM is enabled)...........................................................7-15

Table 7-8

Description of Dynamic / Static PW Basic Properties. ...................7-17

Table 7-9

Description of Lower-level Tunnel Parameters..............................7-18

Table 7-10

Description of PW Advanced Properties .......................................7-19

Table 7-11

Description of L2VPN Basic Properties.........................................7-32

Table 7-12

Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the E-LINE Service ............................................................................7-32

Table 7-13

Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the E-LAN or E-TREE Service ...........................................................7-33

Table 7-14

Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the CES Service ................................................................................7-33

Table 7-15

Description of Node NE / Port Configuration Parameters of the N:1 Group Service..............................................................................7-34

Table 7-16

Description of the RD/RT, PE Member and Interface List Information Parameters of the L3 VPN........................................7-37

Table 7-17

Description of the ATM Service Cross-connect Settings................7-40

Table 7-18

Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties ......................7-45

Table 7-19

Description of VRRP configuration Parameters ............................7-47

Table 7-20

Description of Path Basic Attributes..............................................7-73

Table 7-21

Description of ASON Advanced Parameters.................................7-75

Table 7-22

Description of the Source / Sink NEs Ports of the VCG Circuit.......7-78

Table 7-23

Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties ......................7-80

Table 7-24

Description of the PTN Global Variable Parameters ......................7-88

Table 8-1

Meaning and Severity of Alarm Levels............................................8-4

Table 8-2

Description of Alarm-related Parameters ........................................8-8

Table 8-3

Access Method of Viewing the Current Alarm ...............................8-10

Table 8-4

Access Method of Viewing the Alarm History ................................8-13

Table 8-5

Description of the Menus in the Customize Alarm Level Dialog Box..............................................................................................8-25

Table 8-6

Description of the Alarm Processing Flow.....................................8-28

Table 8-7

Data Save Parameters - Alarm History .........................................8-44

Table 8-8

Access Method of Setting the Current Alarm Filter ........................8-46

Table 8-9

Descriptions of Items in the Card Alarm Filter ...............................8-48

Table 8-10

Description of Items in the Card Alarm Filter Tab...........................8-53

Table 8-11

Access Method of Setting the Alarm Reporting .............................8-61

Table 8-12

Description of Alarm Reporting Conditions ...................................8-62

Table 8-13

Description of the SMS Device Parameters ..................................8-68

Table 9-1

Description of Performance-related Parameters .............................9-3

Table 9-2

Access Method of Viewing the Current Performance ......................9-6

Table 9-3

Access Method of Viewing the Performance History .......................9-8

Table 9-4

Data Save Parameters - Performance History ..............................9-23

Table 9-5

Description of Items in the Card Performance Setting ...................9-29

Table 9-6

Access Method of the Optical Power Statistics .............................9-35

Table 9-7

The Traffic Threshold Setting Access Method of the Card .............9-49

Table 10-1

Description of the Parameters in the Save Data Tab - Command Logs ..........................................................................................10-13

Table 11-1

Introduction to Extended Functions ............................................ 11-38

Table 11-2

Description of Alarm Filter Statistics Parameters......................... 11-41

Table 11-3

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the Bandwidth Usage Statistics......................................................................... 11-46

Table 11-4

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 15min Traffic Statistics.................................................................................... 11-50

Table 11-5

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 24-hour Traffic Statistics ......................................................................... 11-54

Table 11-6

Description of Device Environment Parameters Statistics ........... 11-58

Table 11-7

Description of Optical Power Performance Statistics................... 11-62

Table 11-8

Description of NE CUPU and Memory Usage Statistical Parameters................................................................................ 11-65

Table 11-9

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the VOA Status Statistics.................................................................................... 11-69

Table 12-1

Description of the OTNM2000 Backup and Restoration ................12-2

Table 12-2

Description of the Items in the Left List .........................................12-9

Table A-1

Description of the OTNM2000 Services......................................... A-1

1

Preparatory Knowledge The OTNM2000 Element Management System (the OTNM2000 for short) performs effective and unified management of various access equipment offered by FiberHome to facilitate users’ operations and reduce the maintenance costs of the equipment. Below are detailed contents.

Management System Numbering Hierarchy

Version: A

1-1

e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System Operation Guide

1.1

Management System The following introduces the management model and management structure of the OTNM2000.

1.1.1

Management Model Practically, the network management uses a multi-layered distributed structure and each layer has the management capability of preset level. The most elementary management model includes three units: manager (M), agent (A) and managed object (MO). u

Manager:

4

The manager participates in the system management process, the manager can communicate with NEs of the same layer and the operating system; in addition, it provides the management support for them.

4

Gives operating information of the OTNM2000 (such as searching the alarm record and setting the threshold), receives event reports forwarded by the agent (such as the alarm and running performance) and reports the operating result to the upper-level EMS.

Note: In the OTNM2000, there are usually two "M"s on one module, which are "Ma" (active manager) and "Mb" (standby manager) respectively. Under normal occasion, "Ma" performs as the manager; when "Ma" fails, "Mb" replaces "Ma" to be the manager. u

Agent: It manages relevant objects directly, responds to commands delivered by the manager and informs the manager of MO activities.

u

Managed object: It receives and implements the administrating commands from the manager, and informs the agent of its activities.

Figure 1-1 shows the relationship among the manager, agent and managed object.

1-2

Version: A

1 Preparatory Knowledge

Figure 1-1

Interrelationship between the Manager, the Agent and the Managed Object

The one-to-many relationship between the manager and the agent means that one manager is able to exchange information with many agents.

1.1.2

Management Structure The OTNM2000 uses layered management mode to achieve the management of multiple elements with one network management system, as shown in Figure 1-2.

Version: A

1-3


Figure 1-2

The OTNM2000 Management Structure

The OTNM2000 is connected to the equipment’s EMU via F interface, and manages all EMUs through monitoring path. An EMU is able to serve as both the manager and the agent. It communicates with BCT (Board Control Terminal) of each card via internal bus. The communications include transmitting management operation commands and receiving notifications. BCT (Board Control Terminal), as the managed object, receives and implements the administrating commands from EMU, and informs EMU of its activities.

Note: BCT (Board Control Terminal) is a subcard on the card for managing the card. The BCT collects the alarm and performance information of the card and transmits them to the EMU. Simultaneously, the BCT operates the configuration management of the card according to the commands from EMU. The OTNM2000 performs real-time monitor to the NE via both polling and active report modes. u

Polling: Usually, the NE-level manager calls each NE in the part in turn via polling mode, collects and stores the alarm and performance of them.

1-4

Version: A

1 Preparatory Knowledge

u

Active report: If one alarm occurs in some NE of the part, it will be reported to the NE-Level manager immediately. To view the information, users should send a request to the NE-level manager, who will show users the collected information via GUI immediately.

1.2

Numbering Hierarchy In the OTNM2000, managed objects are divided into logical part and physical part. Using the unique numbering system can correctly locate each managed object in the network, as shown in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3

u

Numbering Hierarchy

Physical part: The actual physical structure of the equipment, including bureau, rack, shelf, slot and card.

u

Logical part: The concepts including project, part, NE and group that facilitates EMS’ management of equipment.

Both of these two parts are independent of each other but cannot be separated.

Version: A

1-5


1.2.1

Physical Part The bureau number, rack number, shelf number and slot number compose the physical address. u

Bureau: Equipment in different places is not set in one bureau. Names of different bureaus should be different.

u

Rack: Racks in one bureau are numbered uniformly. The number is unique.

u

Shelf: Shelves in one rack are numbered uniformly. The number is unique.

u

Slot: Slot number is related to equipment. The slot number of a set of equipment follows a unified specification and cannot be changed manually.

u

Card: The address of a card and group number compose the unique identification (ID number) for the card within NE. The address of the card is unique within a group.

1.2.2

Logical Part The project number, part number, NE number, group number and slot number compose the logical address. u

Project: Composed of several parts, project is the topmost layer of numbering hierarchy. The project number is unique.

u

Part: Part is composed of multiple interconnected NEs. Part segmentation must be convenient for management; and usually, it depends on the structure of transmission system (such as the ring or chain). In one project, the part number is unique.

Note: In one part, the quantity of NEs should be no more than 32. u

NE: NE is logically independent and it is the smallest unit to perform some functions. Usually, one EMU card is the entity of one NE. In one part, the NE number is unique.

u

Group: Group number and slot address compose the only identity (ID number) for the card within NE. In one NE, the group number is unique.

1-6

Version: A

2

OTNM2000 Basic Operations Login / Logout GUI Introduction Common Operations Viewing the Command Manager Locking / Unlocking the Client End Monitoring the Network Status Viewing the Version Information Current User Logout

Version: A

2-1


2.1

Login / Logout The following introduces how to log into or log out of the OTNM2000 client end.

2.1.1

Logging into the OTNM2000 Only after logging into the OTNM2000 can you perform operations in the OTNM2000 graphical user interface (GUI).

Prerequisite u

You have logged into the operating system as the administrator.

u

The OTNM2000 server end services have been started up.

u

The client IP address is included in the access control list of the OTNM2000 system settings. See Setting the Access Control List for the settings of access control list.

u

You have been assigned with a valid user account (username and password).

1.

Double-click the OTNM2000 icon on the desktop.

2.

Select the OTNM2000 server IP address in the Server drop-down list.

Procedure

If the server IP address is not set, follow the steps below to add the server IP address. 1.

Click

to the right of Server drop-down list to open the Server

configuration dialog box, and then click Add. 2.

In the added row, click to configure the parameters of the OTNM2000 server and then click OK.

Parameter IP Address

Name

2-2

Description It is required. Sets the IP address corresponding to the network card of the OTNM2000 server database. Sets the name of the OTNM2000 server, used to differentiating from other OTNM2000 servers.

Version: A

2 OTNM2000 Basic Operations

Parameter

Description Configures this item according to the actual situation. If the

Whether the configuration

gateway of the server is inconsistent with that of the client, it is

NAT gateway

required to configure the NAT gateway to implement interconnection. If Whether the configuration NAT gateway is set to Yes,

Server Extranet IP

enter the extranet IP address corresponding to the OTNM2000 server.

3.

In the Server configuration dialog box, select the server in the list and click Connect Test.

4

Click OK in the displayed connect success alert box.

4

If connect failure appears, check whether the network connection and the server IP address are correctly configured, and then test the connection again.

4.

When the connection test is successful, click Add in the Server configuration dialog box.

5. 3.

In the displayed alert box, click OK to save the server IP settings.

In the Local IP drop-down list, select the client end IP address. If the gateway of the server is inconsistent with that of the client, it is required to configure the NAT gateway to implement interconnection. Follow the steps below to set the extranet IP address of the client end. 1.

Click

2.

In the displayed Client NAT configuration dialog box, set the client

.

extranet IP address and click OK. 4.

Version: A

Type the username and password in the Login dialog box and click OK.

2-3


Note: u

After the OTNM2000 is installed, the default username and password are admin. You should modify the password immediately after login so as to ensure the OTNM2000 security.

u

By default, when you enter incorrect passwords three times in a row, the OTNM2000 will lock your account. To unlock it, see Unlocking Users.

2.1.2

Logging Out of the OTNM2000 The following introduces how to log out of the OTNM2000.

Prerequisite The OTNM2000 runs normally.

Procedure 1.

Select System→Exist in the OTNM2000 window or click

at the upper right

corner of the OTNM2000 window. 2.

2.2

In the displayed alert box, select one of the following operations:

4

Click Yes to save the service configuration and exit.

4

Click No to exit without saving the service configuration.

GUI Introduction The following introduces the layout and functions of the OTNM2000 GUI.

2.2.1

System GUI The main GUI of the OTNM2000 is composed of the object tree pane, toolbar, menu bar, status bar, etc, as shown in Figure 2-1.

2-4

Version: A


(1) Object tree pane

(2) Menu bar

(4) Display pane

(5) Status bar

Figure 2-1

2.2.2

(3) Toolbar

The OTNM2000 Main GUI

Main Menu The following introduces the functions of the main menu and the sub menus of the OTNM2000.

Version: A

2-5


2.2.2.1

System The submenus under the System main menu are described in Table 2-1. Table 2-1

Description of Submenus under the System Main Menu

Menu Option Object Searching

Query Condition Option

Searches for the desired object by setting the search condition. The search objects include NEs, network block and shelves. Sets the parameters related to alarm / performance search, including setting the alarm / performance query conditions and setting conditions before querying the alarm /performance history data.

Automatic

Sets automatic refreshing the project or other current alarm values,

Function

automatic lockout and automatic exist.

Sound

Sets the alarm sound and animation parameters, including whether to

Option

enable the sound, sound play mode, play time and play priority. Opens the Save Settings tab to set the data save policy.

Save Data Network Status Monitor Lock the EMS

2.2.2.2

Description

Opens the Network Status Monitor tab to monitor the network status. Locks the current operating and you cannot perform any operations on the GUI.

Change Password

Changes your password.

Connect to MSMP

Connects to the multi-service management service. In normal

Service

connection status, this menu is greyed out.

Start Devcfg.exe

Starts the Devcfg configuration management GUI.

Log out

Logs out of the current OTNM2000 GUI and returns to the login GUI.

Exit

Exits and closes the OTNM2000 GUI.

View The submenus under the View main menu are described in Table 2-2. Table 2-2

Description of Submenus under the View Main Menu

Menu Option Topo Layer Management

2-6

Description Opens the Topo Layer Management tab to set the layer-based topology.

Topo

Bureau

Sets whether to display the bureau name of the NE in the main

Display

Name

topology.

Version: A


Table 2-2

Description of Submenus under the View Main Menu (Continued)

Menu Option IP Address

topology. Sets whether to display the logical address of the NE in the main

Address

topology.

Connection

Sets whether to display the connection number of the NE in the

Number

main topology. Sets whether to display the dialing switch of the NE in the main topology.

Show link

Sets whether to display the remarks of the links in the main

remark

topology.

Show NE in the network block only NE Icon Line Property

Setting

Sets whether to display the IP address of the NE in the main

Logic

Switch

Topo

Description

Sets whether to only display the NEs of the selected network block in the main topology. Sets the icon of the NE according to the NE type. Sets the properties (width, dotted or solid line) of the line according to the link rate.

Regional

Sets the size of the main topology area, including the width and

Size

height.

Background image Use default background Logical Tree Operational Tree Browse Tree

Sets the background image of the main topology.

Adopts the default background for the main topology. Sets whether to display the Logical Tree pane in the object pane. Sets whether to display the Operational Tree pane in the object pane. Sets whether to display the Browse Tree pane in the object pane. Opens the Command manager window to view all the operation

Command Manager

commands, including command start time, used time and other relevant information. Supports switching between the main topology and the DCN

DCN Topo

topology. The DCN topology visualizes the communication relationship among NEs, providing convenience for management and maintenance.

Version: A

2-7


2.2.2.3

Business Management The submenus under the Business Management main menu are described in Table 2-3. Table 2-3

Description of Submenus under the Business Management Main Menu

Menu Option

Description Queries and manages the tunnel data configured in the

Tunnel

OTNM2000. Queries and manages the PW data configured in the

PW

OTNM2000. Queries and manages the L2VPN data configured in the

L2VPN Service

OTNM2000. Queries and manages the L3VPN data configured in the

L3VPN Service

OTNM2000. Queries and manages the group service data configured in

Group Service

the OTNM2000. Queries and manages the MPLS ring data configured in

MPLS Ring

the OTNM2000. Queries and manages the VRRP data configured in the

VRRP

OTNM2000. Queries and manages the protection pair data configured

Protection Pair

in the OTNM2000. Queries and manages the OTN circuit data configured in

OTN Circuit

the OTNM2000. Queries and manages the OTN ring data configured in the

OTN Ring

OTNM2000. Queries and manages the OTN NE structure data

OTN NE graph

configured in the OTNM2000.

SDH/MSTP Circuit

the OTNM2000. Queries and manages the SDH/MSTP ring data

SDH/MSTP Ring

configured in the OTNM2000. Broken Tunnel

management

2-8

configured in the OTNM2000. Queries and manages the VCG channel data configured in

VCG Channel

Broken data

Queries and manages the SDH/MSTP circuit data

Queries and manages the broken tunnels in the OTNM2000.

Broken PW

Queries and manages the broken PWs in the OTNM2000.

Broken Service

Queries and manages the broken server data in the

Data

OTNM2000. Version: A


Table 2-3

Description of Submenus under the Business Management Main Menu (Continued)

Menu Option

Description Broken MPLS

Queries and manages the broken MPLS rings in the

Rings

OTNM2000.

Broken Protection Pairs Broken OTN

Queries and manages the broken protection pairs in the OTNM2000. Queries and manages the broken OTN circuits in the OTNM2000.

Broken OTN

Queries and manages the broken OTN rings in the

Rings

OTNM2000.

Broken SDH/MSTP Circuits Broken SDH/MSTP Rings

Queries and manages the broken SDH/MSTP circuits in the OTNM2000.

Queries and manages the broken SDH/MSTP rings in the OTNM2000.

Save Config Data to Database

Saves the current configuration data to the database.

Read Config Data from Database

Reads the configuration data from the database.

Full Download

Save Cross-

Saves the cross-connect data of the specified NE to the

connect (NE)

database.

Deliver Cross-

Delivers the cross-connect data of the specified NE to the

connect (NE)

database.

Save SDH NE

Saves the SDH NE cross-connect data into the database

Cross-connect

and view the save status.

Increment Import Datasource

Imports the pre-configured data source file to the OTNM2000, which greatly improves the service configuration efficiency.

Merge Config

Merges the configurations of multiple EMSs.

Clear Config

Clears all service data configured in the OTNM2000.

Data

Please handle with care. Notifies the multi-service background to generate the

Synchronize

circuit data and report the circuits onto the GUI. The GUI

All Config Data

automatically saves the reported data into the database and provides ways to view circuits of different types.

Backup/Restore

Switch to Offline Mode

Backup to File Version: A

Switches between online mode and offline mode. u

Online Mode: Obtains data from the background.

u

Offline Mode: Loads the data configured offline.

Backs up the current configuration file of business management. 2-9


Table 2-3

Description of Submenus under the Business Management Main Menu (Continued)

Menu Option

Description Recovery From File Downloaded Data to the Client End

2.2.2.4

Imports the configuration file of business management.

Downloads the data from the current server to the client end in offline mode.

Uploaded Data

Uploads the data of the current client end to the server in

to the Server

offline mode.

Business Configuration The submenus under the Business Configuration main menu are described in Table 2-4. Table 2-4

Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu

Menu Option

Description Tunnel

Configures the dynamic / static tunnel.

PW

Configures the dynamic / static circuit.

L2VPN Service

Configures the L2 VPN.

L3VPN Service


ATM Service

Configures the ATM service.

Group Service PTN/IPRAN

Ring protection IPRAN VRRP Config Quickly Create Tunnel

Configures the combination service bridging the L2VPN and the L3 VPN. Creates the protection ring for the PTN/IPRAN device. Configures the VRRP parameters.

Quickly creates the tunnel.

Quickly Create Ethernet

Quickly configures the Ethernet service and PW.

Service Optical Channel POTN/PE-OTN

ODUk Channel Client Service Channel

2-10

Creates the OCh channel. Creates the ODUk channel. Creates the client service channel.

Version: A


Table 2-4

Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu (Continued)

Menu Option

Description ODUk Protection

Creates the ODUk protection group.

Group OCh Ring Protection ODUk Ring Protection

Creates the ODUk ring protection.

Tunnel

Configures the dynamic / static tunnel.

PW

Configures the dynamic / static circuit.

L2VPN Service


L3VPN Service


Group Service Ring Protection IPRAN VRRP Config

SDH/MSTP

Creates the OCh ring protection.

Configures the combination service bridging the L2VPN and the L3 VPN. Creates the protection ring for the POTN/PE-OTN device. Configures the VRRP parameters.

Circuit

Creates the SDH circuits.

VCG Channel

Creates the SDH VCG channel.

Ring protection

Creates the SDH protection ring.

PTN NE Global Settings Global VS OAM Enable Global LM Frame Enable Merge OTN NEs Service Global

OTN

Settings

wavelength

Sets the global variable of the PTN NE.

Enables the global section layer OAM. Enables the global section layer LM frame. Merges the OTN NEs.

Configures the OTN channel wavelength.

setup OTN NE Optical Link

Configures the fiber connection among the OTN NEs.

OTN OTUk/ODUk

Configures the OTN OTUk / ODUk overhead.

Overhead OTN WSS group

Version: A

Configures the OTN WSS group.

2-11


Table 2-4

Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu (Continued)

Menu Option

Description OTN OPM Wavelength

Configures the OTN OPM wavelength monitoring.

Monitor OTN SAPU Protection SPC Resource Management (SDH/PTN) SPC Resource Management (OTN/POTS) ASON Resource Management

Synchronize SPC Port Data Synchronize SPC Resource Synchronize SPC Tunnels

Display Route

Configures the OTN SAPU protection.

Indicates the SPC resource management for the SDH and PTN devices.

Indicates the SPC resource management for the OTN and POTS devices. Synchronizes the SPC port on the device to the OTNM2000 to ensure the statuses of the SPC ports in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent. Synchronizes the SPC data on the device to the OTNM2000 to ensure the statuses of the SPC data in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent. Synchronizes the SPC channel on the device to the OTNM2000 to ensure the statuses of the SPC circuits in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent. Displays the information of the configured route. Includes the three parameters of the OTNM2000:

Options

Background Initialization Parameter, Operation Parameter Settings and Display Settings.

2-12

Version: A


2.2.2.5

Configuration The submenus under the Configuration main menu are described in Table 2-5. Table 2-5

Description of Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu

Menu Option Manager Service config GNE Configuration

NE IP Remote Config

Configures the manager service and its corresponding network block. Configures the gateway NE, including the gateway NE group and gateway NE. Configures the IP address, mask and gateway of the NE remotely through the device SN.

Downloading

Downloads the network block’s management configuration data from

Management Config

the database to the device.

Download Structure

Downloads the network block’s structure configuration from the

Config

database to the device.

Download Equipment

Downloads the equipment configuration data of the network block or

Config

NE from the database to the device.

Refresh Config Time

Refreshes the configuration delivering time.

Check Config Network Block Management Config Analysis Network Block Structure Config Analysis Optical Cable Router Setting

Card Config Timing Synchronization

Backup DCG File

Version: A

Description

Checks whether the actual device configuration is consistent with the configuration in the database. Reads the management configuration data of the network block from the device and check whether the configuration is correct.

Reads the structure configuration data of the network block from the device and check whether the configuration is correct. Sets the information of the same optical cable route. Check whether the active and standby circuits are in the same optical cable route so as to ensure the availability of the standby circuit. Sets the scheduled synchronization task of card configuration to synchronize the configuration data at the device side to the OTNM2000. Sets the automatic backup task of DCG files to back up the configuration file to the specified directory.

2-13


2.2.2.6

Alarm The submenus under the Alarm main menu are described in Table 2-6. Table 2-6

Description of Submenus under the Alarm Main Menu

Menu Option

Description

Current Alarm

Opens the current alarm tab to view current alarms.

Alarm History

Opens the alarm history tab to view the alarm history.

View Report Alarm

Alarm Report Settings

Selects whether to open the Report Content Display tab to view the reported alarms. Sets the number of reported alarms according to the requirement for network maintenance. Filters the specified current alarms according to the requirement

Current Alarm Filter

for network maintenance. The filtered current alarms will not appear on the OTNM2000 GUI. Filters the specified alarm history according to the requirement

Alarm History Mask

for network maintenance. The filtered alarm history will not be saved into the database.

Alarm Filtering Rule

Manages the current alarm filter rules, including adding,

Management

modifying and deleting alarm filter rules.

Custom Alarm Level

Re-defines the alarm levels.

Alarm Level Template

Alarm Statistical Template

House-Keeping Alarm

2-14

Manages the alarm level templates according to the requirement for network maintenance. Manages the alarm statistical templates and sets the statistical range of the current alarm by switching the template. Sets the query object and monitors the environment alarm of the designated object.

Version: A


2.2.2.7

Performance The submenus under the Performance main menu are described in Table 2-7. Table 2-7

Description of Submenus of the Performance Main Menu

Menu Option

Description

Current Performance

Opens the current performance tab to view current performance.

History Performance

Collection Task Settings

Opens the history performance tab to view the performance history. Sets the performance collection task indicator, including the collection object and collection start / end time. Filters the specified performance history according to the

History Performance Mask

requirement for network maintenance. The filtered performance history will not be saved into the database. Monitors the device traffic. The monitored objects involve ports,

Flow Monitor

sections, LSP, PW and L2VPN.

Long-term traffic monitoring settings

2.2.2.8

Sets the long-term traffic monitoring parameters, including the monitored objects, storage period and save directory of data files.

Statistics The submenus under the Statistics main menu are described in Table 2-8. Table 2-8

Description of Submenus under the Statistics Main Menu

Menu Option

Description Link Resource

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of link

Usage

resource usage and exports reports.

Circuit Statistics on

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of circuit

Link

information on links and exports reports.

NE-Tributary-Port

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the NE

Service Data

Usage

tributary port usage and exports reports.

Query Report

Tributary-Port Circuit

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of circuit

Statistics

information of the NE tributary port and exports reports.

Paths Between NEs

Version: A

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of circuits between NEs and exports reports.

NE Cross-connect


Capacity

cross-connect capability and exports reports.

2-15


Table 2-8

Description of Submenus under the Statistics Main Menu (Continued)

Menu Option

Description NE Port Usage


Statistics

port usage and exports reports.

NE Port Protection

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the

LSP

protection LSP of the NE port and exports reports.

NE VPWS Statistics

NE VPLS Statistics

Port Flow Statistics

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the NE VPWS and exports reports. Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the NE VPLS and exports reports. Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the port service traffic and exports reports.

PTN Service/Label

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the PTN

Statistics

service / label and exports reports.

L2/L3 bridge access

Sets the query condition, queries the L2 / L3 bridge

point

node services and exports reports.

Query PTN NE LSR

Sets the query condition, queries the PTN NE LSR ID

ID

address and exports reports.

Used Label

Sets the query condition, queries the information of

Information

used labels and exports reports.

L2VPN Report

Sets the query condition, queries the L2VPN reports and exports reports.

OAM&BFD Enable

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of

Report

OAM&BFD enabling and exports reports.

OTN Station

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of the OTN

Capacity

station capacity and exports reports.

OTN Wavelength

Sets the query condition, gathers statistics of OTN

Resource

wavelength resources and exports reports.

Wavelength and Channel Comparison Report

Sets the query condition, queries the system channel comparison reports and exports reports.

Protection

Sets the query condition, queries the protection

Information

information and exports reports. Gathers statistics of all NEs in the entire network, including NE name, NE type, EMU card type, switch

NE Statistics

No. and NE IP address. It supports filtering NEs, exporting reports, navigating to shelf and navigating to the topology.

2-16

Version: A


Table 2-8

Description of Submenus under the Statistics Main Menu (Continued)

Menu Option

Description Gathers statistics of all the cards in the entire network, including card name, card type, card address and associated NE. It supports filtering cards, exporting

Board Statistics

reports, navigating to shelf and navigating to the topology. Gathers statistics of total slots and idle slots in the Slot Used Statistics

entire network. It supports filtering slots, exporting reports, navigating to shelf and navigating to the topology. Gathers statistics of SN information of NEs in the

SN Statistics

entire network.

NE Link Info Statistics

Alarm Filter Statistics

the entire network and supports exporting reports. Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of lines whose alarms are filtered and exports reports.

Bandwidth Utilization Statistics

Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of device

Management

bandwidth usage and exports reports.

15min Traffic Statistics Management

24hour Traffic Statistics Management

Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of device 15-minute traffic and exports reports. Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of device 24-hour traffic and exports reports.

Device Environment Parameters

Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of device

Statistics

environment parameters and exports reports.

Option of Power Statistics

CPU MEM Statistics

VOA Status Statistics Management

Manage Port IP Statistics IP Statistics

Version: A

Gathers statistics of NE fiber connection information in

Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of optical power performance and exports reports. Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of NE CPU and memory usage and exports reports. Sets the statistical task to gather statistics of VOA status of the WDM / OTN device and exports reports. Gathers statistics of management interface IP addresses of the selected devices and outputs the report.

Logic Port IP

Gathers statistics of logical interface IP addresses of

Statistics

the selected devices and outputs the report.

2-17


2.2.2.9

Security The submenus under the Security main menu are described in Table 2-9. Table 2-9

Description of Submenus under the Security Main Menu

Menu Option

Description Manages the users, user groups, object groups and operation

User Management

groups in the OTNM2000, including the attribute settings and authority allocation.

Online User Management

Views the online users, sends messages to other online users and log out other users. Manages the F interface authority of the selected NE, that is,

EMS_f Management

selects whether to enable the F interface of the selected NE and sets the login password of the F interface.

View Command Log View User Log View Business Log View EMU Log

View Report Event

2.2.2.10

Views the information such as name, time and result of the users’ commands. Views the information about users’ login and logout of the OTNM2000. Views the operation records of the services. Views the information such as delivering object, time, command name of the EMU command. Views the related information of the report events of the ASON equipment.

Help The submenus under the Help main menu are described in Table 2-10. Table 2-10

2-18

Description of Submenus under the Help Main Menu

Menu Option

Description

OTNM2000 Help

Opens the OTNM2000 online help document.

Alarm and Performance

Views the relevant reference information of the alarm and

Help

performance.

About

Views the version and service information of the OTNM2000.

Version: A


2.2.3

Shortcut Icons The following introduces the commonly used shortcut icons.

Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar The shortcut icons on the toolbar are described in Table 2-11. Table 2-11 Area

Description of Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar Icon

Name

Description

Lock the

Locks the current operating GUI and users will not be

EMS

able to implement any operation on the GUI.

Alarm Sound (alarm sound is turned on) Alarm

Turns on or off the alarm sound.

Sound (alarm sound is turned off) Alarm Flickering Standard

(alarm flickering is turned on) Turns on or off the alarm flickering. Alarm Flickering (alarm flickering is turned off) Object

Opens the Quick search dialog box to locate the object

Searching

in the topology.

View Report Alarm Command Manager

Version: A

Displays or hides the current alarm report window.

Opens the Command manager window.

2-19


Table 2-11 Area

Description of Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar (Continued) Icon

Name

Description Dynamically displays the information of interruption alarms. The first digit indicates the total number of

Interruption

interruption alarms and the last digit indicates the

Alarm

number of interruption alarms that are not confirmed. Click the icon to open the Current Alarm tab to view interruption alarms. Dynamically displays the information of critical alarms. The first digit indicates the total number of critical

Critical

alarms and the last digit indicates the number of critical

alarm

alarms that are not confirmed. Click the icon to open the Current Alarm tab to view critical alarms. Dynamically displays the information of major alarms. The first digit indicates the total number of major alarms

Current Alarm

Major alarm

Panel

and the last digit indicates the number of major alarms that are not confirmed. Click the icon to open the Current Alarm tab to view major alarms. Dynamically displays the information of minor alarms. The first digit indicates the total number of minor alarms

Minor alarm

and the last digit indicates the number of minor alarms that are not confirmed. Click the icon to open the Current Alarm tab to view minor alarms. Dynamically displays the information of prompt alarms. The first digit indicates the total number of prompt

Prompt

alarms and the last digit indicates the number of prompt

Alarm

alarms that are not confirmed. Click the icon to open the Current Alarm tab to view prompt alarms.

Normal Business Service Data Amount Statistics

Object Statistics

Dynamically displays the amount of normal service data. Click this icon to open the Business object statistics window.

To-beactivated

Dynamically displays the amount of service data to be

Business

activated. Click this icon to open the Business object

Object

statistics window.

Statistics

2-20

Version: A


Table 2-11 Area

Description of Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar (Continued) Icon

Name

Description

To-bedeleted

Dynamically displays the amount of service data to be

Business

deleted. Click this icon to open the Business object

Object

statistics window.

Statistics Broken Business Object Statistics

Dynamically displays the amount of broken service data. Click this icon to open the Business object statistics window.

Shortcut Icons on the Main Topology The shortcut icons are described in Table 2-12. Table 2-12 Icon

Shortcut Icons on the Main Topology Name Lock Current Layer

Locks the current layer. When the topology is zoomed in or out, the system will not switch the current layer according to the scaling ratio.

Selection

Switches to the selection mode, in which you can select the

Mode

topological object.

Drag Mode Airscape Enable Edit Legend

Version: A

Description

Switches to the drag mode, in which you can move the topology view. Opens / closes the Airscape. Enables / disables the editing mode, in which you can move the NE to another location. Opens the Legend pane to understand the object type and status that each icon indicates in the topology.

Zoom In

Zooms in the topology.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the topology.

Revert

Restores the topology to the original size.

Scaling Ratio

Selects the scaling ratio to display the topology.

2-21


Shortcuts on Other GUIs Icon

Name

Description Opens the corresponding filter dialog box to set the filter

Filter

2.2.4

conditions and view the filter result.

Refresh

Refreshes the current GUI.

Sort

Opens the Sort dialog box to set the sorting conditions.

Select

Opens the Select Column dialog box to set the columns to be

Column

displayed and the display sequence.

Export Report

Exports the data on the current GUI as a report.

Commonly Used Shortcuts The commonly used shortcuts of the OTNM2000 are described in Table 2-13. Table 2-13 Shortcut

Description

F1

Open the online help.

Shift+F1

Open the alarm and performance help.

Ctrl+F Ctrl+Shift+L Ctrl+L

2-22

Description of Commonly Used Shortcuts

Open the Quick search dialog box to locate the object in the topograph. Lock the current operating GUI manually. Open the Topo Layer Management tab to set layer-based topology.

Ctrl+M

View the current alarms.

Ctrl+H

View the alarm history.

Ctrl+U

View the current performance.

Ctrl+P

View the performance history.

Ctrl+W

View the far-end port information of the selected NE.

Ctrl+K

Add a connection.

Ctrl+Insert

Copy the NE.

Shift+Insert

Paste the copied NE.

Version: A


2.2.5

Object Tree The object tree is located at the upper left part of the main screen. It supports the following functions: u

Displays the hierarchical relationship between all network objects managed by the OTNM2000.

u

Provides the alarm status LEDs for users. Via the object tree pane or topology view, users can focus on the alarm and status information of the target NE or NEs quickly and conveniently.

Version: A

2-23


The object tree pane is composed of three tabs, the Logical Tree pane, the Operational Tree pane and the Browse Tree pane. The panes are described in Table 2-14.

2-24

Version: A


Table 2-14 Pane

Description of the Object Tree Panes Illustration

Description

Displays the logical relationships within the current project as well as names of the NEs and parts, alarm information, etc. Logical Tree

Click an object in this tab, and the object will be highlighted in the view pane right to the pane. Select View→Logical Tree in main menu to display or close this tab.

Manages the current project. Operational Tree

Click an operational tool, its operation window will appear in the view pane right to this tab. Select View→Operational Tree in main menu to display or close this tab.

Displays the subnet list of the current project. Click an object in this tab, and the object will Browse Tree

be highlighted in the view pane right to the pane. Select View→Browse Tree in main menu to display or close this tab.

Version: A

2-25


2.2.6

Display Pane The display pane is located in the middle of the main GUI to display the current operation tab of the OTNM2000. For example, Figure 2-2 shows the Current Alarm tab. The communication between users and the OTNM2000 is mainly achieved via this pane.

Figure 2-2

2.2.7

Display Pane

Task Panel The Task panel is located on the right side of the main screen, which displays the operation commands that can be operated on the selected object. The operation commands displayed on the Task panel vary with the object selected. For example: The Task panel of the XSJ2 card is as shown in Figure 2-3.

2-26

Version: A


Figure 2-3

2.2.8

The Task Panel Pane

Status Bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the main screen. It shows the status information of the current login user and the system. Table 2-15 Icon

Description of Status Bar Description Displays the name of the current user. Click this icon to open the User Management tab. Displays the IP address of the server that you logged into. Displays the current date and time of the OTNM2000 and the time is consistent with the OTNM2000 server. Displays the current connection status of network. Click this icon to open the Network Status Monitor tab.

Version: A

2-27


2.3

Common Operations The following introduces the commonly used operation in the OTNM2000.

2.3.1

Customizing the Table The OTNM2000 provides the table customization function, which enables you to adjust the column sequence, show / hide a column according to your preference. When you open the GUI next time, it appears as what you customized.

Procedure u

Right-click the title bar and select the columns to be displayed from the shortcut menu. The columns not selected will not appear in the window.

2-28

Version: A


u

Click the shortcut icon

above the table to open the Select Column dialog

box. You can select the columns to be displayed in the title bar and the display sequence.

Version: A

2-29


2.3.2

Quick Copy of Table Contents Some tables in the OTNM2000 support text copy function, which enables you to quickly copy the data in the table to another program.

Procedure 1.

Select data in a table in the OTNM2000, right-click in a blank area and select Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu.

2-30

Version: A


2.

Switch to another program, for example, Notepad and press down Ctrl+V. The selected data are pasted.

2.4

Viewing the Command Manager You can view all the operation commands that users issue to the equipment, including the start time, used time and other related information of the commands.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 2-16 to bring up the Command Manager window, as shown in Figure 2-4.

Table 2-16 Operation

Access Method of Checking the Command Manager Access Method Click View→Command Manager in the main menu.

Viewing the

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→System

command

Management→Command Manager.

manager Click

Version: A

.

2-31


Figure 2-4

2.

The Command manager Window

Users can check whether your management operations are successful in the command manger.

2.5

Locking / Unlocking the Client End The OTNM2000 supports the locking function to ensure the EMS security.

2.5.1

Locking the Client End To prevent unauthorized operations, it is suggested to lock the OTNM2000 client upon leaving.

Procedure 1.

Follow the steps below to lock the client end:

4

Manually lock the client end. Select System→Lock the EMS or click

on the toolbar to lock the EMS

client.

4

Automatically lock the client end. See Automatically Locking the Client End for setting. The client end will be locked if no operations are performed in the set time.

2-32

Version: A


2.5.2

Unlocking the Client End Users can perform this operation to make the OTNM2000 operational after it has been locked.

Prerequisite The OTNM2000 has been locked.

Procedure 1.

Enter the password into the dialog box as shown in Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5

The Client Locking Alert Box

Note: The OTNM2000 will automatically exit after users enter incorrect passwords for three times successively. 2.

Version: A

Click OK to unlock the OTNM2000.

2-33


2.6

Monitoring the Network Status Network status monitoring function is used to monitor the status of some important information in the network, including ASON event information, inconsistency between the database and equipment configuration as well as relevant service information. Users can get an understanding about the operation information of the equipment and the OTNM2000, which enables users to move to the next operation.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 2-17 to open the Network Status Monitor tab. The Network Status Monitor tab has six sub-tabs: Event, Manager, Device, Synchronize and Automatic NE Discovery.

Table 2-17

Access Method of Monitoring Network Status

Operation

Access Method Select System→Network Status Monitor in the main menu.

Network status

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→System

monitor

Management→Network Status Monitor. Click

2.

on the task bar of the OTNM2000 main GUI.

Click each sub-tab to perform the following operations:

4

Select Event to view the ASON-related event information.

4

Select Manager to view the inconsistent information between the database and the equipment.

4

Select Device to view the configuration results reported by the equipment.

4

Select Synchronize to view the synchronization information of the active / standby network management systems and related information of services such as EMS_Dumper and EMS_Monitor. Indication information on this page helps users analyze the network management service operation status and the faults occur on the EMS.

Note: The Automatic NE Discovery sub-tab is not available currently.

2-34

Version: A


2.7

Viewing the Version Information Under some circumstances, i.e., before system upgrade, users should check and record the version information of the OTNM2000.

Procedure

2.8

1.

Select Help→About OTNM2000 in the main menu.

2.

View the version information of the OTNM2000 in the dialog box that appears.

Current User Logout Different OTNM2000 users have different operation authorities. You can log out of the OTNM2000 and log in with a different user account to perform operations of different levels.

Procedure 1.

Select System→Exit in the main menu and click OK in the displayed alert box.

2.

Type the username and password in the displayed Login dialog box and click OK.

Version: A

2-35


2-36

Version: A

3

Security Management The security management is used to prevent illegal operation of users and guarantee the network data security. The security management includes user management, user session management and EMS_f authority management.

Basic Concepts Security Policy Management Scenarios for Authority and Domain Division Authorization Planning Managing System Users Managing User Sessions Managing the EMS_f Authority Network Management Tool

Version: A

3-1


3.1

Basic Concepts The administrative objects of authorization and domain division include user groups, operation groups, object groups and users. Understanding the concepts related to the authorization and domain division helps plan and allocate user authorities.

User Group A user group is a set of OTNM2000 users with the same management authorities. For the users to be granted with the same authorities, you can add them into a same user group and authorize the user group to make every user in the user group have the same authorities, quickly allocating the authorities to users. The OTNM2000 provides the following default user groups, among which Administrators, Security Administrator Group, Devcfg, Eot Group and NMS Group cannot be deleted and modified. u

Administrators: This user group has the management domain over assembly of objects and operation authorities over assembly of application operations.

Note: The Assembly of Application Operations does not include the operation authorities related to the security management. u

Security Administrator Group: This user group has the operation authorities related to the security management, including user management and online user management.

u

Operator Group: This user group has the management domain over assembly of objects and operation authorities over assembly of application operators by default.

u

Maintainer Group: This user group has the management domain over assembly of objects and operation authorities over assembly of application maintainers by default.

u

Inspector Group: This user group has the management domain over assembly of objects and operation authorities over assembly of application inspectors by default.

3-2

Version: A

3 Security Management

u

Devcfg: This user group has the operation authorities of the Devcfg.

u

Eot Group: This user group has the operation authority of the Eot group.

u

NMS Group: This user group has the operation authority of the OTNMApi. When the upper-level NMS system connects to the OTNM2000 through the northbound interface, you need to create a user for the NMS on the OTNM20000 and add the user into the NMS group. The NMS group is for managing the access authorities of the NMSs.

If the default user groups do not meet the requirements, you can create user groups of the two types: Domain Security Admin Group and Common User Group. Security administrators (users in the Security Admin Group user group) can create sub domain security administrator groups and common user groups, while the sub domain administrator can only create common user groups. Creating a sub domain administrator group equals creating a sub domain. The users belonging to the sub domain administrator group have the operation authorities within the sub domain range, that is, the object sets, operation sets, user groups and users created by a sub domain administrator are only visible to the sub domain administrators in the same group. When creating a common user group, the operation authority cannot be set as the security management authorities.

Operation Group An operation group is a set of operation authorities provided by the OTNM2000. When a user or user group is bound with an operation group, this user or user group has all the operation authorities of the operation group. By creating an operation group and adding the required operation authorities into the operation group, you can allocate the authorities to relevant users or user groups, implementing quick allocation of user authorities. The OTNM2000 EMS provides the following default operation groups: u

Assembly of Application Operations: Includes the operation authorities of all NE applications except the security management.

u

Assembly of Application Operators: Includes the operation authorities of creating NEs, modifying NEs and deleting NEs of integrated configurations.

u

Assembly of Application Maintainers: Includes the authorities of alarm confirmation.

Version: A

3-3


u

Assembly of Application Inspectors: Includes the authorities of viewing alarms and performance.

Object Group An object group is a set of manageable objects provided by the OTNM2000. When a user or user group is bound with an object group, this user or user group has the authorities to manage all the objects in the object group. By creating an object group and adding the objects to be managed into the object group, you can specify a user or user group to manage all the objects in the object group, lowering the management cost. You can create object groups based on geographical regions, network layers or equipment type. The object group provided by the OTNM2000 by default is Assembly of Objects, which cannot be deleted or modified. The objects include subnets, network blocks and NEs, with the NE as the smallest granularity.

User For the OTNM2000 client users, their usernames and passwords uniquely determine their respective operation and management authorities on the OTNM2000. There are two default built-in users: admin and root. The "admin" user is a system administrator, which cannot be deleted or modified.

Authority Allocation Binding a user with an operation group, object group and user group implements the authorization and domain division function. After a user logs in, the OTNM2000 only displays the sets of equipment applicable to the user group that the user belongs to and the user can only perform the operations defined in the bound operation group on the equipment; The path list of the domain user are the paths among the NE nodes managed by the user. The cross-domain paths will only appears in the global user's path list, which means it will not appear in the domain user's path list. Authorities can be assigned to a user through the following ways: u

Adding a user into a specific user group so that the user has the authorities assigned to the user group.

3-4

Version: A


u

Binding a user with a specific object group and operation group.

Note: u

One user can be added into multiple user groups simultaneously, and therefore the final authorities of the user are the user's original authorities coupled with the authorities of the user groups to which the user belongs.

u

It is recommended to bind a user with a or more user groups to authorize the user instead of directly authorizing the user (by binding the user with operation groups and object groups) or adjusting the default user group for user authorization.

3.2

Security Policy Management To enhance the access security of the OTNM2000 and prevent illegal operations, you can set the security policies, such as automatic lockout, automatic exist and login detection. You can plan and configure the security policies upon initial installation and adjust them according to your management requirement later.

3.2.1

Automatically Locking the Client End To prevent the improper operation, users can set the client end as the auto lock so that the client end will turn to the lock status when no operation is performed in a period of time.

Procedure 1.

Select System→Option in the main menu to open the "System Option Settings". Then select Automatic Function, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Version: A

3-5


Figure 3-1

2.

Setting Automatic Lockout of the Client End

Select Enable Auto Lock and enter the interval for locking the client end in the Auto Lock Time Interval (Minute) text box. As shown in Figure 3-1, the client end will be locked if no operations are performed in 5 minutes.

Note: If Enable Auto-lock is not selected, the automatic lock function of the client end will be disabled. 3.

3.2.2

Click OK.

Setting the Automatic Exit To prevent the illegal operation by other users, you can set the automatic exit function to make the client end exit when no operation is performed in a specified period of time.

3-6

Version: A


Procedure 1.

Select System→Option in the main menu to open the "System Option Settings". Then select Automatic Function, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2

2.

Setting Automatically Exiting the Client End

Select Enable Auto-exit and enter the interval for exiting the client end automatically in the Auto-exit Time Interval (Minute) text box. As shown in Figure 3-2, 100 minutes is set, indicating the client end will exit automatically when no operation is performed in 100 minutes.

Note: If Enable Auto-exit is deselected, the automatic exit function of the client end will be disabled. 3.

Version: A

Click OK.

3-7


3.2.3

Setting the User Login Detection An IP address, after being specified in the login detection settings, can log into only one client at a time.

Prerequisite You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Admin Group.

Procedure 1.

Select Security→User Management to open the User Management tab.

2.

Click the User node, and click the Login Check Setup button in the right pane or right-click in the right pane to select Login Check Setup.

3-8

3.

Click Add in the User Login Check Setup dialog box.

4.

Type the desired IP address in the IP Address text box, and click OK.

Version: A


5.

After completing the settings, click OK in the User Login Check Setup dialog box.

3.2.4

Setting the Password Complexity Check By default, the user password should meet the complexity requirements. The OTNM2000 supports the password complexity check function. When this function is disabled, the system will not conduct the password complexity check upon setting the password.

Procedure 1.

Open the otnm.ini in the d:\OTNM\ui\ini\ directory.

2.

Search for CHECK_PASSWORD and set it as needed.

4

If CHECK_PASSWORD is set to 1, the password complexity check function is enabled.

4

If CHECK_PASSWORD is set to 0, the password complexity check function is disabled.

3.

3.2.5

Save and close the otnm.ini file.

Setting the Lockout Upon Incorrect Password Inputs By default, the system locks a user if the user enters incorrect passwords three times in a row. The OTNM2000 supports the lockout upon incorrect password inputs. When this function is disabled, the user will not be locked even if the user enters incorrect passwords in a row.

Version: A

3-9


Note: The admin user will never be locked. Procedure 1.

Open the securityserver.ini file in the d:\OTNM\md\etc\security\ directory.

2.

Search for CHECK_WRONG_PASSWORD_STATUS and set it as needed.

4

If CHECK_WRONG_PASSWORD_STATUS is set to 1, the lockout upon incorrect password inputs is enabled.

4

If CHECK_WRONG_PASSWORD_STATUS is set to 0, the lockout upon incorrect password inputs is disabled.

3.

3.3

Save and close the securityserver.ini file.

Scenarios for Authority and Domain Division There are two scenarios applicable for authorization and domain division: initial authorization and authority adjustment. See Table 3-1 for operations according to your situation.

3-10

Version: A


Table 3-1 Scenario

Description of the Authority and Domain Division Scenario

Description

Sub Scenario 1.

Make a plan before the authorization to reduce

After installing the OTNM2000, you Initial

need to configure and authorize the

authorization

administrator for managing sets of equipment.

Make an authorization plan. unnecessary authorization and maintenance workload.

2.

Authorize the users. Authorize the users according to the authorization plan.

u

Adjust authorities in case of adding or removing of equipment sets. After new sets of equipment (NE or the entire subnet) is deployed, you need to authorize the

When the initial authorization is

corresponding user group to manage the

completed, the authority maintenance

equipment. After any sets of equipment is

Authority

begins. When any sets of equipment is

removed, the authorities for managing the

adjustment

added or removed, or user authorities

equipment will be automatically removed from the corresponding user or user group.

are changed, you need to adjust users' authorities.

u

Adjust authorities in case of authority change. You need to adjust users' authorities when their authorities are required to change due to administrative NE scope change, operation authority change or role change.

3.4

Authorization Planning Make a plan before the authorization to reduce unnecessary authorization and maintenance workload. The authorization plan flow is as shown in Table 3-2.

Version: A

3-11


Table 3-2 Planning Flow

Authorization Planning Flow Content

Principle

You can sort out the equipment management division table as the original data of authority management according to your organization structure and equipment networking. Analyze the original data for subsequent planning based on the following Collecting original data of

requirements:

authority management.

u

Sort out the users managing the

-

same devices, that is, the users belong to the same object group. u

Sort out the users with the same responsibilities, including not only the same administrative equipment but also the same operation authorities. Add the users with the same authorities

Configuring user groups

Classify users according their

into a same user group. For users with

responsibilities.

different authorities, plan different user groups. For the users with the same

Configuring object groups

Plan how to group the administrative

administrative scope, plan their object

objects to fulfill efficient authorization,

group together. For users with different

convenient for subsequent maintenance.

administrative scope, plan different object groups for them.

Analyze the authorities required for users Configuring operation

to fulfill the corresponding management

groups

and define these operation authorities into operation set.

For user groups requiring the same operation authorities, define the same operation set for them. Otherwise, define operation sets respectively for each user group.

Sort and output the complete authorization planning, providing reference for authorization and Outputting authorization

subsequent authority maintenance.

planning summary listing

The authorization planning summary

-

listing should include user group name, user group members, management domain and operation authorities.

3-12

Version: A


3.5

Managing System Users The following introduces how to create, modify and delete system users, and assign corresponding authorities to users.

3.5.1

Managing Object Groups An object group is a set of manageable objects. Managing object groups help you centrally manage the equipment objects. u

The default object group of the OTNM2000 is Assembly of Objects, which including all manageable objects.

u

When a user or user group is bound with an object group, this user or user group has the authorities to manage all the objects in the object group.

u

Only the users in "Security Admin Group" and "Domain Security Admin Group" can manage object groups.

u

The default object group cannot be deleted and only its description information can be modified.

3.5.1.1

Viewing Object Groups You can view the objects included in an object group to check whether the objects meet the requirements.

Prerequisite You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Admin Group or Domain Security Admin Group.

Procedure 1.

Select Security→User Management from the main menu to open the User Management window.

2.

Expand the Object Group node in the left pane to view the existing object groups.

Version: A

3-13


3.

Select the desired object group, click the Member tab on the right to view the specific objects included in the object group.

Other Operations u

Delete an object group. Right-click the object group, select Del from the short menu and click Yes in the displayed alert box.

u

Modify a object group. Select the desired object group in the left pane, modify the corresponding information in the right pane as needed and click Apply.

Note: For the "Assembly of Objects", only the description information can be modified.

3.5.1.2

Creating Object Groups You can create user groups according to your needs.


3-14

Version: A


Procedure 1.


2.

Select one of the following access methods to open the Add Object Group dialog box.

Function-

Access Method

al Item Right-click Object Group in the left pane and select Add Object Group from the Creating

shortcut menu.

an Object

Click Object Group in the left pane and then click the Add Object Group button

Group

in the right pane. Click Object Group in the left pane, right-click in a blank area in the right pane and select Add Object Group from the shortcut menu.

3.

Set the object group name and description information in the Basic Info tab according to the planning.

4.

In the Member tab, expand the Device node under Object For Select on the left, select the members and click

to add them into the Object

Selected on the right.

5.

Version: A

After completing the settings, click OK in the Add Object Group dialog box.

3-15


3.5.2

Managing Operation Groups An operation group is a set of operations. By managing operation groups, you can allocate and manage the operations to be performed on the equipment. u

The default operation groups of the OTNM2000 include Assembly of Application Operations, Assembly of Application Operators, Assembly of Application Maintainers and Assembly of Application Inspectors.

u

When a user or user group is bound with an operation group, this user or user group has all the operation authorities assigned to the operation group.

u

Only the users in "Security Admin Group" and "Domain Security Admin Group" can manage operation groups.

u

The default operation groups cannot be deleted and only their description information can be modified.

3.5.2.1

Viewing Operation Groups You can view the operation objects included in an operation group to check whether the authorities in the operation group meet the requirements.


Procedure 1.


2.

Expand the Operation Group node in the left pane to view the existing operation groups.

3.

Select the desired operation group, click the Member tab on the right to view the specific operation objects included in the operation group.

3-16

Version: A


Other Operations u

Delete an operation group. Right-click the operation group, select Del from the short menu and click Yes in the displayed alert box.

u

Modify an operation group. Select the desired operation group in the left pane, modify the corresponding information in the right pane as needed and click Apply.

Note: The default operation groups cannot be deleted and only their description information can be modified.

3.5.2.2

Creating Operation Groups You can create operation groups when the existing operation groups do not meet your requirements.


Version: A

3-17


Procedure 1.


2.

Select one of the following access methods to open the Add Operation Group dialog box.

Functional

Access Method

Item Right-click Operation Group in the left pane and select Add Operation Group Creating an

from the shortcut menu.

Operation

Click Operation Group in the left pane and then click the Add Operation

Group

Group button in the right pane. Click Operation Group in the left pane, right-click in a blank area in the right pane and select Add Operation Group from the shortcut menu.

3.

Set the operation group name and description information in the Basic Info tab according to the planning.

4.

In the Member tab, select the members under Operation For Select on the left and click

5.

to add them into the Operation Selected on the right.

After completing the settings, click OK in the Add Operation Group dialog box.

3-18

Version: A


3.5.3

Managing User Groups A user group is a set of OTNM2000 users with the same management authorities. For the users to be granted with the same authorities, you can add them into a same user group and authorize the user group to make every user in the user group have the same authorities, quickly allocating the authorities to users. u

The OTNM2000 built-in default user groups include Administrators, Security Administrator Group, Operator Group, Maintainer Group, Inspector Group, Devcfg, Eot Group, and NMS Group.

u

When a user is bound with a user group, this user owns the authorities assigned to the user group.

u

Only the users in "Security Admin Group" and "Domain Security Admin Group" can manage user groups.

u

The default user groups "Administrators", "Security Administrator Group", "Devcfg", "Eot Group" and "NMS Group" cannot be deleted and only their description information can be modified.

3.5.3.1

Viewing User Groups You can view the objects and operations corresponding to a user group so as to check whether the authorities assigned to the user group meet the requirements.

Prerequisite You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user in Security Admin Group or Domain Security Admin Group.

Procedure 1.


2.

Expand the User Group node in the left pane to view the existing user groups.

3.

Select the desired user group in the left pane, and view the related information of the user group in the right pane.

Version: A

3-19


Other Operations u

Delete a user group. Right-click the user group, select Del from the shortcut menu and click Yes in the displayed alert box.

u

Modify a user group. Select the user group in the left pane, modify the corresponding information in the right pane as needed, and then click Apply.

3.5.3.2

Creating a User Group You can create user groups according to your needs to centrally assign authorities to users.


Procedure 1.


2.

Select one of the following access methods to open the Add User Group dialog box.

3-20

Version: A


Function-

Access Method

al Item Right-click User Group in the left pane and select Add User Group from the Creating a

shortcut menu.

User

Click User Group in the left pane and then click the Add User Group button in

Group

the right pane. Click User Group in the left pane, right-click in a blank area in the right pane and select Add User Group from the shortcut menu.

3.

Set the relevant parameter of the user group in the Add User Group dialog box according to the planning.

Note: There are two types of user group: Domain Security Admin Group and Common User Group. u

Domain Security Admin Group: The Domain Security Admin Group, with its management domain assigned by the security administrator, only has the Security Management authorities, which cannot be modified. In case the network managed by the OTNM2000 is large with a relatively high quantity of network objects, the security administrator can divide the entire network into several domains and specify a domain security administrator for each domain. The domain security administrator responsible for a domain can create users for this domain and assign authorities to users.

u

Common User Group: The management domain and operation authorities of a common user group are assigned by the security administrator or domain security administrator.

4.

Version: A

After completing the settings, click OK in the Add User Group dialog box.

3-21


3.5.4

Managing Users The security administrator reasonably authorizes the EMS users to ensure the users have necessary authorities to perform operations and meanwhile avoid authority-exceeding operations. Planning users should combine with the requirement of maintenance and management, authorizing users with appropriate privileges and restraining them to use the management and maintenance functions in corresponding situations. The OTNM2000 V2.0R5 (Build04.20.05.50) uniquely identifies the user logged in and its operation privileges by the username and password. After the OTNM2000 V2.0R5 (Build04.20.05.50) is installed, it only provides the default user: admin (username and password are admin) and the users (1, 2, 3, 4) will be no longer used. The admin user is the super user, who has all the operation and management privileges. Other users will be directly or indirectly created by the admin user.

3.5.4.1

Viewing Users You can view the related information of users, conveniently managing them.


Procedure 1.


2.

3-22

Expand the User node in the left pane to view the existing users.

Version: A


3.

Select the desired user in the left pane, and view the related information of the user in the right pane.

Other Operations u

Delete a user. Right-click the user, select Del from the shortcut menu and click Yes in the displayed alert box.

u

Modify a user. Select the user in the left pane, modify the corresponding information in the right pane as needed, and then click Apply.

Version: A

3-23


3.5.4.2

Creating a User You can create OTNM2000 user accounts, assign them with corresponding authorities, and then allocate the accounts to users with different responsibilities.

Note: After creating users, you can add them into corresponding user groups and authorize the user groups to avoid cross-over authorization. It is not recommended to set management domain and operation authorities for users respectively. Prerequisite You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Admin Group or Domain Security Admin Group.

Procedure 1.


2.

Select one of the following paths to open the Add User dialog box.

Functional Item

Path Right-click User in the left pane and select Add User from the shortcut menu.

Creating a User

Click User in the left pane and then click the Add User button in the right pane. Click User in the left pane, right-click in a blank area in the right pane and select Add User Group from the shortcut menu.

3-24

Version: A


3.

See Table 3-3 to set the relevant parameter of the user in the Add User dialog box according to the planning.

Table 3-3

User Settings

Parameter

Description User name Description

Name of the user. It is required and should contain at least 6 characters. Description information of the user, for distinguishing users. Password of the user. It should contain at least 8 characters. If

Password Basic Information

the password complexity check is enabled, the password should contain three types of characters among upper-case letters, lower-case letters, numbers and other characters.

Confirm password

Type the password again. Number of days in which the password is valid.

Password

u

If you check Unlimit, the password will never expire.

Valid Days

u

If you do not check Unlimit, set the specific number in the text box. Value range: 1 to 180 days.

Version: A

3-25


Table 3-3

User Settings (Continued)

Parameter

Description Maximum number of users allowed to use this account to log into the OTNM2000. Max Online

u

If you check Unlimit, it has no limit on number of users using this account to log into the OTNM2000.

No. u

If you uncheck Unlimit, set the specified number in the text box. Value range: 1 to 32.

Disable This

If you check Disable This User, this user account cannot be

User

used. Sets the user group to which this user belongs. One user can

User Group Belong To

be added into the user group of a same administrator type (Security Administrator or Domain Security Administrator).

Object Group Belong To

Sets the object group to which this user belongs.

Operation Group Belong TO

Sets the operation group to which this user belongs.

Access Control List

4.

3.5.4.3

Sets the allowed IP range for login, allowing the users to login from the client in the specified IP range.

After completing the settings, click OK in the Add User dialog box.

Disabling a User You can disable a user account that is not used at present. The disabled user cannot log into the OTNM2000.

Background Information u

The users in the "Security Admin Group" can enable or disable all the other users except themselves and the admin user.

u

The users in the "Domain Security Admin Group" can enable or disable the users created by them.

u

The admin user cannot be disabled.

1.


2.

Expand the User node on the left navigation tree, select the desired user and

Procedure

select the Disable This User check box. 3-26

Version: A


3.

3.5.4.4

Click Apply to apply the settings immediately.

Unlocking Users After being unlocked, the users can log into the OTNM2000 again.

Context u

When a user's login attempts reach three times, the user will be locked. Only the users in "Security Admin Group" and "Domain Security Admin Group" can unlock users.

u

The OTNM2000 supports manual unlocking and automatic unlocking of the locked user.


Procedure u

Manual Unlocking 1)


Version: A

3-27


2)

Expand the User node in the left pane.

3)

Right-click the locked user, and select Unlock User from the shortcut menu.

u

Automatic Unlocking A locked user cannot log into the OTNM2000 until it is automatically unlocked after specified time period.

Note: The system automatically unlocks the locked user accounts in the following ways:

3.5.4.5

u

Unlock user accounts 30 minutes later since the lockup.

u

Unlock user accounts at midnight.

Resetting the User Password The following introduces how to reset the user password. In case a user forgets the password, the password expires or the user login is denied, you need to reset the password for the user.

Context u

A user in Security Admin Group can reset the passwords for all the users except admin and himself / herself.

u

A user in Domain Security Admin Group can reset the passwords for its created users.

u

The password of Admin cannot be reset.


3-28

Version: A


Procedure 1.


2.

Expand the User node in the left pane.

3.

Right-click the corresponding user account, select Reset Password from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the Reset Password dialog box, set the New Password and Confirm New, and then click OK.

3.5.4.6

Modifying Your Password To ensure the access security of the OTNM2000, it is suggested to modify your password regularly.

Procedure 1.

Select System→Change Password in the main menu.

2.

In the displayed Change Password dialog box, enter Old Password, New Password and Confirm Password.

Note: The password should contain at least 8 bytes. If the password complexity check function is enabled, the password should contain three types of capital letters, lowercase letters, numbers or other characters.

Version: A

3-29


3.

3.5.4.7

Click OK.

Setting the Access Control List You can set the access control list to limit the OTNM2000 users to login only from the specified IP address or network segment to ensure the network security.

Background Information The access control list applies only to the desired user.


Procedure 1.


2.

Expand the User node on the left navigation tree,, select the desired user and click Access Control List tab.

3-30

Version: A


3.

Click Add to open the Set IP Range dialog box.

4.

Set the Start IP Address and End IP Address, and click OK. The added IP address range appears in the access control list.

5.

3.5.4.8

Click Apply to apply the settings immediately.

Querying User Authorities The following introduces how to view the user authorities.

Prerequisite You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user belonging to "Security Management Group".

Version: A

3-31


Context A user's original authorities coupled with the authorities of the user groups to which the user belongs amount to the total authorities of the user. For example,

As shown in the above figure, the user "test" owns the following authorities: u

For the objects in the Object Group A, the user has the operation authorities defined in Operation Group A.

u

For the objects in the Object Group B, the user has the operation authorities defined in Operation Group B.

However, the user "test" cannot perform the operations defined in Operation Group B on the objects defined in Object Group A, and similarly the user cannot perform the operations defined in Operation Group A on the object defined in Object Group B.

Procedure 1.


2.

Expand the User node in the left pane, and select the desired user.

4

View the user groups to which the user belongs. In the right pane, click User Group Belong To to view the user groups to which the user is added.

4

View the object groups to which the user belongs. In the right pane, click Object Group Belong To to view the object groups to which the user is added.

3-32

Version: A


4

View the operation groups to which the user belongs. In the right pane, click Operation Group Belong To to view the operation groups to which the user is added.

3.

Expand User Group in the left pane to view the object groups and operation groups associated with the user groups that the user belongs to.

4.

3.5.5

Confirm the user's authorities through the query result of step 2 to 3.

Authorization and Domain Division Example The following uses an example to introduce the operations related to the authorization and domain division.

3.5.5.1

Authorizing a New User The following takes assigning authorities for users in two regions as an example to introduce how to create user accounts and assign authorities.

Scenario Description There are region A and region B. The equipment in the two regions are centrally monitored managed and maintained through the OTNM2000. To have the equipment in region A monitored, managed and maintained by the staff in region A and the equipment in region B by the staff in region B, you need to create user accounts and allocate authorities for the staff in region A and region B respectively.

Procedure 1.

Create object groups. Create object group A and object Group B according to the region, and add the equipment sets in region A into object group A and the equipment sets in region B into object group B. For creating object sets, see Creating Object Groups.

2.

Create operation groups. Adopt the default operation sets according to the users' responsibilities.

Version: A

3-33


4

The user responsible for monitoring the equipment corresponds to the operation group Assembly of Application Inspectors.

4

The user responsible for operating the equipment corresponds to the operation group Assembly of Application Operators.

4

The user responsible for maintaining the equipment corresponds to the operation group Assembly of Application Maintainers.

For details of creating operation groups, see Creating Operation Groups. 3.

Create user groups. According to the users' responsibilities, it is required to create six user groups, as shown in Table 3-4.

Table 3-4

Creating User Groups

User Group

Type

Management

Authorities

Domain

Name Inspector Group

Common User

A

Group

Operator Group

Common User

A

Group

Maintainer

Common User

Group A

Group

Inspector Group

Common User

B

Group

Operator Group

Common User

B

Group

Maintainer

Common User

Group B

Group

Object Set A

Assembly of Application Inspectors

Object Set A

Assembly of Application Operators

Object Set A

Assembly of Application Maintainers

Object Set B

Assembly of Application Inspectors

Object Set B

Assembly of Application Operators

Object Set B

Assembly of Application Maintainers

For details of creating user groups, see Creating a User Group. 4.

Create users.

4

Create user basic information, such as user name and password.

4

Set the user groups to which the users belong respectively. Suppose six users A, B, C, D, E and F are created. You can add the users into the respective user groups, as shown in Table 3-5. After being added into the corresponding user groups, the users own the management domain and operation authorities of their corresponding user groups.

3-34

Version: A


Table 3-5

Creating Users

User

User Group

A

Inspector Group A

B

Operator Group A

C

Maintainer Group A

D

Inspector Group B

E

Operator Group B

F

Maintainer Group B

4

Set the access control list to restrict users' login IP address to the specified ones.

For details of creating user groups, see Creating a User. After completing the above configurations, provide the user accounts for the corresponding staff.

3.5.5.2

Adjusting Users' Authorities The following takes deleting specific authorities of an existing EMS user as example to introduce how to adjust the authorities of existing users.

Description Delete the Modify NE authority of the EMS user B.

Adjustment Analysis User's Original Authorities

Analysis

Description In this example, you need to unbind the user group Operator Group A with the operation group

The EMS user B belongs to the nondefault user group Operator Group A.

The authority adjustment

Assembly of Application

Operator Group A

requirement in this example does

Operators and then bind it with a

includes the non-default

not involve any changes of the

new operation group.

object group Object Set

management domain, and

If there are other users who

A.

therefore no adjustment to the

require the Modify NE authority in

object group is needed.

the user group, you need to remove the user B from Operator Group A and then re-assign authorities to the user.

Version: A

3-35


User's Original Authorities

Analysis

Description

As the authority adjustment requirement in this example involves changes of operation Operator Group A

authorities and modifying the

includes the default

default operation group is not

operation group

recommended, you need to create

Assembly of

an operation group that includes

Application Operators.

all the operation authorities in Assembly of Application Operators except the Modify NE authority.

Procedure 1.

Create an operation group. Create the operation group and select all the authorities in "Assembly of Application Operators" with Modify NE removed. For details of creating operation groups, see Creating Operation Groups.

2.

Modify the user group Operator Group A. Modify the user group Operator Group A, unbind it with the operation group Assembly of Application Operators and then bind it with the new operation group. For details of modifying user groups, see Viewing User Groups.

3.6

Managing User Sessions You can manage user sessions to understand the online users and activity information of users.

3.6.1

Monitoring User Sessions You can monitor user sessions to understand the information of the online users.

Background Information u 3-36

Session: The connection established between the client and the server. Version: A


u

A same user account can be used to log in on multiple clients. You can define the maximum number of concurrent logins of a same user account. See Creating a User.

Procedure 1.

Select Security management→Online User Management in the main menu.

2.

In the Online User Management tab, view the information of online users.

Other Operations Right-click in the Online User Management tab and select Refresh to refresh the online users.

3.6.2

Logging Out a User By monitoring user sessions, you can view the information of online users and log out the users that may threaten the system security as needed to ensure the system security.


Session: The connection established between the client and the server.

u


Version: A

3-37


u

The objects of logging out user and sending messages are user sessions. For example, the account user is used to log in to a same OTNM2000 server on client A and client B concurrently, which generate session a and session b respectively. When you log out the account user that generates the session a, the account user that generates session b will not be influenced.

u

The admin user can log out all other users, while the users belonging to the Security Admin Group can only log out ordinary users.


Procedure 1.

Select Security management→Logged-in User Management in the main menu.

2.


3.

Right-click the corresponding user session and select Force Exit from the shortcut menu.

4.

3-38

Enter the logout reason in the Force Exit dialog box and click OK.

Version: A


3.6.3

Sending Messages to Other Online Users By monitoring user sessions, you can view the information of online users. If required, you can send messages to the user corresponding to the selected session to communicate with the user in a different location about maintenance of the OTNM2000.


Session: The connection established between the client and the server.

u


u

You cannot send messages to yourself.

1.

Select Security management→Online User Management in the main menu.

2.


Procedure

Version: A

3-39


3.

Right-click the selected user session and select Send Message from the shortcut menu.

Note: The OTNM2000 supports sending message to multiple user sessions simultaneously. You can press down the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple sessions. 4.

3-40

Enter the message content in the Send Message dialog box and click OK.

Version: A


3.6.4

Monitoring the User Activities You can view the activity information of users to prevent unauthorized operations.


Procedure 1.


2.

Expand the User node on the left navigation tree.

3.

Click the corresponding user and click Active Info in the right pane to view the activity information of the user.

Note: When anomaly information is detected, you can process the user accordingly. For example, log out the user through the Online User Management tab.

3.7

Managing the EMS_f Authority Manage the operation authority of the f interface on the NE.

Version: A

3-41


Prerequisite The EMU card supports the f interface authority management function.

Prerequisite You have logged in as the admin user.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 3-6 to open the EMS_f Management tab.

Table 3-6

Access Method of Managing the EMS_f Authority

Operation

Access Method Select Security→EMS_f Management in the main menu, and select the corresponding NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click .

Managing EMS_ f Authority

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→Card Management→EMS_f Management, select the desired NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

2.

.

Refer to Table 3-7 to configure in the EMS_f Management tab.

Note: Set the configuration items in a batch manner conveniently via the shortcut menu. Table 3-7

Description of the Configuration Items in the EMS_f Management Tab

Parameter f-interface setting flag

f-interface status

Code setting flag

User code

3-42

Description Only after users select the f-interface setting flag of an NE can the configuration performed on this f interface be valid. For setting the f interface status of the corresponding NE to Refuse of All, Set Enable of All or Set Read only of All. Only after users select the code setting flag of an NE can the configuration on the password of this f interface be valid. For setting the password of the f interface belonging to the corresponding NE.

Version: A


3.

Select the NE, right-click anywhere in the EMS_f Management tab and select Set EMS_f Authority of Selected from the shortcut menu.

4.

(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the EMS_f Management tab to perform the following operations:

4

Selecting Get EMS_f Authority of All: Gets the f-interface status and passwords of all the NEs in the OTNM2000, and check whether the EMS_f settings of all NEs are correct.

4

Selecting Get EMS_f Authority of Selected: Gets the f-interface status and passwords of the selected NEs in the OTNM2000 and check whether the EMS_f settings of the selected NEs are correct.

4

3.8

Selecting Refresh: Refreshes the current tab.

Network Management Tool The OTNM2000 provides the Web-based network management tool, which supports managing network management processes, monitoring network management server resources and importing / exporting configurations.

Prerequisite The EMS_unmcmagent and EMS_unmcmservice services have been started up at the server end.

Procedure 1.

Enter "http://IP:52302/nmtool" in the address bar of the browser (here, IP refers to the IP address of the computer running the OTNM2000 server) to open the login GUI as shown in the figure.

Version: A

3-43


2.

Enter the username and password, and click Login.

Note: The system provides two users by default: u

The username and password of the administrator are Admin.

u

The username and password of the ordinary query user are Query, which only has the authority to view and export data.

3.

You can perform the following operations via the network management tool: The Admin user is used as example.

Item

Description The Process Management window lists all the services that can be

Process

monitored. Select one or more services in the service list to enable /

Management

stop / restart the selected service(s). It also supports enabling / stopping / restarting the OTNM2000.

Resource

In the Resource Management window, you can view the information

Management

related to Operating System, EMS System and Database.

Historical Data

3-44

The Historical Data GUI graphically displays the usage of resources related to Operating System, EMS System and Database.

Version: A


Item

Description

Log Management

including the operation name, operation time, operation terminal and

In the Log Management window, you can view the operation records, operation result. Settings

In the Settings window, you can set the save time of Historical Data and Logs. In the Import/Export window, you can import and export the OTNM2000 configuration. u

It supports setting the backup server. You can select local backup or the FTP server and set the parameters related to the backup

Import / Export

server, including backup folder on the local server and the IP address / port of the FTP server. u

You can also set a timer to export the OTNM2000 configuration automatically.

Version: A

3-45

4

Integrated Configuration Management The following introduces the concept of the integrated configuration and how to manage the projects, network blocks, NEs, cards and manager services through the integrated configuration in the OTNM2000.

Integrated Configuration The integrated configuration implements the integration of the network data configuration and management. It changes the configuration mode in which both the Devcfg and the OTNM2000 are involved. The integrated configuration has the following features: u

Supports direct management (adding, editing and deleting) of projects, network blocks, NEs and cards in the OTNM2000, without the need to configure and manage them in the Devcfg first. This saves the time spent in repeated configuration.

u

Allows multiple users to perform operations simultaneously in the OTNM2000 and synchronizes the data changes to other clients in real time, with no influence caused to users. This improves the inconvenience that when multiple users edit data simultaneously, the data changes saved at last will overwrite the data changes of other users.

u

After the integrated configuration function is provided, the Devcfg functions as a storage, mainly backing up and restoring data, with no data configuration any longer.

Modifying Project Attributes Managing Manager Services Configuring the GNE Managing Network Blocks Managing NEs

Version: A

4-1


Managing Cards Configuring NE IP Remotely based on SN

4-2

Version: A

4 Integrated Configuration Management

4.1

Modifying Project Attributes The following introduces how to modify the attributes of the project in the OTNM2000. After the project attributes are modified, the changes will be read from the database in Devcfg, making sure the project information in Devcfg is consistent with that in the OTNM2000.

Prerequisite You have the privileges of Operator Group or higher privileges.

Procedure 1.

In the Logical Tree of the OTNM2000, right-click a project and select Project Attribute from the shortcut menu to open the Project Property dialog box.

2.

Modify the project name, structure configuration height and width parameters. Click OK to complete modifying the project attributes.

4.2

Managing Manager Services The NEs of different types communicate with the OTNM2000 using different communication protocols. Before building network topologies of different types, it is needed to understand the communication protocols used by NEs of different types to communicate with the OTNM2000 so as to ensure normal communication between the created NEs and the OTNM2000.

Version: A

4-3


To ensure the communication between the EMS and the NE, it is necessary to configure the manager services for managing NEs at the EMS side. The following introduces how to add, edit and delete manager services in the OTNM2000.

4.2.1

Adding a Manager Service To ensure the communication between the EMS and the NE, it is necessary to configure the manger services for managing NEs at the EMS side. The following introduces how to add manager services in the OTNM2000.


Procedure 1.

Select Configuration→Manager Service Config from the main menu to open the Manager Service Config tab.

2.

Click Add to open the Add Manager Service dialog box and set the attributes. The items with * are required, and others are optional.

4-4

Version: A


Note: u

The IP address of a manager service must be unique in a project. One manager service can manage multiple network blocks.

u

Under the same communication protocol type, the listening IP address and port of the communication network card must be unique in a project.

3.

4.2.2

Click OK.

Modifying a Manager Service When the existing manager services do not meet the requirements for NE management, you can adjust the manager services for managing network blocks or NEs by modifying or switching them. The following introduces how to modify or switch manager services for managing network blocks in the OTNM2000.

Prerequisite You have the privileges of Operator Group or higher privileges. Version: A

4-5


Procedure (Modifying the Manager Service) 1.


2.

Modify the attributes of the manager service. 1)

Select the desired manager service and click Modify.

2)

Modify the attributes in the displayed dialog box. The items with * are required, and others are optional.

Note: u

The IP address of a manager service must be unique in a project. One manager service can manage multiple network blocks.

u

Under the same communication protocol type, the listening IP address and port of the communication network card must be unique in a project.

4-6

Version: A


3)

Click OK.

Procedure (Switching Manager Services of Network Blocks) 1.

Select the manager service.

2.

Select the network block to be switched in the Part of configured this manager service frame at the bottom (press Ctrl to select multiple ones randomly; press Shift to select multiple ones successively).

3.

Click Switch Network Block Manager Program.

4.

Select the new manager service in the displayed Please Select Manager Service dialog box.

Version: A

4-7


4.2.3

5.

Click OK.

6.

Click OK in the displayed alert box.

Deleting Manager Services When a manager service is no longer used by NEs or network blocks, it can be deleted to avoid redundant manager services and facilitate the maintenance. The following introduces how to delete manager services in the OTNM2000.

Caution: The manager services in use cannot be deleted. To delete it, modify the manager service managing the network block to another one. For modifying the manager service, see the Procedure (Switching Manager Services of Network Blocks) section in Modifying a Manager Service. Prerequisite You have the privileges of Operator Group or higher privileges.

Procedure 1.


4-8

2.

Select the desired manager service and click Delete.

3.


Version: A


4.

Click OK in the displayed Integrated Config Operation Information dialog box.

4.3

Configuring the GNE You can configure the gateway NE, including the gateway NE group and gateway NE.


The gateway NE is directly or indirectly connected with the OTNM2000 via the management interface (through the DCN network). A gateway NE coupled with its connected non-gateway NE constitutes a Administrative Domain. The OTNM2000 accesses the non-gateway NE of the administrative domain by way of the gateway NE.

u

Configuring multiple GNEs can avoid service interruption caused by malfunction of the gateway. When the gateway of the NE malfunctions, the secondary gateway will take over and the NE will connect to the OTNM2000 via the secondary gateway.


Procedure 1.

Select Configuration→GNE Configuration to open the GNE Configuration tab.

Version: A

4-9


2.

Configure the GNE.

Note: When configuring the network block, you can click Config GNE (Group) Quickly in the Add Part dialog box to configure the GNE (group).

4

Configure a single GNE. a)

Click Add Gateway NE and set the Gateway NE IP, Gateway NE Mask and Gateway NE Gateway in the GNE Details pane in the lower part.

b)

4

Click Save GNE.

Configure multiple GNEs. a)

Click Add GNE Group to add a GNE group in the Choose GNE pane.

b)

Select the corresponding GNE group in the Choose GNE pane, and click Add GNE in the GNE Details pane in the lower part to set the Gateway NE IP, Gateway NE Mask and Gateway NE Gateway.

c)

4-10

Repeat the above step to add other GNEs. Then click Save GNE.

Version: A


Other Operations u

u

u

Delete a GNE group. 1)

In the Choose GNE pane, select the desired GNE group and click Delete.

2)

Click Save GNE.

Delete a GNE. 1)

In the Choose GNE pane, select the desired GNE and click Delete.

2)

Click Save GNE.

Delete a GNE from a GNE group. 1)

Select the desired GNE group in the Choose GNE pane, then select the desired GNE in the GNE Details pane in the lower part and click Delete GNE.

2)

Click Save GNE.

Note: Before deleting a GNE (group), adopt another GNE (group) for the network block to avoid communication interruption between the network block and the OTNM2000.

4.4

Managing Network Blocks The following introduces how to add, edit and delete network blocks in the OTNM2000.

4.4.1

Adding a Network Block The following introduces how to add a network block in the OTNM2000.

Prerequisite The manager service is created.

Version: A

4-11


Procedure 1.

In the Logical Tree of the OTNM2000, right-click a project and select Add Network Block from the shortcut menu to open the Add Part dialog box.

2.

Specify the network block number, name and manager service.

Note: u

The network block number must be unique, and a network block can be managed only by one manager service.

u

The network block name must be unique.

u

The items with * are required, and others are optional.

3.

Add the Ma NE for the network block. 1)

In the Add Network Block dialog box, click

behind the Ma NE No. to

open the Add Ma NE dialog box.

4-12

Version: A


2)

Set the attributes of the Ma NE. The items with * are required, and others are optional.

3) 4.

4.4.2

Click OK to complete adding the Ma NE.

Click OK to complete adding the network block.

Modifying Network Block Attributes The following introduces how to modify the attributes of network blocks in the OTNM2000.


Procedure 1.

In the Logical Tree of the OTNM2000, right-click a network block and select Modify Network Block from the shortcut menu to open the Modify Network Block dialog box.

Version: A

4-13


2.

Modify the network block No., name, Ma NE No., manager service according to the actual situation.

Note: An Ma NE must exists under each network block. 3.

4.4.3

Click OK to complete modifying the network block attributes.

Deleting a Network Block The following introduces how to delete a network block in the OTNM2000.

Caution: u

When a network block is deleted, all the NEs under the network block will be deleted simultaneously.

u

Deleting a network block will break the services carried by the NEs under the network block.

Prerequisite You have the privileges of Operator Group or higher privileges. 4-14

Version: A


Procedure 1.

Right-click the network block in the Logical Tree pane and select Delete to open the Delete Part dialog box.

2.

Confirm the network block to be deleted and click Delete.

Caution: When the Delete Part dialog box appears as shown in the following figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and adjust the service carried by the network block to another network block according to the prompt in red. Otherwise, deleting the network block directly will greatly influence the service.

4.5

Managing NEs The following introduces how to add, edit and delete network NEs in the OTNM2000.

4.5.1

Adding an NE The following introduces how to add NEs in the OTNM2000.

Prerequisite

Version: A

u

You have the privileges of Operator Group or higher privileges.

u

The corresponding NE is created. 4-15


Procedure 1.

In the Logical Tree of the OTNM2000, right-click a project and select Add NE from the shortcut menu to open the Add NE dialog box.

2.

Specify the NE attributes and configuration. The items with * are required, and others are optional.

Note: u

The names of NEs under a same network block cannot be repeated.

u

The switch No. can be a decimal or hexadecimal number (automatically converted), which must be globally unique.

u

The IP address must be unique.

3.

Click OK to complete adding the NE.

Note: After an NE is added, the system automatically adds the main switch card (in the default slot) for the NE.

4.5.2

Modifying the NE Attributes The following introduces how to modify the attributes of the NE in the OTNM2000.

4-16

Version: A



Procedure 1.

Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Property to open the Property dialog box.

2.

In the Property dialog box, modify the NE attribute and click OK to save your changes.

4.5.3

Copying / Pasting an NE Copying and pasting an NE of the similar parameters can simplify the procedures of creating an NE.


Procedure 1.

Right-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Copy NE from the shortcut menu.

Version: A

4-17


2.

Right-click the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and select Paste NE from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box, as shown below, displaying the parameters of the copied NE.

3.

Modify the parameters as needed and click OK.

Note: u

The name of a NE must be unique under a network block.

u

The switch number can be a decimal or hexadecimal number (converted automatically), which must be unique globally.

u

4.5.4

The IP address must be unique globally.

Moving an NE The OTNM2000 allows you to move an NE to another network block.


4-18

Version: A


Procedure 1.

Right-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Move NE from the shortcut menu.

2.

In the displayed Move NE dialog box, set the network block No., NE No. and NE name after the move. Then click OK.

Note: The name and numbering of a NE must be unique under a network block.

4.5.5

Deleting an NE The following introduces how to delete an NE in the OTNM2000.

Caution: u

When an NE is deleted, the icon, card and topological connection of the NE will be deleted simultaneously. Meanwhile, the services carried by the NE will be broken.

u

When only the MA NE exists under a network block, deleting the MA NE will also delete the network block to which it belongs. However, when there are multiple NEs under a network block, the MA NE cannot be deleted.

Version: A

4-19



Procedure 1.

Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Delete NE to open the Delete NE dialog box.

2.

Confirm the NE to be deleted and click Delete.

Caution: When the Delete NE dialog box appears as shown in the following figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and adjust the service carried by the NE to another NE according to the prompt in red. Otherwise, deleting the NE directly will greatly influence the service.

4.6

Managing Cards The following introduces how to add, replace, edit and delete cards in the OTNM2000.

4.6.1

Adding a Card The following introduces how to add a card in the OTNM2000.

4-20

Version: A


Note: After an NE is added, the system will automatically add the core switch card (in the default slot for the core switch card). Prerequisite u


u

The corresponding NE has been created.

1.

Right-click the null slot in the NE shelf view (using CiTRANS 620 as an example)

Procedure

and select the desired card from the shortcut menu.

4.6.2

Adding a Card Automatically With the card automatic discovery function, the cards can be added quickly in a batch manner, greatly improving the configuration efficiency.

Version: A

4-21


Prerequisite u

The corresponding NE supports the card automatic discovery function.

u

The EMU card of the corresponding NE communicates normally and can be managed.

Procedure 1.

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→Card management →Board Auto Find.

2.

Select the corresponding NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

to open the Board Auto Find tab.

Note: In the Board Auto Find tab, the EMS Configured Board Type indicates the types of cards configured in the OTNM2000; Device Configured Board Type indicates the types of cards saved in the device EMU card; Online Status indicates whether or not the card is present in the corresponding slot of the device. If the card is present, it will automatically synchronize the configuration of the device.

3.

4-22

Click Sync All, or select the corresponding slot and click Sync Selected.

Version: A


Note: The synchronization refers to synchronizing the types of cards configured on the device to the OTNM2000. After the synchronization, the cards automatically discovered will be added. The Sync Result column of the corresponding slot will display Synchronized successfully, and those cards configured in the OTNM2000 but not present on the device will be deleted. The Board Auto Find tab will no longer display the corresponding cards. 4.

(Optional) Click Check to re-detect the card information of the corresponding NE to confirm whether the card is added.

4.6.3

Replacing a Card The following introduces how to replace a card in the OTNM2000.


Procedure 1.

Right-click the card in the NE shelf view (using CiTRANS 620 as an example), select Replace the Card from the shortcut menu and select the new card.

2.

Version: A

Confirm the target card and click Replace.

4-23


Caution: When the Replace the Card dialog box appears as shown in the following figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and adjust the service carried by the card to another card according to the prompt in red. Otherwise, replacing the card may influence the service.

4.6.4

Editing a Card The following introduces how to set the attributes of cards in the OTNM2000, convenient for querying and maintaining the cards of the project.


Procedure 1.

Right-click the card in the NE shelf view and select Property from the shortcut menu to open the Property dialog box.

4-24

Version: A


2.

4.6.5

Specify the attributes related to the card and click OK.

Deleting a Card The following introduces how to delete a card in the OTNM2000.

Caution: When a card is deleted, the topological connection of the card will be also deleted. Meanwhile, the services carried by the card will be broken. Prerequisite You have the privileges of Operator Group or higher privileges.

Version: A

4-25


Procedure 1.

Right-click the card in the NE shelf view and select Delete the card from the shortcut menu to open the Delete Board dialog box.

2.

Confirm the card to be deleted and click Delete.

Caution: When the Delete Board dialog box appears as shown in the following figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and adjust the service carried by the card to another card according to the prompt in red. Otherwise, deleting the card directly will greatly influence the service.

4.7

Configuring NE IP Remotely based on SN The SN refers to the 12-digit serial number of the device NMU card, similar to the MAC address of the computer. This SN must be unique in the entire network. The SN has already been downloaded to the device NMU card upon delivery. Commonly, the SN of each NMU card will be labeled on the card panel. The OTNM2000 configures and downloads the IP address locally and remotely based on SN to complete configuring IP addresses of the NEs in the entire network. This version adds the EMS Device SN, indicating the device SN stored in the EMSside database. This provides convenience for you to compare the SN written into the device with that labeled on the device (EMU Device SN), ensuring the uniqueness of the SN in the entire network.

4-26

Version: A


1.

Configure the IP address of the local NE (local download). Connect the network management computer directly with the local NE and the OTNM2000 will obtain the SN of the NMU card of the local NE and configure the IP address and switch. Then it downloads the mapping relationship between SN and IP address to the local NE.

Note: Local NE: Indicates the NE directly connected to the network management computer through a network cable. 2.

Configure the IP address of the neighboring NE (remote download). 1)

After the IP address of the local NE is configured, the OTNM2000 will obtain the SN of the NMU card of the neighboring NE based on the SN of the NMU card of the local NE, and configure the IP address and switch of the neighboring NE. Then it downloads the mapping relationship between SN and IP address to the neighboring NE.

2)

The OTNM2000 obtains the SN of the NMU card of the neighboring NE based on the NE whose IP address has already been configured. In this way, it finally finds all NEs and completes configuring the IP addresses of the NEs in the entire network.

Version: A

4-27


Note: u

Neighboring NE: Indicates the NE directly connected to the source NE through an optical path or network cable without no NEs between them.

u

Only when the neighboring NE communicates with the source NE smoothly through the MCC channel can the neighboring NE be detected by the source NE.

u

If multiple neighboring NEs are found simultaneously, you can refer to the corresponding project design document (listing the SNs of the NMU cards corresponding to the NE) for the specific NE.

4.7.1

Configuring the Local NE IP Address Complete the mapping between the local NE IP address and the SN.

Prerequisite u

The project networking planning, NE IP address and domain planning is prepared.

u

The cards of the local NEs have been configured.

u

The physical connection between the network management computer and the local NE is completed.

u


1.

In the OTNM2000, click Configuration (C)→NE IP Remote Config.

Procedure

4-28

Version: A


Note: The NE IP Remote Config window displays the NE entries that have completed the basic configuration. 2.

Set the local NE: In the NE IP Remote Config window, select a local NE entry, and then select SettingsSet as Local NE.

3.

Query the SN of the local NE: In the NE IP Remote Config window, click Query→Read Local NE SN.

Version: A

4-29


Note: If there are multiple local NEs as the network management server is connected through Hub, the SN will be randomly obtained. You need to confirm the SN corresponding to the equipment according to the SN label on the panel of the NMU card of the equipment. 4.

Set the IP address and switch-related parameters of the local NE: Click the parameter bar according to Table 4-1.

Table 4-1

NE IP Address Settings

Item

Description

SN

Default setting, which does not need to be modified. u

For the local NE, this item displays the network block / NE number stored in the database.

Object

u

For the remote NE, this item automatically displays the network block / NE number according to the neighboring SN detection sequence.

u EMU Equipment SN

NE number in descending order

SN of the NMU card. It displays the IP address of the NE that detects the neighboring NE for the

Source NE IP Address

neighboring NE. For example, suppose NE 1 is the local NE with the IP address 11.18.1.1, and NE 2 is the neighboring NE of NE 1, the Source NE Address of NE2 is 11.18.1.1.

Switch 1/2

The switch 1 and switch 2 are the NE IDs and the combination of switch 1 and switch 2 must be unique in the entire network. u u IP address of the NE, which must be unique in the entire network. As the local NE is connected with the network management server through

IP Address

network cables, the IP address of the NE must be in the same subnet as the IP address of the network card on the network management server; otherwise, detecting the SN of the neighboring NE may be influenced.

4-30

IP Mask

255.255.255.0

IP Gateway

No need to set.

Version: A


Table 4-1

NE IP Address Settings (Continued) Description

Item

Note 1: For the parameters not listed above, the default settings will be adopted.

5.

Download the IP configuration of the local NE: In the NE IP Remote Config window, click Settings→Write Local NE IP.

6.

Save the IP address of the local NE and the switch-related parameter settings: In the NE IP Remote Config window, select System→Save Configuration.

Note: After saving the settings, you can query the IP address, switch and other information of the NE in the Modify NE.

4.7.2

Configuring the IP Address of the Neighboring NE The following introduces how to set the mapping between the IP address and SN of the neighboring NE.

Prerequisite u

The project networking planning, NE IP address and domain planning is prepared.

u

The IP address of the local NE is configured.

u

The attributes and card of the neighboring NE are configured.

u

The neighboring NE communicates with the source NE smoothly through the MCC channel.

u

Version: A


4-31


Procedure 1.

In the NE IP Remote Config window, refer to the related project design document and IP planning, and double-click the parameter bar to configure the SN, IP address, switch and other information of other NEs.

2.

Click

3.

Obtain the SN of the neighboring NE: Select a local NE entry in the NE IP

to save the settings.

Remote Config window, and then select QueryFind Near NE by SN.

4.

Compare the SN of the NE automatically detected and the SN of the created NE. Download the IP address If they are consistent. When the IP address is downloaded, the NMU card is reset. 1)

For the NE whose SN is consistent with that of the NE automatically detected, set the Source NE IP, which should be consistent with that of the NE automatically detected.

2)

Select the NE entry whose IP address is to be downloaded in the NE IP Remote Config window, select Settings→Write Remote NE IP.

4-32

Version: A


Caution: u

Downloading the IP address of the NE means downloading the mapping between the SN and the IP address. The SN deleted is used to compare with the SN labeled on the NMU card and check whether the SN manually configured is correct. If there are inconsistent, the SN automatically detected should be taken as the standard one. Do not download IP address to the NE automatically detected and generated before the comparison.

u

The number of NEs to which the IP addresses are downloaded cannot exceed 20. Once the limited is exceeded, the OTNM2000 will gives the corresponding prompt. In this situation, you can download them gradually.

5.

Detect other neighboring NEs based on the neighboring NE whose IP address is configured. Repeat Step 4 to complete configuring the IP addresses of the neighboring NEs.

6.

Repeat Step 5 to compete configuring the IP addresses of the NEs in the entire network and then close NE IP Remote Config window.

Version: A

4-33

5

Topology Management Topology management is used to create and manage the topology structure of the entire network, so as to reflect the network connection status and operation status of the equipment. You can view the topological objects and real-time alarms on the topology view.

Topology Construction Flow Creating the Topology Adjusting the Topology Display Layer-based Topology Deleting a Topological Object Viewing the Topology Managing the DCN Network

Version: A

5-1


5.1

Topology Construction Flow The construction flow of the network topology describes the construction procedures of the entire physical topology as well as the relationship among the operation tasks. The construction flow of the network topology is as shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1

Network Topology Construction Flow

The construction flow of the network topology is detailed in Table 5-1.

5-2

Version: A

5 Topology Management

Table 5-1

Description of the Network Topology Construction Flow

Operation

Description Before deploying NEs in the topology view, design the layers in the physical topology and the location of NEs.

Designing the physical topology

The physical topology should on one hand reflect the topological structure of the actual communication network and on the other hand provides convenience for daily maintenance.

Adding topological Managing topological nodes

Managing fiber connections

nodes Deleting topological nodes Adding fiber connections Deleting fiber connections

Adds NEs into the main topology. Deletes NE nodes from the main topology without deleting the corresponding NEs. However, this operation may cause influence on services and fiber connections. Adds fiber connections in the main topology. Deletes fiber connections from the main topology.

Setting the

Selects whether to display the bureau name, IP address

topology display

and logical address of NEs in the main topology.

Setting the NE Icon

Selects the icon of the NE according to the NE type.

Setting the fiber connection attribute Adjusting

Setting the area

topology

size

display

Setting the background image Setting the color of the NE

Sets the properties (width, dotted or solid line) of the line according to the link rate. Sets the display area size of the main topology.

Sets the background image of the main topology.

Adjusts the color of the NE icon.

Setting the color of the fiber

Sets the color of the fiber connection.

connection Setting the Topology

topology layers

Layer Management

Version: A

For convenient management, you can place the topological objects in the same area or of the similar attributes at a same topology layer.

Modifying the

After setting the topology layers, you can modify the

topology layer

basic attributes and members of the topology layers as

attribute

needed.

5-3


5.2

Creating the Topology Creating the topology includes adding topological nodes and topological fiber connections.

5.2.1

Adding a Topological Node When an NE is added, the corresponding topological node will not be added in the main topology. You need to drag the NE onto the main topology manually.

Procedure 1.

Click the object in the Logical Tree pane, press the left mouse button and drag it to the desired location on the main topology view.

5.2.2

Adding a Fiber Connection NEs communicate with each other through the fiber connection. Only after creating the corresponding fiber connection in the main topology can you perform service configurations.

Prerequisite u


u

The corresponding topological nodes are added.

1.

Right-click the source NE in the main topology and select Add Link from the

Procedure

shortcut menu. 2.

5-4

Click any NE. The Add Link dialog box appears.

Version: A


Note: You can click the sink NE, or click any NE and then set the sink NE information manually in the Add Link dialog box. The fiber connection will automatically adjust to connect the desired sink NE.

3.

See Table 5-2 to set the fiber connection attribute according to the project planning. Then click Add to save the settings.

Table 5-2

Description of the Fiber Connection Attributes

Configuration Item

Description Indicates the fiber connection sequence number of the

Link No. Related Link

Do not select this item.

Link Cost

Not required.

Source port info

Version: A

NE.

Indicates the card corresponding to the source port. Click Board

to select the card from the drop-down list.

5-5


Table 5-2

Description of the Fiber Connection Attributes (Continued)

Configuration Item

Description Port

to

Selects the port corresponding to the card. Click select the port from the drop-down list.

Not required. By default, for the connection of NEs within Port in link

a network block, select this item; for the connection of NEs in different network blocks, do not select this item.

Part No

Sets the numbering of the NE and the network block that

NE No

the NE belongs to. After completing settings, click Apply.

Board

Indicates the card corresponding to the sink port. Click to select the card from the drop-down list.

Dest port info Port

to

Selects the port corresponding to the card. Click select the port from the drop-down list.

Not required. By default, for the connection of NEs within Port in link

a network block, select this item; for the connection of NEs in different network blocks, do not select this item. Sets the remark information of the fiber connection. You

Remark

can select View→Topo Display→Show link remark to show the remark information of the fiber connection in the main topology.

5.3

Adjusting the Topology Display The OTNM2000 enables you to adjust the topology display according to your preference.

5.3.1

Setting the Topology Display You can set whether to display the bureau name, IP address and logical address of NEs in the main topology.

Procedure 1.

Select the submenus under View→Topo Display in the main menu or rightclick in the blank area of the Main Topology tab and select the corresponding shortcut menus to perform the following operations:

5-6

Version: A


4

Select Bureau Name to display the corresponding bureau name under the NE in the Main Topology tab.

4

Select IP Address to display the corresponding IP address under the NE in the Main Topology tab.

4

Select Logic Address to display the corresponding logical address under the NE in the Main Topology tab.

4

Select Connection Number to display the corresponding bureau connection numbering under the NE in the Main Topology tab.

4

Select Switch to display the corresponding dialing switch under the NE in the Main Topology tab.

4

Select Show link remark to display the corresponding link remark information in the Main Topology tab.

4

Select Show NE in the network block only to only display the NEs in the selected network block in the Main Topology tab.

5.3.2

Setting the NE Icon You can modify the icon of the corresponding NE type displayed in the main topology according to your preference.

Procedure 1.

Select View→Topo Setting→NE Icon in the main menu to open the NE Image Setting dialog box.

2.

Double-click the NE image corresponding to the desired NE type and select the new icon from the drop-down list.

Version: A

5-7


Figure 5-2

3.

5.3.3

Setting the NE Icon

Click OK.

Setting the Fiber Connection Attribute Sets the properties (width, dotted or solid line) of the line according to the link rate. After completing the settings, the topology will determine the rate of the link based on the display of the fiber connection.

Procedure 1.

Select View→Topo Setting→Line Property in the main menu to open the Line settings dialog box.

2.

In the Line settings dialog box, select the link rate, line width and line type (solid or dashed line).

5-8

Version: A


Figure 5-3

3.

Setting the Fiber Connection Attribute

Click OK. In this example, the link of the GE rate is displayed as dotted line, as shown in the following figure.

5.3.4

Expanding / Collapsing Topological Links There are commonly multiple topological links between two NEs, presenting too many links in the main topology which are inconvenient for displaying and viewing.

Version: A

5-9


For better display and viewing, the OTNM2000 supports link aggregation in case of multiple links between two NEs to simplify the complicated topology view.


Procedure 1.

Make sure the

button pops up.

2.

Click any of the multiple links between two NEs to implement link aggregation, as shown in the figure.

Note: The +(*) appears on the link after the aggregation. The asterisk * indicates the number of links aggregated. Other Operations Double-click the link after the aggregation to expand the links.

5.3.5

Setting the Size of Display Area You can set the size of the display area of the main topology.

Procedure

5-10

1.

Select View→Topo Setting→Regional Size in the main menu.

2.

In the Topology Size dialog box, set the width and height of the display area.

Version: A


Figure 5-4

3.

5.3.6

Setting the Topology Area Size

Click OK.

Setting the Background Image You can set the background image of the main topology according to your preference.

Procedure 1.

Select View→Topo Setting→Background image in the main menu.

2.

Select the background image from the folder and click OK. The image appears as the background image of the main topology, as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

5-11


Figure 5-5

Setting the Background Color

Other Operations Select View→Topo Setting→Use default background in the main menu to restore the original background of the main topology.

5.3.7

Setting the Color of the NE You can set the colors of NEs displayed in the main topology according to your preference.

Procedure 1.

Right-click the NE in the Main Topology tab and select Modify the selected NE color→Modify net element color from the shortcut menu.

5-12

Version: A


2.

In the Color dialog box, select the desired color and click OK. The icon of the NE appears in the new color. In the following figure, the color of the NE icon in red rectangle is set to purple.

Figure 5-6

Setting the Color of the NE

Other Operations Right-click the NE in the Main Topology tab and select Modify the selected NE color→Restore net element color from the shortcut menu to restore the default color of the NE.

5.3.8

Setting the Color of the Line You can set the colors of lines (fiber connections) displayed in the main topology according to your preference.

Procedure 1.

Right-click the line in the Main Topology tab and select Modify the selected lines colors→Customized Color from the shortcut menu.

2.

In the Color dialog box, select the desired color and click OK. The line appears in the new color. In the following figure, the color of the line in red rectangle is set to purple.

Version: A

5-13


Figure 5-7

Setting the Color of the Line

Other Operations Right-click the line in the Main Topology tab and select Modify the selected lines colors→Restore the selected NE color from the shortcut menu to restore the default color of the line.

5.4

Layer-based Topology The OTNM2000 manages the network topology through the main topology. You can understand the networking status information and monitor the running status in real time in the topological view. The OTNM2000 of the R0550 version implements the layer-based topology display, which graphically displays topological connections among NEs and NE groups, including the paths among nodes and the information of NEs based on layers. This helps locate and manage NEs, improving management efficiency. u

Manages the topology based on layers and changes the topological view in the previous version, in which too much NEs are displayed with no layer-based display function, inconvenient for locating commonly concerned objects.

u

Reasonably places the stations in an area at a same layer, convenient for you to quickly select the source / sink stations and set the routes in the topology, without the need to drag over the topology. This greatly improves the service configuration efficiency.

5-14

Version: A


5.4.1

Setting Topology Layers The topology displays the tree on the left and the graph on the right. On the left is the navigation tree displaying the topological objects and the layer relationship among them; on the right is the topological chart displaying all the topological objects in the current physical topology view and their location relationship. For convenient management, the topological objects in the same area or of the similar attributes can be placed and displayed at a same topological layer.

Context According to the actual network, the layer-based topology of the R0550 version supports classifying objects into different layers by device type or NE type, meeting different management requirements. u

It supports quick display of layer-based topology through multiple ways, including system-defined layers and layers classified according to device type.

u

The Default Layer is a system-defined layer. All the uncategorized NEs will be added to this layer.

u

Each NE can be added into only one layer.

u

This version supports up to nine topological layers.

u

Even when an NE is deleted from the customized view, it exists in the corresponding physical view.

Procedure 1.

Select View→Topo Layer Management to open the Topo Layer Management tab.

2.

Click

to open the "Add Topology Layer" dialog box. Then select Basic

Property tab to set the name and remark information of the topological layer.

Version: A

5-15


3.

Select the Member tab, select the desired NE in the NE to be Selected box and click

or

to add it into the Selected NE box.

Note: : Indicates adding the selected objects in the left box into the

u

right box. u

: Indicates adding all the objects in the left box into the right box.

u

The object selection supports fuzzy query. Click

to filter the

objects by NE name or NE type. 4.

5-16

Click

to save the topology layer settings.

Version: A


Other Operations The other shortcut icons on the toolbar of the Topo Layer Management tab are described in the following figure: Icon

Description Deletes the selected layer. Modifies the selected layer. Moves up the selected layer. Moves down the selected layer. Categorizes all NEs into Core Layer, Convergence Layer and Access Layer according to their device type. Note: When this button is clicked, the customized layers will be deleted and all the NEs will be re-categorized according to their device types.

5.4.2

Modifying Topology Layers After setting the topology layers, you can modify their basic attributes and members as needed.

Procedure 1.

Select View→Topo Layer Management to open the Topo Layer Management tab.

2.

Modify basic attributes of the topology layer. 1)

Select the desired layer and click

to modify the layer name and remark

information.

Version: A

5-17


2) 3.

Click OK.

Adjust the members at the layer.

4

Method 1 a)

Select the desired layer and click

to open the Modify Property of

Layer dialog box.

b)

Select the Member tab and click

or

to adjust the

members.

c)

4

Click OK.

Method 2 a)

Double-click the desired layer, or select the desired layer and click the Detail button at the lower left corner of the Topo Layer Management window to open the Detail pane.

b) 5-18

Expand the members at the selected layer. Version: A


c)

Right-click the member to be adjusted and select Delete or Move to to delete the member or move it to another layer.

5.4.3

4.

Click

to save the topology layer settings.

5.

In the displayed dialog box that prompts successful saving, click OK.

Viewing the Layer-based Topology The following introduces how to view the topology based on layers to understand the structural information of the topology.

Context The layer-based topology adopts the display mode similar to the way how the map is browsed (a city includes the information of all its urban areas and streets). The layer-based topology display adopts this browsing mode. When you select the layer at the top of the Current View drop-down list, all the NEs at the selected layer as well as those at the layers under the selected one will be displayed in the main topology. The layer-based topological view has the following functions: u

It supports layer-based navigation, which means scrolling up / down the mouse to zoom in / out the topology will switch the topology among different layers.

u

When the current view is locked, zooming in / out the topology will not switch the current view.

Version: A

u

A network block can be taken as an independent layer to view the NEs under it.

u

The NEs uncategorized into layers will be displayed in Default Layer. 5-19


Procedure 1.

View the topology information in the Main Topology tab.

2.

Click

to the right of Current View to select the desired layer from the drop-

down list.

Note: The topological chart will display the NEs at the selected layer and those at the layers under the selected one. For example, if you select Core Layer, the topological chart displays the members at the access layer, convergence layer and core layer.

5-20

Version: A


Shortcut Icon Description The shortcut icons on the toolbar at the top of the topological chart are described in the following figure. Icon

Description Locks / unlocks the current view. When the current view is locked, zooming in / out the topology will not switch the current view. Switches to the selected mode, in which you can select the topology objects. Switches to the drag mode, in which you can move the topology view. Opens / closes the thumbnail view. Opens / closes the editing mode, in which you can drag the NE. Opens the Chart pane to view the object type and status information corresponding to each icon in the topology view. Zoom in the topology. Zoom out the topology. Restore the topology to the original size. Select the display size of the topology.

Other Operations u

If the current view is not locked, scrolling the mouse wheel or zooming in / out the topology will switch the topology among different layers according to the scaling.

u

If the current view is locked, scrolling the mouse wheel or zooming in / out the topology will scale the current view to reach the best display.

u

Select a network block in Logical Tree, and then select View→Topo Display →Show NE in the network block only in the main menu to only display the NEs under a specific network block.

Version: A

5-21


5.5

Deleting a Topological Object Deleting the topology includes deleting topological nodes and topological fiber connections.

5.5.1

Deleting a Fiber Connection During network adjustment, you can delete the fiber connection between NEs from the main topology as needed.

Background Information Deleting a fiber connection will also delete the services on the fiber connection.


Procedure 1.

In the Main Topology tab, right-click the desired fiber connection and select Delete from the shortcut menu to open the Delete Fiber Connection dialog box.

2.

5-22

Confirm the fiber connection to be deleted and click Delete.

Version: A


Caution: When the Delete Fiber Connection dialog box appears as shown in the following figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and adjust the relevant services according to the prompt in red. Otherwise, deleting the fiber connection directly will greatly influence the service.

5.5.2

Deleting a Node When adjusting the network topology, you can delete the topological nodes from the main topology according to your needs.


Deleting the NE node from the topology will not delete the NE object; however, deleting the NE will delete the NE node from the topology simultaneously.

u

Deleting a topological node will also delete the services carried by the node and its fiber connections.

Version: A

5-23


Procedure 1.

In the Main Topology tab, right-click the desired NE and select Delete node from the shortcut menu to open the Delete node dialog box.

2.

Confirm the node to be deleted and click Delete.

Caution: When the Delete node dialog box appears as shown in the following figure, go to the Business Management menu to check and adjust the service carried by the NE to another NE according to the prompt in red. Otherwise, deleting the node directly will greatly influence the service.

3.

5.6

In the displayed Delete Prompt alert box, click Yes to delete the current node.

Viewing the Topology By viewing the topology, you can understand the structure of the entire topology.

5.6.1

Viewing the Main Topology By viewing the main topology, you can understand the network layout and the running status of NEs.

5-24

Version: A


Procedure 1.

Select the Main Topology tab and view the network of the monitored NEs and related information.

2.

See Table 2-12 to lock, edit, or zoom in / out the main topology using the toolbar displayed above the Main Topology tab.

Other Operations Right-click and select the corresponding shortcut menus to perform the following operations: u

Right-click in the Main Topology tab and select Save Topology As Image from the shortcut menu to save the current topograph as an SVG file.

u

Right-click in the Main Topology tab and select Export from the shortcut menu to open the Output Report. View the configuration report of the OTNM2000 subnet structure and export the report as an XML, Txt, CSV or XSL file.

5.6.2

Viewing the Airscape The Airscape is used to display the full view thumbnail of the topograph. When the main topology tab only displays part of the view, you can browse full view of the current view via Airscape and locate the display area of the topograph.

Procedure 1.

Click

on the toolbar of the main topology or

at the lower right corner of

the main topology to open the Airscape pane and view the full view thumbnail of the topograph.

Note: The area in red rectangle of the Airscape pane is the visible area of the topology. You can click the desired location in the airscape or drag the red rectangle to locate the display area of the main topology.

Version: A

5-25


5.6.3

Viewing the Subnet You can view the subnets and their corresponding NEs in the main topology. Besides, collapsing or expanding subnets are supported in the topology view.

Prerequisite The subnet has been created in the Devcfg.

Procedure 1.

Click the corresponding subnet in the Browse Tree tab and view the selected subnet and its NEs in the Main Topology tab, as shown in Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8

2.

Viewing the Subnet

(Optional) In the Main Topology tab, right-click an NE in the subnet and select Collapse to Subnet from the shortcut menu. The NE nodes in the subnet appear as the subnet icon.

5-26

Version: A


Figure 5-9

3.

Collapsing Subnet

(Optional) In the Main Topology tab, right-click the subnet icon and select Expand the Subnet from the shortcut menu to expand the NEs included in the subnet.

5.6.4

Searching Objects The object searching function enables you to quickly locate the desired object.

Background Information The search objects include NEs, network block and shelves.

Procedure 1.

Select System→Object Searching in the main menu to open the Object Searching box under the toolbar.

2. Version: A

Click

to select the search object from the drop-down list. 5-27


3.

Enter the keyword in the text box according to the prompt in the text box.

Note: When searching the object, the system adopts dynamic fuzzy search, which means in the process of entering the keyword, the drop-down list dynamically displays the result matching the entered content. 4.

Select the desired object from the drop-down list and the object is marked in the Logical Tree pane and the Main Topology tab.

5-28

Version: A


5.7

Managing the DCN Network The OTNM2000 supports managing the DCN network of the PTN device. In the PTN network, the OTNM2000 establishes communication with the device through the DCN and manages / maintains the device.

Background Information The DCN network is composed of the OTNM2000, gateway NE, non-gateway NE and the communication networks among them. A gateway NE coupled with its connected non-gateway NE constitutes a Administrative Domain. The OTNM2000 accesses the non-gateway NE of the administrative domain by way of the gateway NE. The DCN can be divided into two types in terms of the DCN message bearing mode: Out-of-band DCN and In-band DCN. u

In-band DCN: Indicates the DCN network that uses the service channel provided by the device to transmit the network management information.

u

Out-band DCN: Indicates the DCN network that uses the channels other than the service channel to transmit the network management information.

Version: A

5-29


DCN Management The OTNM2000 supports the following DCN network management functions: u

DCN topology management

4

Displays the icon of the OTNM2000 and the out-of-band connections between the OTNM2000 and NEs in the topograph.

4

Displays the out-of-band connections between NEs in the topograph.

4

Displays the routes from the OTNM2000 to the NE and from the OTNM2000 to the NE by way of Ma / Mb.

u

DCN configuration management

4

Disables / enables the MCC channel.

4

Disables / enables the out-of-band communication network (the device F interface), disallowing shutdown of the directly connected NE.

u

DCN status monitoring

4

Queries the status of the MCC channel (NE network status: disabled / enabled, UP / DOWN).

4

Queries the status (disabled / enabled) of the out-of-band communication network (the device F interface).

u

DCN alarm management

4

Queries the alarms of the MCC channel.

4

Queries the alarms of the out-of-band communication network (the device F interface).

u

Automatic discovery of topological links The OTNM2000 detects new physical links between NEs according to the OSPF neighbor quantity reported by the device.

5.7.1

DCN Topology Management The DCN topology management includes adding / deleting network devices, querying NE ports and viewing the NE-to-NE routes.

5-30

Version: A


Background Information The DCN management function only supports the PTN device and the prerequisite is that the EMU software of the device must support this function.

Procedure 1.

Switch to the DCN topology. Select View→DCN Topo to switch between the main topology and the DCN topology.

2.

Add a network device. The network devices include Router and Server. 1)

Right-click in the blank area of the Main Topology tab and select Add Network Device from the shortcut menu to open the Add Network Device dialog box.

2) 3.

Set the corresponding parameters and click OK.

Add an Ethernet connection. 1)

Right-click a network device or NE and select Add Ethernet Connection from the shortcut menu.

Version: A

5-31


2)

Click the desired target network device or NE to complete the connection. The Ethernet connection appears in blue, as shown in the following figure.

4.

View the NE-to-NE route. 1)

Right-click the corresponding NE and select Set Source NE from the shortcut menu.

2)

Right-click the target NE and select Set Destination NE from the shortcut menu.

3)

View the NE-to-NE route in the DCN topology. The Ma / Mb appears as a / b in the DCN topology, which is the same as the display in the main topology.

Note: For the concepts of Ma and Mb, see Management Model.

5-32

Version: A


5.7.2

DCN Configuration Management The DCN configuration management includes managing the NE F interface and the MCC channel.

5.7.2.1

Managing the MCC Channel Status The OTNM2000 supports setting the shutdown status of the MCC channel. Only when the Shutdown Status of the ports of the two NEs is enabled can they communicate with each other.

Background Information The MCC channel status function only supports the PTN device and the prerequisite is that the EMU software of the device must support this function.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click the NE in the DCN topology and select MCC Channel Status to open the MCC Channel Status tab.

3.

Version: A

In the MCC Channel Status tab, set the shutdown status of the port.

5-33


4.

Right-click in the blank area of the MCC Channel Status tab and select Channel Setting from the shortcut menu to issue the channel setting command to the device.

5.

Right-click in the blank area of the MCC Channel Status tab and select Refresh from the shortcut menu to view the status of the port and confirm whether the setting is successful or not.

5.7.2.2

Managing the NE F Interface The F interface of the PTN NE can be shut down. However, the F interface directly connected with the OTNM2000 cannot be shut down.

Background Information The NE F interface management function only supports the PTN device and the prerequisite is that the EMU software of the device must support this function.

Procedure 1.

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→System Management→NE-Port Management.

2.


5-34

to open the NE-Port Management tab.

Version: A


3.

Click the Shutdown Status column of the corresponding NE to set the shutdown status of the NE F interface.

4.

After completing the settings, right-click in the blank area of the NE-Port Management tab and select Set Shutdown Status from the shortcut menu and set the "Set the shutdown status" command to the device.

5.

Right-click in the blank area of the NE-Port Management tab and select Refresh from the shortcut menu and view the status of the F interface to confirm whether the setting is successful or not.

5.7.3

DCN Status Monitoring The DCN status monitoring function includes querying the status of the MCC channel and the status of the out-of-band communication network (the device F interface).

Version: A

5-35


5.7.3.1

Querying the MCC Channel Status Querying the MCC channel status helps confirm the shutdown status of the corresponding device port. Only when the shutdown status of the ports of the two NEs are set to Enable can they communicate with each other.

Background Information The MCC channel status function only supports the PTN device and the prerequisite is that the EMU software of the device must support this function.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click the NE in the DCN topology and select MCC Channel Status to open the MCC Channel Status tab.

3.

In the MCC Channel Status tab, view the related status of the corresponding port.

5.7.3.2

Querying the Status of the NE F Interface Querying the status of the NE F interface helps confirm the shutdown status of the corresponding NE F interface.

Background Information The NE F interface management function only supports the PTN device and the prerequisite is that the EMU software of the device must support this function.

5-36

Version: A


Procedure 1.

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→System Management→NE F-Port Management.

2.


3.

5.7.3.3

to open the NE F-Port Management tab.

View the status of the corresponding NE F port.

Querying the NE Port Status This function allows you to query the status of various ports of an NE, including the status of the MCC channel. Only when the shutdown status of the ports of the two NEs are set to Enable can they communicate with each other.

Background Information The NE port status query function only supports the PTN device and the prerequisite is that the EMU software of the NE must support this function.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click the NE in the DCN topology and select Get NE Port Status from the shortcut menu to open the Get NE Port Status tab.

3.

Version: A

View the port status of the selected NE in the tab.

5-37


Figure 5-10

5.7.4

Querying the NE Port

DCN Alarm Management The OTNM2000 supports querying the alarms of the MCC channel and the alarms of the out-of-band communication network (the device F interface).

Background Information The alarms of the out-of-band communication network (the device F interface) include F_DISABLE, which indicates the F port shutdown alarms.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Current Alarms to open the Current Alarm tab.

2.

Right-click anywhere in the Current Alarm tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu.

3.

In the displayed Set Current Alarm Query Condition dialog box, select the alarms related to the MCC channel or the F interface in the list under Alarm Code. The following figure uses querying the MCC shutdown alarms as an example.

5-38

Version: A


4.

Version: A

Click OK. The matching alarms appear in the Current Alarm tab.

5-39


5.7.5

Automatic Discovery of Topological Links Using the automatic discovery of topological links can detect whether the specified NE is fiber-connected so as to create links for the NE quickly in a batch manner in the OTNM2000.

Background Information The automatic discovery of topological links only supports the PTN device and the prerequisite is that the EMU software of the device must support this function.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click the NE in the DCN topology and select Topo Link Auto Discovery from the shortcut menu. The OTNM2000 will issue the query command to automatically add the detected NE topological links to the topology.

5-40

Version: A

6

Configuration Management The configuration management is used to configure the information of the network and NE devices, which is the core management function of the OTNM2000.

Time Calibration Management Configuration Structure Configuration Device Configuration Refreshing Configuration Time Configuration Check Managing Card Managing NE Software NE Communication Optical Cable Router Settings Setting the NE to the Not Started Status Backing Up DCG Files

Version: A

6-1


6.1

Time Calibration Time calibration synchronizes the time of the equipment and the time of the OTNM2000.

Background Information When the time of the equipment and the time of the OTNM2000 are asynchronous, the delivering of equipment configuration will fail.

Procedure 1.

In the Logical Tree pane, right-click a network block or an NE and select Config→Time Calibration from the shortcut menu to open the Time Calibration alert box, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1

2.

The Time Calibration Alert Box

Click Yes in the Time Calibration alert box. Query the operation result in the Command manager window that appears subsequently.

4

If Command succeed is displayed under the remark column, time calibration is successful.

4

If Command return timeout or Polling unregistered is displayed under the remark column, the time calibration fails and users need to check whether the connection between the OTNM2000 and the equipment is normal, and perform the time calibration again after the fault is cleared until the operation is successful.

6.2

Management Configuration The following introduces the management configuration function of the OTNM2000.

6-2

Version: A

6 Configuration Management

6.2.1

Downloading the Management Configuration Download the network block’s management configuration data in the database to the equipment.

Background Information Management configuration designates members for the part and the managermanaged relationships between the members, including EMU configurations and other configurations, of which: u

EMU configurations include EMU total number, NE total number, NE address, EMU type, designated M / A and so on.

u

Other configurations include EMU switch, configuration time, version number, domain address and so on.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 6-1, the Management Configuration alert box appears on the OTNM2000 GUI, as shown in Figure 6-2.

Table 6-1

Access Method of Downloading Management Configuration

Operation

Access Method Select a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select

Downloading

Configuration→Download Management Config in the main

Management

menu.

Configuration

Right-click a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select Config→Download Management Config from the shortcut menu.

Figure 6-2

Version: A

The Management Configuration Alert Box

2.

Click Yes in the Management Configuration alert box.

3.

Query the operation result in the Command manager window that appears.

6-3


4

If Command succeed is displayed in the remark column, the operation is successful.

4

If other contents are displayed in the remark column, the operation fails. You need to eliminate the failure according to the prompts and download the equipment configuration again until the operation is successful.

Note: When downloading the management configuration to a network block, all the working EMU cards under this network block will restart and the new data will be written into the EEPROM of each EMU card.

6.2.2

Analyzing the Network Block Management Configuration After delivering the management configuration, users can perform the network block management configuration analysis to view and check the network block management configuration information.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 6-2 to open the management config data window, as shown in Figure 6-3.

Table 6-2

Access Method of Analyzing Network Block Management Configuration

Operation

Access Method Select the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and

Analyzing network block management configuration

select Configuration→Network Block Management Config Analysis in the main menu. Right-click the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and select ConfigurationRead Management Config from the shortcut menu.

6-4

Version: A


Figure 6-3

2.

The management config data Window

Check whether the management configuration data in the window is consistent with the OTNM2000 configuration data. If not, users need to re-download the management configuration data.

6.3

Structure Configuration The following introduces the structure configuration function of the OTNM2000.

6.3.1

Downloading the Structure Configuration You can download the network block’s structure configuration to the equipment.

Version: A

6-5


Background Information Structure configuration shows the connection relationships between the NEs in the part and shows the topology of the entire part.

Procedure 1.

Select one method in Table 6-3, the Structure Configuration alert box appears on the OTNM2000 GUI, as shown in Figure 6-4.

Table 6-3

Access Method of Downloading Structure Configuration

Operation

Access Method Select a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select

Downloading the

Configuration→Download Structure Config in the main menu.

Structure Configuration

Right-click a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select Config→Download Structure Config from the shortcut menu.

Figure 6-4

The Structure Configuration Alert Box

2.

Click Yes in the Structure Configuration alert box.

3.


4

If Command succeed is displayed under the remark column, the operation is successful.

4

If other prompts are displayed under the remark column, the operation fails. Users should eliminate the fault according to the prompts and deliver the structure configuration again until the operation is successful.

6.3.2

Analyzing the Network Block Structure Configuration After delivering the structure configuration, users can perform the network block structure configuration analysis to view and check the network block structure configuration information.

6-6

Version: A


Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 6-4 to open the structure config data window, as shown in Figure 6-5.

Table 6-4

Access Method of Analyzing Network Block Structure Configuration

Operation

Access Method Select the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and

Analyzing the Network Block Structure Configuration

select Configuration→Network Block Structure Config Analysis in the main menu. Right-click the desired network block in the Logical Tree pane and select Configuration→Read Structure Config from the shortcut menu.

Figure 6-5

Version: A

The structure config data Window

6-7


2.

Check whether the structure configuration data in the window is consistent with the OTNM2000 configuration data. If not, users need to re-download the structure configuration data.

6.4

Device Configuration The following introduces the device configuration function of the OTNM2000.

6.4.1

Downloading the Equipment Configuration Download the network block’s equipment configuration data in the database to the equipment.

Background Information Usually, the equipment configuration is saved on the basis of each NE and it includes all the card configurations, cross-connect configurations and so on. The equipment configuration of NE is saved in EEPROM of that NE’s EMU card. If an EMU card is powered off due to fault, the configuration data will not be lost. When the EMU card is powered on, the configuration will be read out and the NE will be initialized.

Procedure 1.

Select one method in Table 6-5, and the Device Configuration alert box appears on the OTNM2000 GUI, as shown in Figure 6-6.

Table 6-5

Access Method of Downloading Equipment Configuration

Operation

Access Method Select a network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and select

Downloading the

Configuration→Download Equipment Config in the main menu.

Equipment Configuration

Right-click a network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Configuration→Download Equipment Config from the shortcut menu.

6-8

Version: A


Figure 6-6

The Device Configuration Alert Box

2.

Click Yes in the Device Configuration alert box.

3.


4


4

If other prompts are displayed under the remark column, the operation fails. Users should eliminate the fault according to the prompts and deliver the equipment configuration again until the operation is successful.

6.4.2

Reading the Device Configuration The following introduces how to read the device configuration.

Procedure 1.

Right-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the logical view and select Config→Read Device Config.

2.

Version: A


6-9


3.

The device configuration information read appears in the Command Manager window.

6.5

Refreshing Configuration Time Refresh the delivering time of the management configuration.

Background Information If the management or structure configuration to be downloaded is the same with the existing one, the OTNM2000 prompts Configuration has no change. To still download the configuration, you need to refresh the configuration time.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 6-6, the Refresh Config Time alert box appears, as shown in Figure 6-7.

Table 6-6

Access Method of Refreshing the Configuration Time

Configuration Item

Access Method Select a network block in the Logical Tree pane and then select

Refreshing

Configuration→Refresh Config Time in the main menu.

configuration time

Right-click a network block in the Logical Tree pane and select Config →Refresh Config Time from the shortcut menu.

6-10

Version: A


Figure 6-7

The Refresh Config Time Alert Box

2.

Click Yes in the Refresh Config Time alert box.

3.


4


4

If other prompts are displayed under the remark column, the operation fails. Users should eliminate the fault according to the prompts and refresh the configuration time again until the operation is successful.

6.6

Configuration Check The following introduces the configuration check of the OTNM2000.

6.6.1

Configuration Check The configuration check is a checking mechanism for checking whether the actual equipment configuration is consistent with the configuration in the database.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 6-7 to open the Check Config tab and bring up the Check Config Parameter Setting dialog box.

Table 6-7

Access Method of Configuration Check

Operation

Access Method Select Configuration→Check Config in the main menu.

Configuration Check

Version: A

Right-click the desired project, network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Configuration→Check Config from the shortcut menu.

6-11


Table 6-7

Access Method of Configuration Check (Continued)

Operation

Access Method Right-click the desired project or NE in the Browse Tree pane and select Check Config from the shortcut menu. In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool Configuration ManagementCheck Config.

2.

Set related parameters of configuration check in the Check Config Parameter Setting dialog box and click OK. The system selects Compare the database and the EMU card configuration and Compare the database and the BCT card configuration by default.

Note: u

Open the Check Config tab in the Logical Tree / Browse Tree shortcut menu, ➔ Step 4.

u

Follow other paths in Table 6-7, ➔ Step 3.

3.

Select the object that needs checking configuration in the Operational Tree tab.

4.

Click

or right-click anywhere in Check the Configuration tab and select

Start Checking to check the configuration of the selected object. 5.

(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Check Config tab to perform the following operations in the process of checking configuration.

4

Select Stop Checking to stop the configuration check.

4

Select Result Auto Scroll to switch the scroll mode of displaying results.

Subsequent Operation Record the difference between the equipment and the database, and verify the correctness according to the actual circuit condition. u

If the configuration on the equipment is correct (there may be some modification on the OTNM2000 that has not been delivered), users need to contact the FiberHome engineers to handle onsite.

6-12

Version: A


u

If the configuration on the OTNM2000 is correct, users should deliver the equipment configuration again.

6.6.2

Comparing the NE Configuration You can compare the NE configuration at the OTNM2000 side with that at the device side to check whether they are consistent.

Background Information Only the IPRAN NE supports the NE configuration comparison function.

Procedure 1.

Right-click the IPRAN NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the logical view and select Config→NE Config Compare from the shortcut menu to open the NE Config Compare window.

2.

Click the current configuration block to be compared in the IPRAN configuration list and click Start Compare to compare the configuration. The comparison result is as shown in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8

3.

The NE Config Compare Window

(Optional) Click Output Comparison Report to save to comparison result to the local OTNM2000.

Version: A

6-13


6.7

Managing Card The following introduces the related functions of card management.

6.7.1

Configuring Card Parameters The following introduces how to configure the clock and time synchronization as well as the related services by configuring the card.

Procedure 1.

Double-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane and click the corresponding card in the subrack view. Then click the Card Configuration on the Task Panel at the right side of the tab to open the card configuration page, as shown in Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-9

2.

The Card Configuration Page

Configure the specific card parameters in the different tabs of the card configuration page. The configuration tabs of the card configuration window vary with the card types. Please configure the card according to the actual project requirements. See Configuration Guide and Card Configuration Parameter Reference of the equipment for detailed instruction.

3.

Right-click the blank area of the card configuration page or click the buttons at the left part of the page to perform the following operations, as shown in Table 6-8.

6-14

Version: A


Table 6-8

Operations in the Card Configuration Page

Shortcut Menu Items

Button

Saves the configuration data on the GUI to

Write config

the database without delivering to the

(GUI→Database) Write config (Database→Device)

Description

equipment. -

Delivers the configuration data in the database to the equipment. Saves the configuration data on the GUI to

Write config

the database first and then delivers to the

(GUI→Device)

equipment.

Read config

Reads the configuration data in the database

(Database→GUI)

to the GUI. Reads the configuration data on the

Read config

equipment to the GUI without updating the

(Device→GUI)

Read config (BCT→GUI)

database. -

Read config (Device→GUI block

Reads the configuration data in the BCT to the GUI without updating the database. Reads the blocks of card configuration

-

read)

contents on the GUI from the device without updating the database. Checks whether the actual equipment

Configuration Check

-

configuration is consistent with the configuration in the database. Before modifying the configuration items in a batch manner, click this option to display the configuration item options, (After clicking, this

Display / Hide config items

menu option becomes "Hide config items" -

automatically, click it to cancel the configuration,) so as to use this entry as the basis to modify the same configuration item of the other objects. This function is not often used now. Expands the card configuration items and

Expand

-

the corresponding sub-items in the tree structure.

Collapse

Version: A

-

Displays the card configuration items in outline.

6-15


Table 6-8

Operations in the Card Configuration Page (Continued)

Shortcut Menu Items

Button

Description Users should save the data to the database after the card configuration. Then read the database and click this item, users can

Undo

cancel the previous card configuration operation in the database. This item is used together with the "Undo" item. After clicking "Undo", users can click

Redo

this item to restore the previous card configuration operation in the database. -

Task Pane

6.7.2

Click this menu option to display the task panel.

Copying Card Configuration Copying card configuration is a fast batch duplication operation. The operation objects are the cards of the same type within a project / part / NE.

Note: This operation only modifies the configuration data in the database and does not deliver the data to the equipment. Procedure 1.

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→Card management →Copy Board Config.

2.

Select the source card and the target card in the Operational Tree pane, and click

6-16

to open the Copy Board Config tab.

Version: A


3.

Click the row of the source card, right-click anywhere in the tab and select Select Current Card as Copy Source from the shortcut menu. The Current Operation column in the Copy Board Config tab displays Copy Source.

4.

In the right part of the Copy Board Config tab, select the configuration block to be copied in the Sub Config Block pane and click Start Copying.

5.

In the Batch Modification Config alert boxes that appear, click Yes. Then click OK in the OTNM2000 alert box that appears subsequently.

6.

(Optional) Click Restore Card Default Config. In the Batch Modification Config alert boxes that appear, click Yes. Then click OK in the OTNM2000 alert box that appears subsequently.

6.7.3

Delivering Card Control Commands Configure and deliver the commands such as equipment loopback and provide supports for the maintenance and troubleshooting of the equipment.

Version: A

6-17


Procedure 1.

Double-click an NE in the Logical Tree pane, click the corresponding card in the subrack view, and click the Control Command on the Task Panel at the right side of the tab, as shown in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10

2.

The Card Control Command Page

After configuring the related commands, click

. The Command warning

alert box appears. 3.

According to the prompts, confirm the command is correct and click OK. The command will be delivered to the equipment.

6.7.4

Checking the Card Status Via viewing card status, users can check whether the cards are present and the software / hardware version complies with the planning.

Background Information The card status includes the basic card information (such as card number, software version, activation status) and special status items. Different cards have different status items.

Procedure 1.

Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and click the corresponding card in the subrack view. Click STATUS in the Task Panel pane at the right side of the GUI to open the card status page, as shown in Figure 6-11.

6-18

Version: A


Figure 6-11

The Card Status Page

Note: For the EMU card, you need to click STATUS, EMU_STATUS, EMU_BCT_ADDR, EMU_BCT_DATA, EMU_NE_NETWORK and EMU_NE_CONFIG_TIME on the Task Panel respectively to open the corresponding status tabs. 2.

Version: A

Check the current status information of the card in the card status page.

6-19


6.7.5

Synchronizing the Card Configuration The card configuration of the device can be synchronized to the OTNM2000 database manually or automatically.

Procedure 1.

Select the access method described in Table 6-9 to access the Card Config Timing Synchronization tab.

Table 6-9

Access Method of Synchronizing the Card Configuration

Operation

Access Method Select Configuration→Card Config Timing Synchronization in the

Synchronizing the

main menu.

Card Configuration

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→Card management→Card Config Timing Synchronization.

2.

Select the desired object in the Operational Tree pane and click Add, or rightclick anywhere of the Card Config Timing Synchronization tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-12.

6-20

Version: A


Figure 6-12

3.

Adding a Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration

See Table 6-10 for setting related parameters of the scheduled synchronization task of card configuration.

Table 6-10

Description of Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration Description

Parameter Task Name

Sets the name of the card configuration synchronization task.

Task Enable

Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by default. Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is by default.

Task Type Basic

u

designated time when the Timing Run is selected. u

setting

The system automatically executes the statistics task at the The system executes the task immediately after setting the task when the Manual Run is selected.

Sets the task time only when the Timing Run is selected for the task type. Task Time

The Begin Time and the End Time are optional setting items

Setting

and used to set the time range of the scheduled task. The Running Time is the compulsory item used for setting the time for running the scheduled task.

Version: A

6-21


Table 6-10

Description of Scheduled Sync Task of Card Configuration (Continued) Description

Parameter

Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is selected for the task type. Sets the period of executing the task and there are two types including Day and Week. Task Period

u

Sets the time interval in the Interval (Day) text box when the Day is selected for the Task Period.

u

Enters the expected value in the Week text box according to the format of the informative message when the Week is selected.

4.

Click OK and then view the added card configuration synchronization task in the Card Config Timing Synchronization.

5.

(Optional) To modify a task, select the task and click Modify, or right-click the desired task and select Modify from the shortcut menu. See Table 6-10 to modify the parameters and click OKTable 6-10.

6.

(Optional) To delete a task, select the task and click Delete, or right-click the desired task and select Delete from the shortcut menu. Then click OK in the displayed dialog box.

6.8

Managing NE Software The following introduces the related functions of managing NE software.

6.8.1

Downloading the Software Software download is used to deliver the software data from the OTNM2000 to the card of equipment, so as to upgrade the card software.

Prerequisite

6-22

u

The card software upgrade package has been prepared.

u

Services on the card to be upgraded have been switched to other cards.

Version: A



When the IPRAN and POTS equipment downloads the software via this function, the new software will be enabled promptly.

u

When other equipment downloads the software via this function, the time for enabling the software needs to be set. This function should be used together with the card software delay enabling function.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 6-11 to bring up the Open dialog box.

Table 6-11

Access Method of Delivering Software

Configuration Item

Access Method Select Management Tool→Card Management→Software Download in the Operational Tree pane. Then select the desired card in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and drag it to

Downloading Software

the Software Download tab. Click the NE in the Logical Tree tab and right-click the corresponding card in the subrack view and select DOWNLOAD_ SOFTWARE from the shortcut menu.

2.

Select the upgrade package in the Open dialog box and click Open and the card to be upgraded appears in the left side of the Software Download tab.

Version: A

6-23


3.

Select the card in Software Download tab and right-click the blank area of tab, select Software Download / Force Software Download from the shortcut menu.

Note: When selecting Software Download, the system will deliver the selected software only when it is the later version of the card software on the equipment. Otherwise the system will reject the delivering request. 4.

6.8.2

Click OK in the alert box that appears.

Setting Delayed Enabling of the Card Software Use the card software enabling delay function to set the enabling time of the new version of card software, so as to enhance the upgrade efficiency of the card software.

6-24

Version: A


Prerequisite You have downloaded the new version of card software.

Procedure 1.

Select Management Tool→Card Management→Apply the card software later in the Operational Tree pane.

2.

Select the corresponding card in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

3.

to open the Apply the card software later tab.

Select the corresponding card in the Apply the card software later tab and right-click anywhere in the tab to perform the following operations:

4

Select Set starting board software time, configure the time in the Card software restart time setting box and click OK. After configuration, the User Setting Enable Time of the corresponding card on the tab shows the configured time. If the configuration is successful, the displayed Equipment Enable Time is the same as the User Setting Enable Time. If the configuration fails, the Equipment Enable Time shows the configured time is invalid. Users should check the configured starting time and see whether it is incorrect.

4

Select Apply the card software right now to set the enabling time as the current time plus 3 seconds.

4

Select Cancel Time Setting to Apply Card Software to cancel the configured card enabling time.

4

Select Refresh to refresh the information of all cards in the tab.

Note: If you fail to select Start board software immediately, please check whether the EMS time is consistent with the NE BCT time. If not, solve the problem via NE time calibration. Operation Result After successfully configuring the card software enabling time, the system will enable the new version of card software at the configured time. Version: A

6-25


6.8.3

Setting the FTP The FTP setting writes the FTP information of the OTNM2000 server to the NE so that the NE knows the source of the software.

Background Information Only the POTS NE supports the FTP setting function.

Procedure 1.

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→Card Management →FTP Setting to open the FTP Setting window.

2.

Select a POTS NE and set the related parameters of the FTP server in the FTP Setting window.

4

The IP address of the FTP server: Enter the IP address of the OTNM2000 server which is the actual FTP server.

4

Port: Enter the FTP server port, 21 by default.

4

Username: Enter the username, 1 by default.

4

Password: Enter the password, 1 by default.

3.

Click Write FTP Setting... and click OK in the dialog box that appears.

4.

(Optional) Select a POTS NE and click Read FTP Setting... to check whether the FTP settings of the corresponding NE are correct.

6-26

Version: A


6.8.4

Managing Card Software Users can perform unified management of the NE's card software via the card software management so that the software loading via the NE software delivering is more convenient.

Procedure 1.

Select Management Tool→Card Management→Board software manager in the Operational Tree pane to open the Board software manager window, as shown in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13

2.

The Board software manager Window

Import the card software into the software library. 1)

Select the card of the equipment at the left side of the GUI and click Import Boar....

2)

In the displayed Single disk software set dialog box, click

to select

the corresponding card software and click Open. Version: A

6-27


3)

Confirm that the selected card is correct and click Imported into the software library, as shown in Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14

4)

Imported into the Software Library

Click the cross button at the top right corner of the Single disk software set to close the Single disk software set dialog box.

5)

Check the imported software information in the Board software manager, as shown in Figure 6-15.

6-28

Version: A


Figure 6-15

3.

Checking Card Software Information

(Optional) Export the card software from the software library. 1)

Select the card of the equipment at the left side of the object tree and select the row where the software is located at the right side of the pane and click Export Boar.....

2)

Select the path to export the software in the Save as dialog box that appears and enter the file name. Click Save.

4.

(Optional) Search the card software in the software library. 1)

Click Search to bring up the FTP Search dialog box.

2)

Enter the key word of the card software and click Search. ¡

If the corresponding software exists, the result will display at the right side of the Single disk software set dialog box.

¡

If the corresponding software does not exist, the OTNM2000 alert box appears, prompting Can't find the matched object!.

5.

(Optional) Export the card software list. Click Export to export the card software list to the *.HTML file.

Version: A

6-29


6.8.5

NE Software Download Users can manage the software and data of the NE, back up the NE data and upgrade / downgrade the NE software via the NE software download.

Background Information Only the IPRAN and POTS NEs support the function of NE software download.

Procedure 1.

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→Card Management →NE Software Download.

2.

Select the NE whose software is to be downloaded in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

6-30

to open the NE Software Download tab.

Version: A


Note: u

The source path of the NE prompts that the NE software is obtained from the "download/software/" directory of the FTP server.

u

Click Ftp-IP Setting to open the Ftp-IP Setting dialog box and set the IP address of the FTP server.

3.

Back up the NE configuration.

Note: The NE data should be backed up before upgrading / downgrading to avoid data loss or damage caused by the upgrade / downgrade failure of NE software. 1)

Select the corresponding NE in the NE Software Download tab and click Backup NE Config.

2)

View the configuration information of the NE in the NE configuration information tab in the lower part.

3)

Click Save as to save the NE configuration file to the designated directory.

4)

(Optional) In the NE configuration information tab, click Restore the configuration and click OK in the displayed alert box to restore the NE configuration.

4.

Download NE Software. 1)

Select the NE whose software is to be downloaded and double-click the corresponding area in the Src Path column or click

in the Src Path

column to open the NE software set dialog box.

Version: A

6-31


2)

(Optional) If there are no needed files in the software library, click

behind

the "File path" textbox, select the corresponding file and click Import Into Software Library. 3)

In the NE software set dialog box, click before the NE name to expand and view the corresponding software of the NE in the software library.

4)

Select the software to be downloaded and click OK to return to the NE Software Download tab. The selected software name appears in the source path column.

5)

Select the NE whose software is to be downloaded and double-click the corresponding area in Start Time column or click

in the Start Time

column to open the Set Time dialog box.

6-32

Version: A


6)

In the Set Time dialog box, set the start time for downloading the NE software and click OK.

7)

Select the NE whose software is to be downloaded and double-click the corresponding area in the Reboot Time column or click

in the Reboot

Time column to open the Set Time dialog box.

8)

Set the reboot time of the card in the Set Time dialog box and click OK.

Caution: The card software is forwarded to the other cards by the EMU card via the FTP server. When the EMU card software download is completed and restarted but the other cards' software is not completed downloading, the download of the other cards' software fails. If the delivered cards include the EMU card, users should set the reboot time of the EMU card with care. Version: A

6-33


9)

Click Start Download at the bottom of the NE Software Download tab and check the download status of the card software in the Status tab.

6.9

NE Communication The following introduces the functions related to NE communication.

6.9.1

Pinging the NE Check whether the communication between the OTNM2000 and an NE is normal.

Procedure 1.

Right-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane to perform the following operations:

4

For OTNM2000 server end, select Ping from the shortcut menu to open the ping window.

4

For the OTNM2000 client end, select More Commands→OTNM Ping from the shortcut menu to open the OTNM Ping window.

2.

Check the replied information from the target NE in the window.

4

If the window displays Reply from *.*.*.*: bytes=32 time=*ms TTL= as shown in Figure 6-16, the communication between the OTNM2000 and the NE is normal.

6-34

Version: A


Figure 6-16

4

The Result of Pinging NE

If the window displays Request timed out, the communication between the terminal emulation software package (such as Hyper Terminal) and the NE is abnormal. Users should check the connection between the OTNM2000 and the NE, and Ping the NE again after users have eliminate the fault until the connection is normal.

6.9.2

SSH SSH is a secure remote login protocol developed based on the traditional Telnet protocol. It greatly enhances the security in terms of authentication mode and data transmission.

Procedure 1.

Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select SSH (IP address) from the shortcut menu.

2.

Version: A

Click Yes in the displayed alert box to open the command line interface (CLI).

6-35


3.

Enter the login name and password (both are root by default) on the CLI and press Enter.

4.

6-36

Access the SSH configuration window.

Version: A


6.9.3

Telneting the NE

Procedure 1.

Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the logical view and select Telnet from the shortcut menu. Then configure the NE via the CLI in the displayed dialog box.

6.10

Optical Cable Router Settings You can set the information of the same optical cable route and check whether the active and standby circuits are of the same optical cable route so as to ensure the availability of the standby circuit.

Procedure 1.

Select Configuration→Optical Cable Router Setting in the main menu to open the Optical Cable Router Setting dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-17.

Version: A

6-37


Figure 6-17

The Optical Cable Router Setting Dialog Box

The Optical Cable Router Setting dialog box includes two list boxes.

4

The Optical Cable Information list box displays the optical cables in the project and is entered by users.

4

The Identical Router Information list box displays the actual routing information in the project and is entered by users. The optical cable information is imported from the Optical Cable Information list box.

2.

Set the optical cable information. 1)

In the Optical Cable Information list box, click Edit to open the Optical Cable Settings window.

6-38

Version: A


2)

In the Optical Cable Settings window, click Add and enter the cable information in the displayed Add dialog box. Then click OK to save the settings.

Version: A

6-39


3)

(Optional) In the Optical Cable Settings window, click Search and enter the cable information in the displayed Search Content dialog box. Then click OK to search for the desired cable.

4)

(Optional) Select the corresponding optical cable and click Delete to delete the selected optical cable information.

5)

(Optional) Select the corresponding optical cable and click Modify to modify the selected optical cable information.

6)

(Optional) Click Export to export the optical cable information as a CSV file.

7)

(Optional) Click Import to import the optical cable information from the CSV file.

3.

Set the same-route information. The procedure for setting the same-route information is same as Set the optical cable information.

4.

Set the cable comparison table. 1)

After completing the settings in the Optical Cable Information and Identical Router Information panes, click Data Sync and then click OK in the displayed alert box to complete updating the cable and route settings.

2)

Click Next. The Identical Router Information pane changes to the Fiber and Optical Cable Comparison Table pane.

3)

Select the optical cable in the Optical Cable Information list box according to the actual project and select the corresponding optical fiber information in the Fiber And Optical Cable Comparison Table list box. Click

to add the optical cable information to the corresponding optical

fiber information.

Note: Isolate the corresponding optical fiber and cable promptly via the Search Fib function at the bottom of the Fiber And Optical Cable Comparison list box. 4)

(Optional) Select the corresponding optical cable information in the Fiber And Optical Cable Comparison list box and click

to delete the

selected optical cable information.

6-40

Version: A


5.

Click Finish to save the information in the Optical Cable Router Setting dialog box and then click Yes in the displayed alert box.

Note: If the incorrect information exists in the Optical Cable Router Setting dialog box, the system will bring up the Configuration data is incorrect alert box. Users can modify according to the prompt message.

6.11

Setting the NE to the Not Started Status Set the NE status to "not started", so that users can easily identify it via the NE status LED.

Procedure 1.

In the Operational Tree, select Management Tool→Card Management→NE Not Provisioned.

2.

Select the desired NE in the Operational Tree pane, then click

to open the

NE Not Provisioned tab. 3.

Select the NE, right-click anywhere in the tab and select Set the Selected Nodes to Be Not Setup from the shortcut menu. The Set or not? column of the selected NE is No, as shown in Figure 6-18.

Figure 6-18

Version: A

The NE Not Provisioned Tab

6-41


Operation Result The status alarm indicator of the NE is

6.12

.

Backing Up DCG Files You can set the DCG file backup task to manually or automatically back up the DCG files of the OTNM2000. 1.

Select Configuration→Backup DCG File in the main menu or select Management Tool→Configuration Management→Backup DCG File in the Operational Tree pane to open the Backup DCG File dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-19.

Figure 6-19

2.

Set the backup task. 1)

6-42

The Backup DCG File Dialog Box

In the Backup DCG File dialog box, click Add to open the Add dialog box.

Version: A


2)

In the Add dialog box, enter the relevant information and click Run. The backup task is added to the Backup DCG File dialog box.

3)

(Optional) Select the corresponding task and click Modify to modify the selected task.

Version: A

6-43


4)

(Optional) Select the corresponding task and click Delete to delete the selected task.

5)

(Optional) Select the backup task that has executed backing up files, click Task Result Files to open the File Result List. Select the desired backup file, click Save As and select the saving directory. You can go to the specified directory to view the DCG file.

6)

(Optional) Select the corresponding task and click View Log to query the task logs.

6-44

Version: A

7

Service Configuration and Management u

The Business Configuration menu contains the configuration access method of service data, service / routing template management, global service settings, ASON resource management, displayed route and configuration options. This menu covers all functions related to service configuration, as shown in the following figure:

u

The Business Management menu includes querying of various service data, managing of broken services and storing of configuring data. as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

7-1


PTN/IPRAN POTN/PE-OTN SDH/MSTP Service Template Routing Template Service Global Settings 7-2

Version: A

7 Service Configuration and Management

ASON Resource Management Displaying Routes Options Querying Services Managing Broken Services Saving Configuration Data to the Database Reading Configuration Data from the Database Full Download

Version: A

7-3


7.1

PTN/IPRAN The following introduces the service configuration GUI and parameters of the PTN/ IPRAN device. The PTN/IPRAN configuration item contains multiple circuit configurations, service configurations and protection ring configurations, as shown in Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1

7.1.1

PTN / IPRAN Configuration Item

Tunnel The following introduces the Tunnel configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→Tunnel(T) in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Configuration GUI 1.

Set the basic attributes of the static / dynamic tunnel, including the name, type, direction, etc.

4

7-4

Configure the circuit basic properties. See Table 7-1.

Version: A


Version: A

4

Configure the bandwidth. See Table 7-2.

4

Apply the template.

7-5


Note: For description of the LSP template configuration, see Service Template. 2.

Set the source / sink nodes, source / sink ports of the static / dynamic tunnel and BFD. See Table 7-3.

7-6

Version: A


3.

Set the routing policy and intermediate route constraints of the static / dynamic tunnel. See Table 7-4.

Version: A

7-7


4.

7-8

Confirm the pre-created working circuit. See Table 7-5.

Version: A


5.

Confirm the pre-created protection circuit. See Table 7-6. Compared with the Precreate circuit pane, this pane contains an extra Revert Properties group box.

Version: A

7-9


6.

Configure the working path and protection path when the BFD or Proactive OAM is enabled. See Table 7-7.

Description of GUI Parameters u

7-10

Description of circuit basic properties.

Version: A


Table 7-1

Description of Circuit Basic Properties

Item Use VLAN Sub-interface

Description It is not selected by default. It should be checked when the VLAN sub-interface is to be used.

Path Name

Enters a name for the path according to the project data.

Signaling

Static / Dynamic u

Protection

u

When Signaling is set to Static, the options of this item are: u

No Protection

u

1:1 Trail Protection

u

1+1 Trail Protection

u

Dynamic LSP 1:1 Protection

u

SNCP 1+1 Protection

u

SNCP 1:1 Protection

When Signaling is set to Dynamic, the options of this item are:

Path

Tunnel

Grooming

EXP

EXP Value

u

Version: A

u

No Protection

u

Dynamic LSP 1:1 Protection

u

Auto LSP 1:1 Protection

Bidirectional / Unidirectional. u

Primary

u

Bypass

u

Secondary

u

Secondary auto

elsp: Sets the scheduling type. u

assign

u

mapping

The elsp supports setting the EXP priority. Value range: 0 - 15.

Description of bandwidth settings.

7-11


Table 7-2

Description of Bandwidth Settings

Item

Description

Bandwidth

u

Disable

u

Enable QoS in work path

u

Enable QoS in all paths

CIR (M)

Indicates Committed Information Rate.

PIR (M)

Indicates Peak Information Rate.

CBS

Indicates Committed Burst Size.

PBS

Indicates Peak Burst Size.

u

Description of static / dynamic tunnel settings (source/ sink node, source / sink port, and BFD).

Table 7-3

Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Source/ Sink Node, Source / Sink

Port, and BFD) Item

Description Source / Sink LSP

Source and Sink LSP

Source / Sink Port Source Add, Sink Drop

Preset Label

Selects the source / sink NE. Selects the source or sink Add / Drop ports. They are automatically selected when the source / sink LSP is selected.

Forward

Value range: 301 - 8191.

Reverse

Positive Label+1 The Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) protocol is a high-speed independent Hello protocol. When Enable BFD is selected, the devices

Enable BFD

at both ends periodically send detection message between them through the session channel to implement millisecond-level failure

Enable BFD

detection of the tunnel. BFD Name

Sets the name of the PW. The BFD uses the local session ID and

Local / Remote

the remote session ID to differentiate multiple BFD sessions of a same route pair.

7-12

Version: A


Table 7-3

Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Source/ Sink Node, Source / Sink

Port, and BFD) (Continued) Item

Description Enable Proactive OAM and Enable

Enable Proactive OAM

BFD are alternative. It is selected by default. When it is not Auto Allocate

Auto Allocate

u

selected, you can customize the positive tunnel ID and reverse tunnel ID.

Tunnel ID

Enters the ID of the positive tunnel.

Reverse

Enters the ID of the reverse tunnel.

Description of static / dynamic tunnel settings (routing policy and intermediate route constraints).

Table 7-4

Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Routing Policy and Intermediate

Route Constraints) Item

Description Enable CSPF

Strict Routing Routing Policy Settings

Static Policy

It is available only when Signaling is set to Dynamic. It is available only when Signaling is set to Dynamic. u

Min. NE Quality

u

Minimal Length

u

Lowest Cost

u

Load Balance

When this option is selected, you can Find Route by Manual

click the fiber connection in the main topology to select the specified path. Click

Routing Constraint

Use Route Template

Operation

Management window and select the route as needed.

Constrained to Positive

Constrained to Reserve

Version: A

to open the Routing Template

When Signaling is set to Static, the option is selected. This option is available only when Signaling is set to Dynamic.

7-13


Table 7-4

Description of Static / Dynamic Tunnel Settings (Routing Policy and Intermediate

Route Constraints) (Continued) Item

Description Configures the NE, Pass LAG Port,

Positive Routing Constraints

Ingress Port and Constraints of the positive path. Configures the NE, Pass LAG Port,

Reverse Routing Constraint

Ingress Port and Constraints of the reverse path. This option is unavailable for dynamic

Set SNCP Protection

u

tunnels.

Description of precreated circuit parameters.

Table 7-5

Description of Precreated Circuit Parameters

Item

Description

Precreate circuit

Lists the basic information of the pre-created circuit.

Route Info

Lists the details of the positive / reverse route.

Activate Immediately

This item is available only for the tunnel with the No Protection

after Creation

type.

Search Routing Template by Manual

It is selected by default.

Routing Advance Property

Click

Setting

configure the LSP priority and quick re-routing of the dynamic

to open the LSP Advanced Properties dialog box. Then

tunnel.

u

Description of revert properties.

Table 7-6

Description of Revert Properties

Item

Description Revert Type

Return / Non Revertive Indicates the time needed for the

Revert Properties WTR (m)

service to restore from the protection path to the working path.

7-14

Version: A


Table 7-6

Description of Revert Properties (Continued)

Item

Description This item is available only when the Revert Type is set to Return. Hold-off Time (10ms)

In case of working channel failure, the service will switch after the hold-off time.

u

Description of the working / protection path properties (when BFD or proactive OAM is enabled).

Table 7-7

Description of the Working / Protection Path Properties (when BFD or Proactive

OAM is enabled) Item

Description

FDI Frame Enable

Transfers the alarm indication signal.

APS Enable CV Frame Enable CV Frame Sending Period

7.1.2

Controls the protection switching action, improving the service reliability. Detects the connectivity of LSP. It is 3.33 ms by default.

PW The following introduces the PW configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Service Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→PW(P) in the OTNM2000 main menu.


Set the basic attributes, including dynamic / static PW name, type, Tunnel selection policy and BFD. Then select the source / sink node, ingress / egress label and next-hop. See Table 7-8.

Version: A

7-15


2.

Select the lower-level tunnel that carries the PW to complete the creation of PW. See Table 7-9 and Table 7-10.

7-16

Version: A


Note: For creating the PW template, see Service Template. Description of GUI Parameters u

Description of dynamic / static PW basic properties

Table 7-8

Description of Dynamic / Static PW Basic Properties.

Item

Description Selects this option when configuring multiple

Multiple PW

PWs. VC ID

The Auto Allocate is selected by default. Sets the name of the PW. When this item is

PW Basic

PW Name

Properties

Tunnel Name as the PW Name. User Label

Version: A

null, the system will take its associated Enters the user label according to your data planning.

7-17


Table 7-8

Description of Dynamic / Static PW Basic Properties. (Continued)

Item

Description

VC Type

Tunnel Policy

Signaling

u

Ethernet

u

vlantag

u

no lsp

u

tunnel

u

ldp lsp

u

policy

Static / Dynamic

PW Protection

Network Type

u

Primary

u

Secondary

u

Spoke

u

Mesh

Source

Indicates the source NE of the VC circuit.

Sink

Indicates the sink NE of the VC circuit.

Forward

The start value is 301.

Source / Sink

When the positive label is set, the reverse

Node Properties

label will be automatically modified. By

Reverse

default, the positive and reverse labels are the same.

Next Hop

Sets the IP address of the Next Hop.

BFD Settings

Enables the BFD or the OAM. Selects this option to constrain the PW to be

Carried on unidirectional LSP

u

Description of lower-level tunnel parameters.

Table 7-9

7-18

carried on the unidirectional LSP.

Description of Lower-level Tunnel Parameters

Item

Description

Tunnel Policy

Sets the positive / reverse tunnel according to your planning.

Select the Service Layer

In the Select the Service Layer (LSP) box, select the tunnel that

(LSP)

bears the PW.

Batch Creation Settings

Modify the Lot Size as needed.

Set Advanced

Click

to open the PW advanced property configuration pane.

Version: A


u

Description of PW advanced properties.

Table 7-10

Description of PW Advanced Properties

Item

Description u

Disable: Indicates not enabling the traffic bandwidth control.

u

trTCM: Indicates a regulatory mechanism that differentiates the service traffic. trTCM determines the transmission priority based on rate (PIR or CIR) and

Mode

color (green, yellow or red) by measuring the network traffic. u

Modified trTCM: Uses the improved Two Rate Three Color Marker defined in RFC4115 to conduct traffic control. This algorithm optimized the usage of bandwidth.

Dropping PolicerProfile

u

color-blind: Indicates dyeing the messages directly according to the algorithm.

QoS

u CM

Properties

color-aware: Indicates dyeing the messages with the darker color after comparing the color of the messages with the algorithm result. The colors of the messages from dark to light are red, yellow and green.

CIR

Indicates Committed Information Rate.

PIR

Indicates Peak Information Rate.

CBS

Indicates Committed Burst Size.

PBS

Indicates Peak Burst Size.

Policy PHB to TMC/TMP EXP Mapping

Assign EXP PHB2EXP_ID

Version: A

u

Assign EXP

u

PHB to TMC/TMP EXP Mapping

Value range: 0 - 7. When the policy is set to Assign EXP, specify the EXP value of the PW. When the policy is set to PHB to TMC/TMP EXP, specify the preset PHB2EXP table ID that the PW bases on.

7-19


Table 7-10

Description of PW Advanced Properties (Continued)

Item

Description

Policy

u

Select PHB

u

TMP EXP to PHB Mapping

TMP EXP to PHB

Select

When the policy is set to Select PHB, specify

Mapping

PHB

the PHB value of the PW.

EXP2PHB_ID

When the policy is set to TMP EXP to PHB, specify the preset EXP2PHB table ID that the PW bases on. The User QoS, Priority Queue and DS Template three configuration items are specially applied to the QoS settings of the PTN690 device or R8000 device.

Positive / Reverse QoS Policy

These three parameters must be configured first in the NE configuration of the corresponding device, and then configured in the subnet configuration by clicking Select to open the QoS policy template dialog box and select the desired template.

Template Application

7.1.3

Click

to select the PW template.

L2VPN Service The following details the L2VPN configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→L2VPN Service in the OTNM2000 main menu.


7-20

Set the L2VPN basic properties. See Table 7-11.

Version: A


2.

Set the node NE and port.

4

When the service type is set to E-LINE, configure the source / sink NEs and ports. See Table 7-12.

Version: A

7-21


4

When the service type is set to E-LAN or E-TREE, configure the source / sink NEs and ports. See Table 7-13.

7-22

Version: A


4

When the service type is set to E-CES, configure the source / sink NEs and ports. See Table 7-14.

Version: A

7-23


4

When the service type is set to E-Nto1, configure the node NE and port of the N:1 group service. See Table 7-15.

7-24

Version: A


3.

Select the PW circuit.

4

Version: A

Select the lower-level PW circuit that bears the E-LINE circuit.

7-25


4

Select the lower-level PW circuit that bears the E-LAN, E-TREE or ENto1circuit. a)

7-26

Set the routing topology properties of the E-LAN circuit.

Version: A


b)

Version: A

Set the PW constraints of the E-LAN, E-TREE or E-Nto1 circuit.

7-27


c)

Select the lower-level PW that bears the E-LAN, E-TREE or ENto1circuit.

7-28

Version: A


4

Version: A

Select the PW circuit that bears the CES service.

7-29


4.

7-30

Set the circuit virtual interface, UNI port and NNI port properties of the service.

Version: A


Description of GUI Parameters u Version: A

Description of L2VPN basic properties. 7-31


Table 7-11

Description of L2VPN Basic Properties

Item

Description

Service Name

Enters the name of the service.

Client Info

Enters the client information related to the service

Port Rate

Options are FE, GE, 40GE and XGE.

Service Type

Includes E-LINE, E-LAN, E-TREE, E-CES and E-Nto1.

Direction

Options are User to User and User to Network.

Protection

Options are No Protection and PW Redundancy+MC LAG.

u

The circuit source / sink configuration parameters of the E-LINE service are described in the following table.

Table 7-12

Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the E-LINE

Service Item

Description u

Selects the L2VPN source / sink NE.

u

Selects the L2VPN source / sink port.

Circuit Src and Dst Config

Caution: For the User to User service, you can select only one node and two UNI ports.

Constraints

u

Sets the routing constraints when selecting the PW. The source and sink NEs cannot be selected as the constrained NEs.

The circuit source / sink configuration parameters of the E-LAN or E-TREE service are described in the following table.

7-32

Version: A


Table 7-13

Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the E-LAN or E-

TREE Service Item

Description u

Clicks the Select an NE drop-down list to quickly add an NE and Port.

u

Click in the topology to select the NE.

Select the NE Remark 1Remark 2 .

Caution: For the User to User service, you can select only one node and two UNI ports. After selecting the NE, select the Set PW Filter option and set the Other Settings

routing constraints for the PW circuit that bears the E-TREE service.

Note 1: You can right-click the NE to delete the selected NE. Note 2: For the E-TREE service, the first NE is used as the root node by default.

u

The circuit source / sink configuration parameters of the CES service are described in the following table.

Table 7-14

Description of Circuit Source / Sink Configuration Parameters of the CES Service

Item

Description Bandwidth Type Source / Sink NE

Source and Sink Config Source / Sink Port Port Type

Constraints

u

Options are VC12 and VC4. Click the drop-down box to select the source or sink NE. Click the drop-down box to select the source or sink port. Options are PDH2M, STM1, STM4 and STM16. Indicates the routing constraints that filter the lower-level bearer PW circuit.

The node NE and port configuration parameters of the N:1 group service are described in the following table.

Version: A

7-33


Table 7-15

Description of Node NE / Port Configuration Parameters of the N:1 Group Service

Item

Description u

Select the NE Remark 1Remark 2 .

and Port. u

Other Settings

Clicks the Select an NE drop-down list to quickly add an NE

Click in the topology to select the NE.

After selecting the NE, select the Set PW Filter option and set the routing constraints for the PW circuit that bears the E-Nto1 service.

Note 1: For the E-Nto1 service with no protection, the first NE is the root node by default. Note 2: For the E-Nto1 service with protection, the first two nodes are the active / standby nodes by default.

7.1.4

L3VPN Service The following details the L3VPN Service configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→L3VPN Service in the OTNM2000 main menu.


7-34

Set the Basic Properties and PE Member. See Table 7-16.

Version: A


2.

Set the network topology of the L3 VPN and the selection policy for the tunnel that bears the VPN.

Version: A

7-35


3.

Select the tunnel that bears the L3 VPN and the VPN FRR settings.


The RD/RT, PE Member and Interface List Information parameters of the L3 VPN are described in the following table.

7-36

Version: A


Table 7-16

Description of the RD/RT, PE Member and Interface List Information Parameters

of the L3 VPN Item

Description Service Name Signaling Type

RD/RT Format Basic Properties RD Value

Sets it according to the data planning. u

Static

u

Dynamic

u

AS: Number

u

IP: Number

Sets it according to the data planning. Value range: 301 - 8192.

Egress Label

u

Specifies the value for static service.

u

For dynamic service, it is unconfigurable and the system automatically generates the data.

Select the PE,

NE

Indicates the IP-type NE.

Interface and

Port

Sets it according to the data planning.

Ingress RT Value

It is the same as the RD value by default.

Ingress / Egress RT

7.1.5

ATM Service The following details the ATM Service configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→ATM Service in the OTNM2000 main menu.


Version: A

Select the ATM source and sink ports.

7-37


2.

7-38

Select the PW associated with the ATM service.

Version: A


3.

Version: A

For the ATM service cross-connect configuration, see Table 7-17.

7-39



The ATM service cross-connect settings are described in the following table.

Table 7-17

Description of the ATM Service Cross-connect Settings

Item

Description

Link Enable

Enable / Disable.

Link Mode

Number of Encapsulated Signaling Cells

7.1.6

u

VCC1:1

u

VPC1:1

u

N:1

u

AAL5

Value range: 1 - 20.

Group Service The following details the Group Service configuration GUI and related parameters.

7-40

Version: A


Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→Group Service in the OTNM2000 main menu.


7.1.7

Configure the combination service bridging the L2VPN and the L3 VPN.

Protection Ring The following introduces the Protection Ring configuration GUI and related parameters.

Version: A

7-41


Configuration Access Method Click Service Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→Ring protection in the OTNM2000 main menu.


7-42

Configure basic properties of the protection ring. See Table 7-18.

Version: A


Caution: When the ring type is set to Ring_Wrapping_V1, Ring_Wrapping_V2 or Ring_Sterring, check Cross-EMS. The hidden Cross-EMS Properties combo box appears under the Basic Properties, as shown in the figure below:

2.

Create the protection ring.

4

Check Cross-EMS in Basic Properties, and then configure start NE, source protection port, sink NE and sink protection port of the cross-EMS ring.

Version: A

7-43


4

If Cross-EMS is not selected in Basic Properties, configure the start NE and start link of the protection ring.


7-44

The basic properties of the protection ring are described in the following table.

Version: A


Table 7-18

Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties

Item

Description

u

Unidirectional 1+1 Trail

u

Unidirectional 1:1 Trail

u

Ring_Wrapping_V1

u

Ring_Wrapping_V2

u

Ring_Wrapping_V3

u

Ring_Sterring

u

MSRPRing

u

Bidirectional 1+1 Trail

u

Bidirectional 1:1 Trail

u

Bidirectional 1+1 Link (Laser-shutdown Deactivated)

u

Bidirectional 1:1 Link (Laser-shutdown Deactivated)

u

Unidirectional 1+1 Dual Homing

u

Unidirectional 1:1 Dual Homing

u

Bidirectional 1+1 Dual Homing

u

Bidirectional 1:1 Dual Homing

u

DNI PW Protect

u

Bypass Dual-homing Protection Group

Ring Type

Ring Name


User Label


Revert Type

Return / Non Revertive

WTR (m)

Indicates the time needed for the service to restore from the protection path to the working path. This item is available only when the Revert Type is set to Return.

Hold-off Time (10ms)


APS Enable

Version: A

Enable / Disable.

7-45


7.1.8

VRRP Configuration The VRRP indicates the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. In normal status, the active router undertakes the forwarding task while the standby routers are in monitoring status. Once the active route fails to work, one of the standby routers in the virtual router will be selected as the new active router according to the priority. This new active router continues to forward data for the network host.

Configuration Access Method Click Service Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→IPRAN VRRP Config in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Configuration GUI For setting the VRRP parameters, see Table 7-19.

7-46

Version: A


Description of GUI Parameters The VRRP configuration parameters are described in the following table. Table 7-19

Description of VRRP configuration Parameters

Item

Description Sets it according to the data planning. Virtual Router ID

The virtual router IDs within an NE must be unique.

Virtual IP

Indicates the IP address of the virtual

Address

router.

VRRP

Indicates the time interval for sending

Announcement

VRRP messages.

Interval (s)

Value range: 1 - 255. Indicates the time interval for sending

Free ARP Send

free ARP. This function promptly notifies

Interval (m)

the uplink device to update the ARP table or MAC address table. Sets the time period delayed for

Delay Preemption Time IPRAN VRRP

Basic

Config

Properties

(s)

preemption. If no VRRP messages are received after the default waiting time and the delayed preemption time, the standby router will switch to the active router and send VRRP messages. Indicates the lowered priority level of the

Priority

active router when the primary

Reduction

monitoring port of the active router is unavailable.

Enable BFD

Sets whether to enable the BFD to detect VRRP failures. Options are VRRP Non Preemption Mode and VRRP Preemption Mode. In VRRP preemption mode, if the

VRRP Mode

priority of the standby router is higher than that of the active router, the standby router will actively upgrade to be the active router.

VRRP Session Enabling / Disabling

Version: A

Sets whether to enable the current VRRP session.

7-47


Table 7-19

Description of VRRP configuration Parameters (Continued)

Item

Description Active / Standby Track ID Active / Standby VRRP Router Active /

Batch Rule Settings

7.1.9

Standby

Active / Standby

Router

VRRP Port

It is consistent with VRRP TrackID in TRACK_BFD Config of the router NE configuration. Selects the active / standby router. Selects the port applicable to the virtual IP address of the active / standby router.

Active / Standby

Sets it to the uplink port of the active /

Monitor Port

standby router.

Signaling

Sets the port for the active / standby

Declaration Port

VRRP router to send VRRP messages.

Number of Items to Batch-add Virtual IP Address Step

Value range: 1 - 255. Sets the virtual IP address step to be added in batch configuration.

Creating Tunnels Quickly The following introduces the Quickly Create Tunnel configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→Quickly Create Tunnel in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Configuration GUI For description of the parameters on the Quickly Create Tunnel window, see Description of GUI Parameters in Tunnel.

7-48

Version: A


7.1.10

Quickly Create Ethernet Service The following introduces the Quickly Create Ethernet Service configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→PTN/IPRAN→Quickly Create Ethernet Service in the OTNM2000 main menu.


Configure the Ethernet service and PW. For the description of the parameters, see Description of GUI Parameters in L2VPN Service and PW.

Version: A

7-49


7-50

Version: A


7.2

POTN/PE-OTN The following introduces the POTN/PE-OTN configuration item in the Service Configuration tab. The POTN/PE-OTN configuration item contains multiple channel configurations, protection ring configurations and service configurations, as shown in Figure 7-2.

Version: A

7-51


Figure 7-2

7.2.1

POTN/PE-OTN Configuration Item

Optical Channel Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN→Optical Channel to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-3.

7-52

Version: A


Figure 7-3

OCh Channel Configuration GUI

Multi-Service Configuration Auto Create All OCH Circuit: This button can be used to automatically generate the OCh circuits of the entire network, without the need of manual configuration.

Circuit Properties Circuit Code: Configures the circuit numbering assigned when configuring the OCh channel. Circuit Name: Sets a name for the Och channel.

Version: A

7-53


Connection Type: u

PC: Indicates permanent connection. It refers to the service connection established by the OTNM200 issuing command to the NE. For the system with no control plane, it is recommended to select PC.

u

SPC: Indicates Soft Permanent Connection, which refers to the service connection between permanent connections and switching connection. The user-to-transmission-network configuration is directly completed by the OTNM2000, while the connections within the transmission network are completed first by the OTNM2000 sending requests to the NE control plane and then configured by the NE control via signaling. The intelligent services usually refer to the SPC. For the system with control plane, it is recommended to select SPC.

Path Direction: u

Bidirectional: Sets it to bidirectional optical channel.

u

Unidirectional: Set it to unidirectional optical channel.

u

Broadcast: Sets it to broadcast optical channel.

Port Type (2.5G, 10G, 40G and 100G): Selects the corresponding rate according to the card port. If the port selected is inappropriate, the desired card and port cannot be found in the configuration GUI of next step. Protection Type (No Protection, SNCP OCh 1+1, SNCP OCh m:n and Card 1+1 Protection): Select the desired protection type. After the protection is selected, the Protection Parameters are available.

Protection Parameters Protection Mode: u

Unidirectional Protection: In case of failures of the working channel, the receiving end of the local NE will switch to the interface card of the protection line, with no operation performed to the far end NE.

u

Bidirectional Protection: In case of failures of the working channel, both the receiving ends of the local NE and the far end NE will switch to the interface card of the protection line.

7-54

Version: A


Return Type: u

Return: In case failures of working channel, the service will switch to the protection channel. Once the working channel restores, the service will automatically switch back to the working channel after the time period specified in WTR Time.

u

Non Revertive: In case failures of working channel, the service will switch to the protection channel and will still runn in the protection channel even if the working channel restores.

Hold-off Timing: In case of working channel failure, the service will conduct switching after the hold-off time. WTR Time: Indicates the waiting time for the service to switch from protection channel to the working channel once the working channels restore from the failure. Alarm Monitor Type: Sets the monitoring type that triggers switching. u

Unconfigured: Indicates not configuring any monitoring types.

u

SNCP/I: Indicates the inherent monitoring. The triggering conditions include the OCh layer alarms, such as card disabling, optical signaling loss, and the SM section overhead alarm.

u

SNCP/N: Indicates the non-intrusive monitoring. The triggering conditions include the OCh layer alarms, such as card disabling, optical signaling loss, and the overhead alarms of the SM, TCM and PM sections.

u

SNCP/S: Indicates the sub-layer monitoring. The triggering conditions include the OCh layer alarms, such as card disabling, optical signaling loss, and the overhead alarms of the SM and TCM sections.

u

OCh: The triggering conditions include the OCh layer alarms, such as card disabling, optical signaling loss, and the overhead alarms of the SM and PM sections.

User Properties Client Name: Sets the username for the channel, which provides convenience for maintenance. User Label: Sets the user label for the channel, which provides convenience for maintenance. Version: A

7-55


ASON Advanced Settings When Connection Type under Circuit Properties is set to SPC, the ASON Advanced Settings button appears. Click this button to open the ASON Advanced Settings window, as shown in Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5. Before setting the ASON advanced parameters, select or deselect the Strict Routing as needed.

Figure 7-4

7-56

Selecting SPC

Version: A


Figure 7-5

The ASON Advanced Settings Window

Protection Type: u

No Protection: Indicates no protection is to be configured. When no protection is selected here, Return Type can only be set to No Recovery.

u

1+1 Trail Protection: ASON calculates the active and standby routes from the source end to the sink end for the service. When this protection is selected, Return Type can be set to No Recovery, Re-routing Restoration or Permanent 1+1.

u

Dynamic Re-routing: When the route that the service uses fails, ASON will dynamically find other available route. When this protection is selected, Return Type can be only set to Re-routing Restoration.

Return Type: Selects different return types according to the Protection Type. Routing Policy: Indicates the policy adopted by the service for first routing. Options are Min NE Quantity, Min Link Cost and Load Balance. Re-routing Policy: Indicates the policy adopted for re-routing when the current route fails. Options are Min NE Quantity, Min Link Cost and Load Balance.

Version: A

7-57


Node Unrelated / Link Unrelated / SRLG: When Protection Type is set to 1+1 Trail Protection, you can set the irrelevance of the active / standby route. u

Node Unrelated: The active and standby routes have no coincident intermediate nodes. The routing module will eliminate the resources of the intermediate node on the active route and then calculate the standby route.

u

Link Unrelated: The active and standby routes have no coincident links. The calculation method is same as "Node Unrelated".

u

SRLG: The active and standby nodes are in the same shared-risk link group. The calculation method is the opposite to "Node Unrelated".

CrankBack: When the control plane performs routing according to the routing policy, it will feed back the prompt information upon node failure or insufficient resource and perform re-routing until no resources are available. Prevent Mis-deletion: In project application, once the channel is deleted by mistake due to the signaling network, the system will lock the resources of the channel to prevent deletion of the services by mistake. Make before break: In case that a route passes multiple nodes and one of its SPC channels fails and is disconnected, the rest SPC channels will be released and used promptly. Revert Delay: When the revert delay is configured, the system will start the protection switching of the corresponding layer after the delay set here once the protection switching trigger condition is deleted. Reserve Priority: Indicates the priority level for obtaining the resources. Value range: 0 - 7. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level is. Setup Priority: Indicates the priority level for keeping resources. Value range: 0 - 7. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level is. Recovery Priority: Indicates the priority for the service to restore when passing the same failed link. Value range: 0 - 255. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level is. M: N Priority: Indicates the M:N priority. M:N ID: Indicates the M: N ID. 7-58

Version: A


Opto-electrical Protection Hold-off Time: Indicates the hold-off time for the protection and restoration of the optical and electrical layers.

7.2.2

ODUk Channel Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN→ODUk Channel to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6

ODUk Channel Configuration GUI

Auto Create: In case the circuits of the same ODUk level use the same OCh port, you can select Auto Create to create ODUk channels in a batch manner. As Server Layer of LSP: Batch Configuration, not support rollback to modify: Low Order Cross: Single NECross:

Version: A

7-59


Circuit Properties ODUk Level: Sets the service type used by the port of the source / sink NE line interface card. Circuit Code: Sets the circuit numbering assigned when configuring the ODUk channel. Circuit Name: Sets a name for the ODUk channel. Path Direction: u

Bidirectional: Sets it to ODUk bidirectional optical channel.

u

Unidirectional: Sets it to ODUk unidirectional channel.

u

Loopback: Sets it to ODUk loopback optical channel.

Link Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

Protection Info Protection Type (No Protection, SNCP ODUk 1+1, SNCP ODUk m:n and ETH Protect over ODUk): Selects the desired protection type. After the protection is selected, other parameters under Protection Info are available. Protection Mode: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Revert Type: See the description of Revert Type in Optical Channel. Hold-off Time: See the description of Hold-off Time in Optical Channel. WTR Time: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Monitor: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

User Properties Client Name: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. User Label: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

7-60

Version: A


ASON Advanced Settings See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

7.2.3

Client Service Channel Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN→Client service channel to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7

Client Service Channel Configuration GUI

Circuit Properties Low Order Cross: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel. Single NECross: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel. Batch Configuration, not support rollback to modify: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel. Service Type (GE, GE_GFP_T, FE, ESCON, FICON, DVB, HDTV(1485M), EPON, GPON or HD_SDI): Selects the service type of client-side port of the source NE tributary interface card.

Version: A

7-61


Circuit Code: Sets the circuit numbering assigned when configuring the client service channel. Circuit Name: Sets a name for the client service channel. Path Direction: u

Bidirectional: Sets it to client service bidirectional optical channel.

u

Unidirectional: Sets it to client service unidirectional channel.

u

Broadcast: Sets it to broadcast optical channel.

u

Loopback: Sets it to client service loopback optical channel.

Connection Type: u

PC: Indicates the permanent connection. It refers to the service connection established by the OTNM200 issuing command to the NE. For the system with no control plane, it is recommended to select PC.

u

SPC: Indicates Soft Permanent Connection, which refers to the service connection between permanent connections and switching connection. The user-to-transmission-network configuration is directly completed by the OTNM2000, while the connections within the transmission network are completed first by the OTNM2000 sending requests to the NE control plane and then configured by the NE control via signaling. The intelligent services usually refer to the SPC. For the system with control plane, it is recommended to select SPC.

u

SC: Indicates the switched connection. The service connection established in the control plane via the signaling by the terminal end user (such as router) initiating a calling to the ASON control plane.

Protection Type (No Protection, Extra Service, Tributary 1+1 Protection, Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection and 1+1 Protection In Card): Select the protection type according to your actual situation.

User Properties Client Name: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. User Label: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

7-62

Version: A


7.2.4

ODUk Protection Group Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN→ODUk protection group to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8

ODUk Ring Protection Configuration GUI

Basic Information ODUk Level: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel. Protection Group Name: Sets a name for the ODUk protection group.

Protection Info Protection Type (SNCP ODUk 1+1, SNCP ODUk m:n): Selects the desired protection type. Protection Mode: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Revert Type: See the description of Revert Type in Optical Channel. Hold-off Time: See the description of Hold-off Time in Optical Channel. WTR Time: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Version: A

7-63


Monitor Info: See the description of Monitor Info in Optical Channel.

7.2.5

OCh Ring Protection Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN→OCh ring protection to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9

OCh Ring Protection Configuration GUI

Cross-EMS Ring: Sets whether it is a cross-EMS ring. Client Name: Sets the client name for the ring, which provides convenience for maintenance. Ring Name: Sets the name of the protection ring. Ring Type: Set the type of the protection ring to OTN OCH Ring. Port Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

Protection Parameters Return Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

7-64

Version: A


Hold-off Timing: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. WTR Time: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Alarm Monitor Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

7.2.6

ODUk Ring Protection Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN→ODUk ring protection to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10

ODUk Ring Protection Configuration GUI

Cross-EMS Ring: Sets whether it is a cross-EMS ring. User Label: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. ODUk Level: See the related configuration in ODUk Channel.

Protection Parameters Return Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Hold-off Timing: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Version: A

7-65


WTR Time: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Alarm Monitor Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel.

7.2.7

Tunnel For the description of the Tunnel configuration GUI and related parameters, see Tunnel in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN(T)→Tunnel(T) in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7.2.8

PW For the description of the PW configuration GUI and related parameters, see PW in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN(T)→PW(W) in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7.2.9

L2VPN Service For the description of the L2VPN configuration GUI and related parameters, see L2VPN Service in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN(T)→L2VPN(L) in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7-66

Version: A


7.2.10

L3VPN Service For the description of the L3VPN configuration GUI and related parameters, see L3VPN Service in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN(T)→L3VPN(N) in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7.2.11

Group Service For the description of the Group Service configuration GUI and related parameters, see Group Service in the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN(T)→Group Service in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7.2.12

Ring Protection The Ring Protection window under POTN/PE-OTN has the extra ERPS protection ring configuration item, compared with the Protection Ring under PTN/ IPRAN. The ERPS indicates Ethernet Ring Protection Switching, which is ring network protection protocol developed by International Telecommunication Union (ITU), also called G.8032. It is a link layer protocol, specially applied to the Ethernet ring network. This protocol can prevent broadcast storm caused by data loopback when the Ethernet ring network is complete and quickly restores the communication among nodes on the ring network when the previous link is disconnected. For the description of the Ring Protection configuration GUI and related parameters, see Protection Ring under the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN(T)→Ring Protection in the OTNM2000 main menu. Version: A

7-67


7.2.13

IPRAN VRRP Config For the description of the IPRAN VERRP Config configuration GUI and related parameters, see VRRP Configuration under the PTN/IPRAN configuration item.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→POTN/PE-OTN(T)→IPRAN VRRP Config (V) in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7.3

SDH/MSTP The following introduces the service configuration GUI and parameters of the SDH / MSTP device.

7.3.1

Circuit The following introduces the Circuit configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→SDH/MSTP (D)→Circuit in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7-68

Version: A



Set the basic properties of the circuit, including the connection type, direction, bandwidth and protection type. For detailed configuration of the parameters, see Table 7-20 and Table 7-21. u

When the connection type is set to PC or MIX, the configuration GUI is as shown below:

Version: A

7-69


u

When the connection type is set to SPC, the configuration GUI is as shown below:

7-70

Version: A


2.

Version: A

Set the source / sink NEs and source /sink ports of the circuit working path.

7-71


3.

Set the routing constraints to perform routing for the working path.

4.

Display the information of the working route. You can manually modify part of all routes of the working path.


7-72

The circuit basic properties are described in the following table.

Version: A


Table 7-20

Description of Path Basic Attributes

Item

Description u

PC: Indicates the permanent connection. The connection is established by sending the corresponding configuration command to each NE that the connection path passes. The configuration command is sent manually or by the OTNM2000 without the control plane involved.

u

SPC: Indicates the soft permanent connection. The permanent connection at the edge of the network is

Connection Type:

configured by the OTNM2000. The switching Basic

connection is implemented by the control plane

Properties

between the permanent connections at the edge of the network so as to implement the global end-to-end connection. u

MIX: Indicates the lower order service that crosses the MSTP network and ASON network or established between intelligent NEs.

Path Direction Circuit Type

Options are STM, PDM2M, PDM34/45M, PDM140M, ETH and V35.

Bandwidth Type

Options are VC12, VC4 and VC3.

Cascade Type

Options are No Concatenation and Real Concatenation.

Concatena-

This field is available only when Cascade Type is set to

tion Parameters

Options are Bidirectional, Unidirectional and broadcast.

Concatenation

Real Concatenation. Concatenation levels include: VC4_4, VC4_16 and VC4_ 64.

Circuit Info

Client Name

Sets it according to the actual situation.

Path Name


Path Code


Protection Protection Parameters

No Protection

u

Tunnel Protected

u

Extra Service

Revert Type

-

Revert Type

Options are Non Revertive and Return.

WTR Time

Version: A

u

Indicates the time needed for the service to restore from the protection path to the working path.

7-73


Table 7-20

Description of Path Basic Attributes (Continued)

Item

Description Hold-off Time

u

7-74


ASON Advanced Settings

Version: A


Table 7-21

Description of ASON Advanced Parameters

Item

Description Protection Type Return Type

ASON Parameter

Options are No Protection, 1+1 Trail Protection and Dynamic Re-routing. Options are Non Revertive and Return. Indicates the policy adopted by the service for first routing.

Routing Policy

Settings

Options are Min NE Quantity, Min Link Cost and Load Balance. Indicates the policy adopted for re-routing when the

Re-routing Policy

current route fails. Options are Min NE Quantity, Min Link Cost and Load Balance.

Version: A

7-75


Table 7-21

Description of ASON Advanced Parameters (Continued)

Item

Description Node Unrelated / Link Unrelated / SRLG: When Protection Type is set to 1+1 Trail Protection, you can set the irrelevance of the active / standby route. u

Node Unrelated: The active and standby routes have no coincident intermediate nodes. The routing module will eliminate the resources of the intermediate node on the active route and then calculate the standby route.

u

Link Unrelated: The active and standby routes have no coincident links. The calculation method is same as Node Unrelated.

u

SRLG: The active and standby nodes are in the same shared-risk link group. The calculation method is the opposite to Node Unrelated.

CrankBack: When the control plane performs routing according to the routing policy, it will feed back the prompt information upon node failure or insufficient resource and perform re-routing until no resources are available. Prevent Mis-deletion: In project application, once the channel is deleted by mistake due to the signaling network, the system will lock the resources of the channel Other Parameters

to prevent deletion of the services by mistake. Make before break: In case that a route passes multiple nodes and one of its SPC channels fails and is disconnected, the rest SPC channels will be released and used promptly. Revert Delay: When the revert delay is configured, the system will start the protection switching of the corresponding layer after the delay set here once the protection switching trigger condition is deleted. Reserve Priority: Indicates the priority level for obtaining the resources. Value range: 0 - 7. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level is. Setup Priority: Indicates the priority level for keeping resources. Value range: 0 - 7. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level is. Recovery Priority: Indicates the priority for the service to restore when passing the same failed link. Value range: 0 255. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority level is.

7-76

M: N Priority: Indicates the M:N priority.

Version: A

M:N ID: Indicates the M: N ID. Opto-electrical Protection Hold-off Time: Indicates the hold-off time for the protection and restoration of the optical and electrical layers.


7.3.2

VCG Channel The following introduces the VCG Channel configuration GUI and related parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→SDH/MSTP (D)→VCG Channel in the OTNM2000 main menu.


Set or modify the source / sink NEs and source / sink ports of the VCG circuit. For details, see Table 7-22.

Version: A

7-77


2.

Set or modify the lower-level service circuit of the VCG circuit and then complete the creation.


The source / sink NEs and ports of the VCG circuit are described in the following table.

Table 7-22

Description of the Source / Sink NEs Ports of the VCG Circuit

Item

Description Source

Cross-EMS Sink

7.3.3

When Source is selected, the Source Port parameter is unavailable. When Sink is selected, the Sink Port parameter is unavailable.

Source / Sink NE

Selects the source / sink NE of the VCG circuit.

Source / Sink Port

Selects the source / sink port of the VCG circuit.

Port Type

Options are ALL, FE, GE and XGE.

Path Name


Protection Ring The following introduces the Protection Ring configuration GUI and related parameters for the SDH / MSTP device.

Configuration Access Method Click Service Configuration→SDH/MSTP(D)→Protection Ring in the OTNM2000 main menu.


Set the basic properties, such as ring type and return mode. For details, see Table 7-23.

7-78

Version: A


2.

Specify the start node and link of the ring for routing and then complete the ring creation.

Version: A

7-79



The basic properties of the SDH / MSTP protection ring are described in the following table.

Table 7-23

Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties

Item

7-80

Description

Basic Ring

Cross-EMS

When this option is selected, the Cross-EMS Properties

Properties

Ring

group box is available.

Version: A


Table 7-23

Description of the Protection Ring Basic Properties (Continued)

Item

Description

Protection Ring

Protection Ring WTR Time

SDH LP Protection Ring

u

SDH HP Protection Ring

u

SDH 2F MS SPRING

u

SDH 4F MS SPRING-Working

u

SDH 4F MS SPRING-Protection

u

SDH LINK 1+1 Ring

u

SDH Bidirectional Link 1+1 Ring

u

SDH Link 1:1 Ring

u

SDH Bidirectional Link 1:1 Ring

Sets it according to the data planning. Indicates the time needed for the service to restore from the protection path to the working path.

Revert Type

Return / Non Revertive

Maximum

Sets the maximum number of nodes for the cross-EMS

Cross-EMS

Node

ring.

Properties

Start Node Number

7.4

u

Sets the start node number for the cross-EMS ring.

Service Template The service templates include the LSP template, PW template, L2VPN template, flow template, proactive OAM template and on-demand OAM template. In the Template Management window, you can create, modify, delete and copy templates as well as set a template as the default one.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→Service Template in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Configuration GUI u

Version: A

The Service Template Management Main GUI

7-81


7-82

u

The Creating LSP Template GUI

u

The Creating PW Template GUI

Version: A


Version: A

u

The Creating L2 Service Template GUI

u

The Creating Flow Template GUI

7-83


7-84

u

The Creating Proactive OAM Template GUI

u

The Creating On-demand OAM Template GUI

Version: A


Description of GUI Parameters For the description of the service template parameters, see the description of the parameters on the configuration GUIs of the services under PTN/IPRAN.

7.5

Routing Template The OTNM2000 supports unified management of tunnel circuits that has generated routing templates and allows you to Copy, Modify and Delete routing templates.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→Routing Template in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Configuration GUI The routing template management GUI is as shown in the following figure. You can filter the desired template by setting the parameters under Filter.

Version: A

7-85


7.6

Service Global Settings The following introduces the GUIs and parameters related to the service global settings.

7.6.1

PTN NE Global Settings The following introduces the "PTN NE Global Settings" configuration GUI and parameters.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→PTN NE Global Settings. 7-86

Version: A


Configuration GUI u

The "PTN NE Global Settings" main GUI is as shown in the following figure. For the configuration of the global variable parameters, see Table 7-24.

Version: A

u

The BoardProtect configuration GUI.

u

The SlotType configuration GUI

7-87


Description of GUI Parameters The global variable parameters are described in the following table. Table 7-24

Description of the PTN Global Variable Parameters

Item APSReturnTime

Indicates the restoration time of the APS protection. The value range is 0 to 12 minutes.

MaskCode

Mask: 0 - 16.

Port Type

Options are NNI and UNI.

Board Group, Protect Type, Protect Slot and Protected Slot

7.6.2

Description

Configures the BoardProtect parameters according to the type of the configured card and the card protection type supported by the card.

Enabling the Global Section Layer OAM The OTNM2000 supports configuring the global section layer OAM. The available TMPLS Section (TMS) provides the section layer function and the OAM monitoring between two neighboring T-MPLS nodes.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→Global VS OAM Enable in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Configuration GUI Select the entries in the list to enable the global section layer OAM, as shown in the figure below: 7-88

Version: A


7.6.3

Enabling the Global Section Layer LM Frame The OTNM2000 supports configuring the global section layer LM frame. The LM frame is used for measuring the lost fames of the MEP to determine the time when the MEP is unavailable. It is implemented by sending the frame with the ETH-LM information to the peer MEP and receives the frame with the ETH-LM info from the peer MEP.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→Global LM Frame Enable in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Configuration GUI Select the entries in the list to enable the global section layer LM, as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

7-89


7.6.4

Merging OTN NEs In case that there are multiple NEs in a station and cross-shelf fiber connections exists between NEs, you need to merge multiple physical NEs into a logical NE for convenient management of them via the OTNM2000. Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→Merge OTN NEs in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-12.

7-90

Version: A


Figure 7-11

Version: A

Selecting the OTN NE to Merge

7-91


Figure 7-12

u

The NE Merge Configuration GUI

Merge the NEs: In the Merge OTN NEs configuration window, select the NEs to be merged in the left pane, click Combine and click Yes in the displayed alert box to merge the NEs, as shown in Figure 7-13, Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15.

7-92

Version: A


Version: A

Figure 7-13

Merging NEs - Selecting the NE

Figure 7-14

Merging NEs - Confirming the Configuration

7-93


Figure 7-15

u

Merging NEs - Completing the Configuration

Insert the NEs: After the NEs are merged, if there are still NEs to be merged into the logic NE, you can use Insert to merge the NEs. Select the NEs to be inserted and the desired logic NE, click Insert and then click Yes in the displayed alert box to complete the insertion, as shown in Figure 7-16, Figure 7-17 and Figure 7-18.

7-94

Version: A


Version: A

Figure 7-16

Inserting the NE - Selecting the NE

Figure 7-17

Inserting the NE - Confirming the Configuration

7-95


Figure 7-18

u

Inserting the NE - Completing the Configuration

Split the NEs: To undo the NE merge, click Split. Select the physical NE to be separated from the logical NE, click Split and then click Yes in the displayed alert box to complete the splitting, as shown in Figure 7-19, Figure 7-20 and Figure 7-21.

7-96

Version: A


Version: A

Figure 7-19

Splitting the NE - Selecting the Configuration

Figure 7-20

Splitting the NE - Confirming the Configuration

7-97


Figure 7-21

u

Splitting the NE - Completing the Configuration

Search for NEs: In a complex network with many NEs, it is not easy to locate the desired NE. In this situation, you can Search NE by NE name or NE No. to locate your desired NE. Click the Select an NE drop-down list. The Search NE window appears, as shown in Figure 7-22.

7-98

Version: A


Figure 7-22

7.6.5

The NE Search GUI

Setting the OTN Channel Wavelength Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→OTN wavelength setup in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-23 and Figure 7-24.

Version: A

7-99


7-100

Figure 7-23

Accessing the OTN Channel Wavelength Window

Figure 7-24

The OTN Channel Wavelength Window

Version: A


Selecting the NE Single NE: Configures one NE. Multiple NE: Configures multiple NEs. NE (Select an NE): Selects the desired NE. For detailed configuration method, see Search NE in Merging OTN NEs.

Parameter Configuration Wave Band: Sets the waveband of the port. You can select the CE, CO, CE+ or CO + waveband. Wavelength: Sets the wavelength of the port. You need to set the waveband before setting the wavelength. Interval: It is available for batch configuration. After the interval is set, the wavelengths of the ports increase in arithmetic progression. Synchronize Wavelength: Reads the wavelength status from the device and update the configuration when this item is selected. Get Status: Reads waveband and wavelength information of the port from the device card. It is available only when the Synchronize Wavelength option is selected. Refresh: Updates the configuration to ensure the configuration is consistent with that on the device in case the configurations are inconsistent. It is available only when the Synchronize Wavelength option is selected. Download: Downloads the service properties configured to the device. Apply: Applies the configuration data. OK: Saves the configuration. Cancel: Cancels the configuration.

Version: A

7-101


7.6.6

Setting the OTN NE Optical Link Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→OTN NE Optical Link in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-25 and Figure 7-26.

7-102

Figure 7-25

Accessing the OTN NE Optical Link Window

Figure 7-26

The OTN NE Optical Link Window

Version: A


Selecting the NE NE (Select an NE): Select the desired NE. For detailed configuration method, see Search NE in Merging OTN NEs.

Fiber Connection Parameter Settings Source Slot: Indicates the card of the transmitting end of the fiber connection. Source Port: Indicates the port of the transmitting end of the fiber connection. Sink Slot: Indicates the card of the receiving end of the fiber connection. Sink Port: Indicates the port of the receiving end of the fiber connection. Cost: Commonly indicates the attenuation of the fiber connection for calculating the route. Enters the actual attenuation or select the default value. DCM (km): Indicates the dispersion compensation distance of the DCM module in the physical configuration. Automatic Fiber Connection: Switches between the automatic fiber connection and manual fiber connection. Apply: Applies the configuration data. OK: Saves the configuration. Cancel: Cancels the configuration.

7.6.7

Setting the OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-27 and Figure 7-28.

Version: A

7-103


7-104

Figure 7-27

Accessing the OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Window

Figure 7-28

The OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead Window Version: A



OTN OTUk/ODUk Overhead OTUK Config: Selects this item to configure the OTUk relevant parameters. ODUk Config: Selects this item to configure the ODUk relevant parameters. Level: Selects the layer of the configuration overhead. Configuration Type: Selects the type of the configuration overhead. OK: Saves the configuration. Cancel: Cancels the configuration.

7.6.8

Setting the OTN WSS Group Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→OTN WSS group in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-29 and Figure 7-30.

Version: A

7-105


7-106

Figure 7-29

Accessing the OTN WSS Group Window

Figure 7-30

The OTN WSS Group Window Version: A



Parameter Configuration Name: Sets a name for the OTN WSS group. Remote Node: Set the remote node for the protection group. OSC Direction: Sets the OSC direction to eastward or westward. OSC Slot (Card): Sets the slot for the OSC card. WSSD Slot (Card): Sets the slot for the WSSD card. WSSM Slot (Card): Sets the slot for the WSSM card. Remark: Enters the remark information for the protection group. Apply: Applies the configuration data. OK: Saves the configuration. Cancel: Cancels the configuration.

7.6.9

Setting the OTN OPM Wavelength Monitor Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→OTN OPM Wavelength Monitor in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-31 and Figure 7-32.

Version: A

7-107


7-108

Figure 7-31

Accessing the OTN OPM Wavelength Monitoring Window

Figure 7-32

The OTN OPM Wavelength Monitoring Window Version: A



Monitored Port Displays the status of the monitored port. Refresh: Refreshes the OTNM2000 configuration. Download Config: Downloads the OTNM2000 configuration to the device. Cancel: Cancels the operation.

7.6.10

Setting the OTN SAPU Protection Click Business Configuration→Service Global Settings→SAPU protection in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the configuration GUI, as shown in Figure 7-33 and Figure 7-34.

Figure 7-33

Version: A

Accessing the OTN SAPU Protection Window

7-109


Figure 7-34

The OTN SAPU Protection Window


Parameter Configuration Protection Type: Selects SAPU 1+1 or SAPU 1:n. WTR Time: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Return Type: See the related configuration in Optical Channel. Apply: Applies the configuration data. OK: Saves the configuration. Cancel: Cancels the configuration.

7-110

Version: A


7.7

ASON Resource Management The OTNM2000 provides the ASON resource management function, including the SPC resource management and SPC resource synchronization. This function can be used to divide, synchronize and apply resources to help you understand the usage of the resources.

7.7.1

SPC Resource Management (SDH/PTN) This function is used to divide the port resources and link resources of the SDH / PTN devices.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→ASON Resource Management→SPC Resource Management (SDH/PTN) in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Note: In the displayed "Resource Dialog" window, the blue part indicates the resources of the control plane while the black part indicates the resources of the OTNM2000. You can select or deselect to divide the resources of the OTNM2000 and the control plane.

7.7.2

SPC Resource Management (OTN / POTS) This function is used to divide the port resources and link resources of the OTN / POTS devices.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→ASON Resource Management→SPC Resource Management (OTN/POTS) in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Version: A

7-111


Note: In the displayed "Resource Dialog" window, the blue part indicates the resources of the control plane while the black part indicates the resources of the OTNM2000. You can select or deselect to divide the resources of the OTNM2000 and the control plane.

7.7.3

Synchronizing SPC Port Resources Synchronizing the SPC port resources at the device side to the OTNM2000 ensures that the SPC port resources in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent. This facilitates unified management of the SPC port resources.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→ASON Resource Management→Synchronize SPC Port Data in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7.7.4

Synchronizing SPC Data Synchronizing the SPC data at the device side to the OTNM2000 ensures that the SPC data in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent. This facilitates unified management of the SPC data.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→ASON Resource Management→Synchronize SPC Data in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7.7.5

Synchronizing SPC Channels Synchronizing the SPC channel data at the device side to the OTNM2000 ensures that the SPC circuit statuses in the OTNM2000 and on the device are consistent. This facilitates unified management of the SPC channel data.

7-112

Version: A


Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→ASON Resource Management→Forced Synchronize SPC Path in the OTNM2000 main menu.

7.8

Displaying Routes During configuring services, you can select the Display Route function. The route details alert box appears for you to check whether the selected route is in accordance with the planned route. This section takes the L2VPN service as an example to introduce the Display Route.

Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→Display Route in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Note: The Display Route function can be selected only in the process of configuring the service; otherwise, this function is greyed out. Configuration GUI 1.

Configure the L2VPN service according to the planning and select the lowerlevel PW circuit that bears the service circuit, as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

7-113


2.

Click Business Configuration→Display Route in the OTNM2000 main menu to open the route details dialog box, as shown in the figure below:

7-114

Version: A


7.9

Options The Options function enables you to configure Background Initialization Parameters, Operation Parameter Settings, Menu, Script Comparer and Display Settings.

Caution: The parameters in the Options window are set to factory default values. Please handle with care. Configuration Access Method Click Business Configuration→Options in the OTNM2000 main menu.

Version: A

7-115


Configuration GUI The Options window is as shown in the following figure.

7.10

Querying Services The service query window enables you to view the details of services and allows you to modify or monitor alarms / performance.

7-116

Version: A


Background Information The OTNM2000 removes the service query function from the service configuration function to the Business Management menu. The types of services can be queried are as shown in the figure below:

Prerequisite The OTNM2000 has connected to the multi-service management service.

Precautions This section uses the tunnel as an example. When querying services of other types, the query procedures are the same except that the contents displayed in the filter dialog box are different.

Version: A

7-117


Procedure 1.

Click Business Management→Tunnel(T) in the main menu.

2.

Enter the filter information in the Tunnel dialog box according to the service details. as shown in the figure below:

3.

Click Filter to filter the services.

4.

View the details of the service filtered in the Tunnel tab, as shown in the figure below:

7-118

Version: A


1

Filter Condition

Sets the filter condition to query services.

Area 2

Query Result

Displays the results matching the condition. You can right-click a

Area

service in the list and select corresponding menus from the shortcut menu to perform related operations.

3

Service Details

By selecting a service in the query result, you can view the detailed

Area

information of the service and modify some service parameters. The service details tab varies with different services.

7.11

Managing Broken Services The OTNM2000 merges the Broken Service Management into the Business Management menu, convenient for you to query and manage the broken or to-berepaired services.

Prerequisite u

The OTNM2000 has connected to the multi-service management service.

u

The devices or links in the current network have been adjusted and broken services exist.

Precautions This section uses querying the broken tunnel as an example. When querying broken services of other types, the query procedures are the same except that the contents displayed in the filter dialog box are different.

Version: A

7-119


Querying the Broken Service u

Querying via the main menu. 1)

Click Business Management→Broken data management→Broken Tunnel(T) in the OTNM2000 main menu, as shown in the figure below:

2)

In the displayed tunnel filter dialog box, enter the filter information and then click Filter, as shown in the figure below:

7-120

Version: A


3)

Open the Broken Tunnel tab, click any entry and view the relevant information, as shown in the figure below:

u Version: A

Querying via the shortcut menu 7-121


1)

Click the Broken business object statistics shortcut menu on the OTNM2000 main GUI

2)

.

In the displayed Business object statistics list, click the digit in red of the Broken Tunnel item, as shown in the figure below:

3)

Open the Broken Tunnel tab, click any entry and view the relevant information.

Repairing the Broken Service For the method and procedures of repairing broken services, see "Cutover Management Operation Guide".

7.12

Saving Configuration Data to the Database This function saves the current service configuration of the OTNM2000 to the database.

Prerequisite u


u

The current configuration data are correct.

1.

Click Business Management→Save Config Data to Database in the main

Procedure

menu. 2.

In the displayed Business Management dialog box, click Yes, as shown in the figure below:

7-122

Version: A


3.

Click OK in the displayed alert box to save the configuration data, as shown in the figure below:

7.13

Reading Configuration Data from the Database This function reloads all service configurations from the database.

Prerequisite u


u

The configuration data saved into the database last time are correct.

1.

Click Business Management→Read Config Data from Database in the main

Procedure

menu. 2.

In the displayed Business Management dialog box, click Yes, as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

7-123


3.

Click OK in the displayed alert box to read the configuration data, as shown in the figure below:

7.14

Full Download The following introduces how to save the NE cross-connect data to the database and download the NE cross-connect data to the device.

7.14.1

Saving Cross-connect Data (NE) The following introduces how to save the NE cross-connect script to the database.

Prerequisite u


u


1.

Click Business Management→Full Download→Save Cross-connect (NE)

Procedure

in the main menu. 2.

In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes to open the Save NE Cross-connect dialog box, as shown in the figure below:

7-124

Version: A


3.

Click Compare the Script to compare whether the new and old scripts are consistent.

Note: Whether the new and old scripts are consistent does not influence saving the NE cross-connect. 4.

Click Compare Board Config to compare whether the card configurations are consistent.

Note: Whether the card configurations are consistent does not influence saving the NE cross-connect. 5.

Click Start to save the cross-connect data.

6.

Click Yes in the displayed Saved to the file successfully alert box, as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

7-125


7.

7.14.2

Click OK in the displayed Note alert box, as shown in the figure below:

Delivering the Cross-connect Data (NE) The following introduces how to deliver the cross-connect data generated to the device.

Prerequisite u


u


1.

Click Business Management→Full Download→Deliver Cross-connect (NE)

Procedure


In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes to open the Deliver NE Cross-connect dialog box, as shown in the figure below:

7-126

Version: A


3.

Click Compare the Script to compare whether the new and old scripts are consistent.

Note: Whether the new and old scripts are consistent does not influence saving the NE cross-connect. 4.

Click Compare Board Config to compare whether the card configurations are consistent.

Note: Whether the card configurations are consistent does not influence saving the NE cross-connect. 5.

Version: A

Click Download to deliver the NE cross-connect data.

7-127


Caution: 1.

If the system prompts that non-severe errors occur during the downloading, check Force or Ignore Error and Continue download, repeat Step 5.

2.

If the download still fails after checking Force or Ignore Error and Continue download, you need to eliminate the failure according to the error note and perform Step 5 again.

6.

In the displayed Close save/download window alert box, click Yes, as shown in the figure below:

7.

In the displayed Saved to file successfully alert box, click Yes. An alert box appears, prompting the configuration data are saved successfully, as shown in the figure below:

7.14.3

Saving SDH NE Cross-connect Data You can save the SDH NE cross-connect configuration into the database and view the SDH NEs and the corresponding NE cross-connect save status in the Save NE Cross tab.

Prerequisite u

7-128


Version: A


u

The SDH device and the corresponding NE data have been configured in the OTNM2000.

u


1.

Click Business Management→Full Download→Save SDH NE Cross-

Procedure

connect (NE) in the main menu. 2.

View the SDH NEs and the corresponding NE cross-connect save status in the Save NE Cross tab, as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

7-129

8

Alarm Management The OTNM2000 network management system provides the alarm management function of monitoring, displaying, restoring and statistics of the alarm signal. The alarm management is used in daily maintenance to assist users in finding, isolating and resolving faults.

Basic Concept Setting Alarm-related Parameters Viewing Alarms Setting the Alarm Template Handling Alarms Saving Alarm History Data Managing the Alarm Filter Setting Alarm Suppression Customizing Alarm Levels Managing Alarm Report Setting Alarm Audio-video Reminder

Version: A

8-1


8.1

Basic Concept The alarm is the main information source for knowing about the operating condition of the network and the fault isolation. Users must master related concept of alarms, so as to manage alarms effectively.

Alarm Browsing By viewing alarms, you can understand the running status of the network in a timely manner. The alarm browsing operation includes viewing the current alarms or alarm history of projects, network blocks, NEs, cards, channels and services and refreshing, filtering, confirming and locating these alarms. u

Alarm Browsing: Views the current alarms and alarm history of related equipment and services in the OTNM2000 to understand the running status of the network or equipment.

u

Alarm Confirmation: When an alarm is confirmed, it indicates the alarm is processed. It includes manual confirmation and automatic confirmation.

4

Manual Confirmation: You can manually confirm the selected alarm in the current alarm window and add additional information for the alarm, which will facilitate subsequent query.

4

Automatic Confirmation: The OTNM2000 will automatically confirm the alarms ended 24 hours ago.

u

Alarm Locating: You can locate the alarm information to NE in the logical tree or main topology.

4

Navigate to Logical Tree: Highlights the alarmed NE in the Logical Tree pane.

4

Navigate to Main Topology: Circles the alarmed NE in blue in the Main Topology tab.

u

Alarm Refreshing: Obtains the newest alarm data from the OTNM2000 alarm database and display them on the OTNM2000 GUI.

4

Refresh: Manually obtains the newest alarm data from the OTNM2000 alarm database and displays them on the OTNM2000 GUI.

8-2

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

4

Auto Refresh: The system automatically obtains the latest alarm data from the OTNM2000 alarm database every 5 seconds and display them on the OTNM2000 GUI.

u

Alarm Help Management: Sets the reason that may trigger the alarm and general processing principle as well as other related information.

Alarm Notification Mode As obtaining alarm information promptly is important for alarm handling and network maintenance, the OTNM2000 provides multiple ways of alarm notification. u

Alarm Indicator Color: The OTNM2000 adopts the color changes of the alarm indicator to help you quickly locate the alarmed object. By default, the alarm indicator uses grey to indicate the interruption alarm, red to indicate the critical alarm, orange to indicate the major alarm, yellow to indicate the minor alarm and blue to indicate the prompt alarm. You can also customize the color of the alarm indicator for alarms of different levels.

u

Alarm Animation: When new alarms of the current project occur, the OTNM2000 prompts OTNM2000 ALARM! animation which provides equipment alarms for users for the equipment maintenance in a timely manner.

u

Alarm Flickering: When an new alarm of an NE occurs, the Main Topology tab flashes the icon of the NE to prompt the occurrence of the new alarm.

u

Alarm Sound: The OTNM2000 client end connects to the loudspeaker box to broadcast different sounds to distinguish alarms of different levels. You can customize sounds for alarms of different levels. See Setting the Alarm Sound Reminder.

u

Remote Alarm Notification: Notifies you of the alarms when you are not on site. There are two ways of remote alarm notification.

4

Sends alarms via emails automatically to the specified email address.

4

Sends alarms in the form of SMS automatically to the designated users' phone.

Note: Alarm remote notification is realized by the SmsAgent software developed by Fiberhome. Version: A

8-3


Alarm Level Alarm levels are used to identify the severity, importance and urgency of the alarms. The OTNM2000 classifies the alarms into the following four levels in terms of severity: critical alarm, major alarm, minor alarm and prompt alarm. The alarms of different levels have different meanings and should be processed differently, as shown in Table 8-1. Table 8-1

Meaning and Severity of Alarm Levels

Alarm Level Interruption alarm

Meaning Indicates the alarms on interruption of network blocks, NEs and cards.

Processing Principle Processed immediately.

Indicates the alarms on the failures Critical alarm

that are global or may cause

Processed urgently.

corruption of NEs and services. Major alarm

Minor alarm

Indicates the alarms on the failures of cards or services in a certain range.

Processed timely.

Indicates the alarms on failures of

Alarm reason should be found

general cards or services.

timely to eliminate the failure.

Indicates the alarms that may influence the service quality of devices Prompt alarm

or resources other than system performance and service. Some of

Processed accordingly.

them are just information prompting the devices are back to normal.

Alarm Status Alarms can be divided into different status according to whether the alarm has been ended or confirmed. u

Unended and unconfirmed: Alarms are not confirmed and ended by users.

u

Unended but confirmed: Alarms are confirmed but not ended by users.

u

Ended but unconfirmed: Locking alarm, alarms are not confirmed but ended by users.

u

Ended and confirmed: Alarms are confirmed and ended by users.

The switch of alarm status is triggered by the alarm ending and identifying.

8-4

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

u

Alarm ending refers to the causes of alarm disappear and the NE monitors that the alarm ends and reports to the network management to refresh the alarm status.

u

Alarm identifying provides the function that an alarm is whether to be processed by users. Users process two types of alarms differently according to the status whether the alarm is confirmed.

Alarm Type Alarms can be divided into five types according to the different causes. u

Equipment alarm: Alarms of the equipment hardware.

u

Quality of Service (QoS) alarm: Alarms of service status and network QoS.

u

Communication alarm: Alarms of NE communication and optical signal communication.

u

Environmental alarm: Alarms of power supply system and equipment room environment.

u

Processing failure alarm: Alarms of software processing and abnormal situation.

Current Alarm and Alarm History Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history according to the time of occurrence. u

Current alarm: An alarm that exists and has not been ended in current network or equipment. To meet different requirements, the current alarm tab allows you to view the alarms already ended but unconfirmed.

u

Alarm history: An alarm that is ended in the network or the equipment.

Alarm and Event When detecting the status changes of objects, the OTNM2000 presents them via alarms or events according to the preset definition.

Version: A

8-5


u

Any changes to managed objects are called events. The occurrence of events only indicates the changes to managed objects, not necessarily resulting in service anomaly.

u

Alarms are exceptions of events. The occurrence of alarms indicates anomalies or failures of managed objects and need to be processed.

Alarm Saving When the alarm history saved in the OTNM2000 exceeds a certain limit, it will influence the operations performed in the OTNM20000. The alarm saving function can be used to remove the alarm history data from the database to a specified file, which improves the running performance of the OTNM2000. The OTNM2000 supports triggering the alarm saving function by the number of records or saving time. u

Alarm saving triggered by number of records: You can set the alarm history threshold and the OTNM2000 will regularly check the alarm history data. When the alarm history data reach the preset capacity, the OTNM2000 will save the data to a designated file in the specified time.

u

Alarm saving triggered by saving time: You can set the saving period (days) of alarm history data. When the alarm history data saved in the database reach the preset the time period, the OTNM2000 will save the data to a designated file in the specified time.

Alarm Indicator The alarm indicator is composed of the main indicator, frame and prompt icon. The main indicator of the main topology and logical tree differs from the main indicator of the subrack and card in that the former displays object types using different icons. Location

Alarm Indicator

Main Topology

Logical Tree

Subrack

8-6

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Location

Alarm Indicator

Vertically plugged card

Horizontally plugged card

u

Main indicator: The color of the main indicator depends on the color of the highest priority level of the unfinished alarms (excluding interruption alarms).

u

Frame: The color of the frame depends on the color of the highest priority level of the unconfirmed alarms (excluding interruption alarms).

u

Prompt icon: Prompts the focused alarm and interruption alarm information. In case of coexisting of focused alarms and interruption alarm, the defined icon for focused alarms will be displayed preferentially. If there are no customized alarms or interruption alarms, the prompt icon will be not displayed.

Note: The icon for focused alarms is set in the Alarm Report Settings dialog box according to Setting the Alarm Reporting.

8.2

Setting Alarm-related Parameters You can set the alarm-related parameters, including alarm sound, alarm animation and whether to save the alarm query conditions.

Procedure 1.

Select System→Options to open the System Option Settings dialog box. This dialog box includes the Query Condition, Automatic Function and Sound Option tabs.

Version: A

8-7


2.

Click the tab name on the left and the corresponding settings appear on the right. For details, see Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 Tab

Query

Description of Alarm-related Parameters Menu Option

Description

Save Current Alarm

When the item is selected, the system will

Query Condition

automatically save the corresponding conditions

Save History Alarm

configured during the current query. The two

Query Condition

options are selected by default.

Set History Alarm

When this item is selected, you need to set the

Query Condition First

query condition before querying alarm history.

Condition Current Alarm In Front

When this item is selected, the added current alarm will display at the top of the Current Alarm tab. Set the query time-out duration so that the system

Interval of Query Time

will end the query thread timed out and clear the

Out

related resource to improve the running efficiency of the OTNM2000.

8-8

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Table 8-2

Description of Alarm-related Parameters (Continued)

Tab

Menu Option

Description

Automatically refresh

When this item is selected, the OTNM2000 will

the current alarm initial

refresh the current alarms of the project

value of the project

automatically.

Automatic Function

Automatically refresh other current alarm initial values Enable Sound

When this item is selected, the OTNM2000 will refresh the current alarms of all objects except the project (including network block, NE, bureau, shelf and card) automatically. Selects it to enable the alarm sound. When Alarm Sound is selected, the OTNM2000 will play alarm sound once an alarm occurs; when

Sound Play Options

Loop Play is also selected, and the sound will not stop till the alarm disappears unless the play time limit is set. Selects Time Limit to set the play duration of the

Play Time Settings

alarm sound. It is available only when the Sound Play Option is set to Loop Play. When New Alarm Sound Overrides the Previous Alarm Sound is selected, the sound of the new alarm will take place of the sound of the previous

Sound Option

Sound Priority

alarm once a new alarm occurs. When Play the Audio based on the Alarm Severity is selected, the OTNM2000 will play the sound of the alarm with higher priority once an alarm occurs. When this item is selected, the OTNM2000 will

AVI StartUp

display the alarm information dynamically once an alarm occurs. When this item is selected, a dynamic prompt of the new alarm that scrolls from left to right will appear

AVI Scrolling

on the GUI once an alarm occurs. Note: The AVI StartUp item should be selected together.

3.

Version: A

Click OK.

8-9


8.3

Viewing Alarms Network maintenance engineers can know about the network operating status in a timely manner via viewing the alarm.

8.3.1

Viewing Current Alarms Users can know about the current operating status of the network via viewing current alarm. Users can refresh, confirm and filter alarms when viewing the current alarm.

Background Information Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history according to their status. u

Current alarm: An alarm that exists and has not been ended in current network or equipment.

u


1.

Select the path in Table 8-3 to open the Current Alarm tab.

Procedure

Table 8-3

Access Method of Viewing the Current Alarm

Operation

Access Method Select Alarm→Current Alarm in the main menu and select the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane, and click

.

Right-click the desired project, network block or NE in the Logical Tree Viewing Current

pane and select Current Alarm from the shortcut menu.

Alarms

Right-click the desired card or shelf in the shelf view or rack view and select Current Alarm from the shortcut menu. Select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Current Alarm in the Operational Tree pane, select the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

8-10

.

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Table 8-3 Operation

Access Method of Viewing the Current Alarm (Continued) Access Method Select relevant submenus under the Business Management menu to open the service management tab, right-click the desired circuit or service and select Alarm/Performance Query→Query Current Alarm from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Operation Object Selection dialog box, select the desired object and click OK.

2.

In the Current Alarm tab, view the current alarm information of the selected object, as shown in Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1

3.

Checking the Current Alarm Information

(Optional) Right-click the alarm list title bar to bring up the title bar option list to select the title to be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-2.

Version: A

8-11


Figure 8-2

Option List of the Alarm Title Bar

Other Operations In the Current Alarm tab, right-click in the alarm display area and select the corresponding shortcut menu to refresh alarms, confirm alarms or filter alarms. For details, see Handling Alarms.

8.3.2

Viewing Alarm History Users can know about the faults of network via viewing alarm history, so as to facilitate the fault analysis. Users can refresh and filter alarms when viewing the alarm history.

8-12

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Background Information Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history according to the time of occurrence. u

Current alarm: An alarm that exists and has not been ended in current network or equipment.

u


1.

Select the path in Table 8-4 to open the Alarm History tab.

Procedure

Table 8-4

Access Method of Viewing the Alarm History

Operation

Access Method Select Alarm→Alarm History in the main menu, select the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane, and click

.

Right-click the desired project, network block or NE in the Logical Tree tab and select Alarm History from the shortcut menu. Right-click the desired card or shelf in the shelf view or rack view and Viewing the alarm history

select Alarm History in the shortcut menu. Select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Alarm History in the Operational Tree pane, select the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

.

Select relevant submenus under the Business Management menu to open the service management tab, right-click the desired circuit or service and select Alarm/Performance Query→Query Current Alarm from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Operation Object Selection dialog box, select the desired object and click OK.

2.

View the alarm history information of the selected objects in the Alarm History tab, as shown in Figure 8-3.

Version: A

8-13


Figure 8-3

3.

Viewing the Alarm History

(Optional) Right-click the alarm list title bar to bring up the title bar option list to select the title to be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-4.

8-14

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Figure 8-4

Option List of the Title Bar

Other Operations In the Alarm History tab, right-click anywhere in the tab and select the corresponding shortcut menu to refresh, confirm or filter alarms. For details, see Handling Alarms.

8.3.3

Viewing Reported Events Users can know about the equipment current operating status via viewing report events.

Version: A

8-15


Procedure 1.

Select Security→View Report Event in the main menu to open the Report Event tab and view the events related to the ASON equipment.

2.

(Optional) Right-click any area in the Report Event tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu to set the reporting time range of the events and click Query to display the reported events in the specified time range.

Note: You can select System→Network Status Monitor in the main menu and click Event in the Network Status Monitor tab to view the information of related events.

8.3.4

Viewing Environmental Monitoring Alarms You can monitor the environment of the specified object via the function of viewing environmental monitoring alarms.

Procedure 1.

Select Alarm→House-keeping Alarm in the main menu to open the Housekeeping Alarm window.

2.

Right-click Network in the left pane of the window and select Add NE Group from the shortcut menu.

3.

Enter the NE group name in the Add NE Group dialog box that appears and click OK.

4.

Drag the corresponding NE in the Logical Tree pane to the NE group in the House-keeping Alarm window.

8-16

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Note: u

Users can drag the NE from one NE group to the other NE group.

u

Right-click the NE group and select Del Group from the shortcut menu. Click Yes in the alert box that appears to delete the selected NE group.

u

Right-click the NE and select Del NE from Group from the shortcut menu to delete the selected NE.

5.

See Step 2 to 4 to set the monitoring object and click the corresponding monitoring object to check the environment monitoring alarm information at the right side of the pane.

Other Operations In the Current Alarm tab, right-click in the alarm displaying area and select the corresponding shortcut menu to refresh alarms, confirm alarms or filter alarms. For details, see Handling Alarms.

Version: A

8-17


8.4

Setting the Alarm Template The OTNM2000 supports the setting of alarm query template, alarm statistical templates and alarm level templates. You can use the preset alarm template to set the alarm query conditions, alarm statistical conditions and alarm levels quickly.

8.4.1

Setting the Alarm Query Template To avoid setting conditions repetitively, users can save the set alarm query conditions as the template for convenience of querying alarms via the template in the future.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Current Alarms and Viewing Alarm History to open the Current Alarm / Alarm History tab.

2.

Right-click anywhere in the Current Alarm / Alarm History tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Set Current Alarm Query Condition or Set Alarm History Query Condition dialog box. Figure 8-5 is the Set Current Alarm Query Condition dialog box. You can set Oscillation Status, End Time and Duration in the Set Alarm History Query Condition dialog box. The Alarm Status of the current alarm is different from that of the alarm history.

8-18

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Figure 8-5

3.

The Set Current Alarm Query Condition Dialog Box

Set query conditions and click Export... to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-6.

Version: A

8-19


Figure 8-6

4.

Defining the Alarm Profile Name

Enter the template name and click OK.

Note: u

The check box Only for this card is active only for defining the alarm query template of the card; otherwise it is greyed out.

u

If the Only for this card check box is selected, the query template can be imported only when querying alarms of this card.

8.4.2

Managing Alarm Statistical Templates The OTNM2000 supports the customized alarm statistic template and the setting of the statistic range of the current alarm by switching the template.

Procedure 1.

Select Alarm→Custom Alarm Static Template in the main menu or select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Custom Alarm Static Template in the Operational Tree tab of the object tree pane to open the Custom Alarm Static Template tab, as shown in Figure 8-7.

8-20

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Figure 8-7

The Alarm Statistical Template Tab

Note: The Alarm Statistical Template tab's shortcut menu includes all functions of the following buttons. 2.

Add the template. 1)

Select the corresponding network block, NE or subnet in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane.

2)

Click Add to open the Custom Alarm Static Template Name Setting dialog box.

3)

Version: A

Set the relevant information of the template and click OK.

8-21


4) 3.


View or modify the template.

Note: Do not modify the Set panel indicator display template. 1)

Select the desired template and click Modify.

2)

View or modify the template settings in the displayed Modify Custom Alarm Statistical Template dialog box.

4.

8-22

3)

Click OK.

4)


Delete the template.

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Note: Do not delete the Set panel indicator display template.

4

Click Delete All and click OK in the dialog box that appears.

4

Select the template to be deleted and click Delete Select Row and click OK in the dialog box that appears.

5.

Switch statistic object of the current alarm panel.

4

Click Global panel indicator display and the entire network alarm statistics displays in the current alarm panel.

4

Select the corresponding template and click Panel indicator display. The alarm statistics of the corresponding template displays in the current alarm panel in the toolbar.

Other Operations u

Export customized alarm statistical template. Select the alarm statistical template to be exported. Right-click any area in the Custom Alarm Static Template tab and select Export to File from the shortcut menu. The customized alarm statistical template can be exported to the designated directory in the form of *.xml file.

u

Import customized alarm statistical template. Right-click anywhere in the Custom Alarm Static Template tab and select Import from File from the shortcut menu. The backed up alarm statistical template can be imported.

u

Refresh customized alarm statistical template. Right-click any area in the Custom Alarm Static Template tab and select Refresh from the shortcut menu. The system reads the alarm statistical template from the database and displays the template in the GUI.

8.4.3

Managing Alarm Level Templates The OTNM2000 supports customizing alarm levels and defining them as templates, which is convenient for you to quickly adjust alarm levels as needed.

Version: A

8-23


Procedure 1.

Select Alarm→Custom Alarm Level in the main menu or select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Alarm Level Template in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm Level Template tab, as shown in Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8

The Alarm Level Template Tab

Note: The Alarm Level Template tab's shortcut menu includes all functions of the following buttons. 2.

Add the template. 1)

Select the corresponding network block, NE or subnet in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane.

2)

Click Add to open the Customize Alarm Level dialog box.

3)

Select the corresponding alarm code and set the alarm level in the Customized Grade column.

8-24

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

4)

See Table 8-5 to perform the corresponding operation.

Note: The Custom Alarm Level tab's shortcut menu includes all functions of the above menus. Table 8-5

Description of the Menus in the Customize Alarm Level Dialog Box

Menu

Export

Description Export to

Saves the current alarm level settings as a template and

Server

uploads it to the server.

Export to Local

Saves the current alarm level settings as a template and

File

exports as an XML file.

Import from Import

Local File Import from DB Modify

Edit

Template Description

Version: A

Imports the alarm level template saved on the local computer. Imports the alarm level settings from the database. Modifies the description information of the current alarm level template.

Apply to DB

Saves the current alarm level settings to the database.

Exit

Exits from the Customize Alarm Level dialog box.

8-25


3.

View or modify the template. 1)

Select the desired template and click Modify in the Alarm Level Template tab.

2)

View or modify the template settings in the displayed Custom Alarm Level dialog box.

3) 4.

See Table 8-5 to perform the corresponding operation.

Delete the template. 1)

Select the desired template and click Delete in the Alarm Level Template tab.

2)


Other Operations u

Refresh the alarm level template. Click Refresh in the Alarm Level Template tab. The system reads the alarm level templates from the database and displays them on the GUI.

u

Restore to factory defaults. Click Factory Reset in the Alarm Level Template tab. The system restores the alarm level settings to the factory defaults.

8.5

Handling Alarms Users should handle alarms to eliminate faults after alarm information is detected according to specified flow. Alarm handling includes isolating alarm, confirming alarm, refreshing alarm, etc.

8.5.1

Alarm Processing Flow The following introduces the alarm processing flow. When you detect alarms in the OTNM2000, see Figure 8-9 to handle them.

8-26

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Figure 8-9

Version: A

Alarm Handling Process

8-27


Table 8-6

Description of the Alarm Processing Flow

Operation

Description Obtains the alarm information and then starts the alarm processing flow. The OTNM2000 provides multiple ways of alarm

Obtain alarm information

notification. To obtain alarm information in time, see Managing Alarm Report and Setting Alarm Audio-video Reminder to complete the settings in advance.

View the alarm and related information

Confirm the alarm

Views the alarm and related information, including the alarm location, correlated alarms, alarm-related service and alarm help information. Confirms the alarm, indicates the alarm is being traced and processed.

Collect the failure

Locates the alarm to query the alarm information and collect the

information

failure information.

Analyze the reason of the

Analyzes the specific reason of the failure according to the failure

failure

information.

Make a failure processing scheme

Makes the failure processing scheme according to the alarm information and referring to related manuals of the corresponding NE and maintenance expertise.

Implement the failure

Eliminates the failure that triggers the alarm based on the failure

processing scheme

processing scheme. Once the failure that results in the alarm is eliminated, the

Clear the alarm

OTNM2000 will receive that notification prompting that the alarm is cleared. If the alarm does not exist on the NE, you can manually clear the alarm.

Verify whether the failure is

After clearing the alarm, you need to verify the failure processing

eliminated or not

result.

Record the alarm maintenance experience

8.5.2

After processing the failure, you can record the alarm maintenance experience to facilitate troubleshooting of similar alarms.

Synchronizing Alarms The OTNM2000 synchronizes with the equipment alarm via the function of synchronizing the NE alarm.

Background Information Only the IPRAN NE supports the NE alarm synchronization. 8-28

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Procedure 1.

Right-click the IPRAN NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the Main Topology tab and select Alarm→NE Alarm Sync from the shortcut menu.

2.

Click

on the toolbar to open the Command Manager window to confirm the

NE Alarm Sync command is executed successfully. 3.

8.5.3

Close the Command Manager window.

Isolating Alarm The alarm isolation function helps users isolate the alarmed object.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Current Alarms and Viewing Alarm History for opening the Current Alarm / Alarm History tab.

2.

Select one alarm and right-click anywhere in the tab and perform the following operations:

4

Select Navigate to Logic Tree. The Logical Tree pane appears with the alarmed NE highlighted.

4

Select Navigate to Main Topo. The Main Topology tab appears with the alarmed NE circled in blue.

8.5.4

Confirming Alarms The following introduces how to confirm alarms manually.

Background Information When an alarm is confirmed, it indicates the alarm is processed. It includes manual confirmation and automatic confirmation. u

Manual Confirmation: You can manually confirm the selected alarm in the Current Alarm tab and add additional information for the alarm, which will facilitate subsequent query.

Version: A

8-29


u

Automatic Confirmation: The OTNM2000 will automatically confirm the alarms ended 24 hours ago.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Current Alarms for opening the Current Alarm tab.

2.

Confirm alarm information.

4

Execute the following procedures to confirm a single alarm. a)

Select the alarm to be confirmed and right-click anywhere in the tab to select Confirm Selected Alarms from the shortcut menu.

b)

Enter the additional information for the alarm in the displayed Confirm Alarm dialog box and click Confirm Alarm.

4

Execute the following procedures to confirm the alarm information in a batch manner. a)

Right-click anywhere in the Confirm Alarm tab to select Batch Confirm Alarms from the shortcut menu.

Note: Right-click the desired project, network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Batch Confirm Alarm from the shortcut menu to confirm the alarms in a batch manner. b)

Select All Alarms or Alarm Severity or the specific alarm code in the Confirm Alarm dialog box.

8-30

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

c)

Enter the additional information of the alarm confirmation and click Confirm Alarm.

Note: Select the Cover check box. The current additional information will overwrite the existing one.

8.5.5

Querying Correlated Alarms The root alarm usually derives some alarms in low level, which interfere with the isolation and processing of the alarms by the users. Users can filter the derivative alarm, reduce the quantity of alarms and isolate the fault promptly via the alarm relevance analysis.

Background Information The alarm correlation analysis function is mainly used in the following two situations: u Version: A

The correlation among the alarms on a same line under the same card. 8-31


u

The relevance among the alarms on two ends of a same optical fiber.

1.

Select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Alarm Correlation

Procedure

Analysis in the Operational Tree pane, and select the corresponding object in the lower part of the Operational Tree tab to open the Alarm Correlation Analysis tab, as shown in Figure 8-10.

Note: Right-click in the alarm display area of the Current Alarm tab and select Alarm Correlation Analysis from the shortcut menu to open the Alarm Correlation Analysis tab.

Figure 8-10

Querying Correlated Alarms

Figure 8-10lists the correlated alarms, among which the PK_LOS indicates the root source alarm that derives the BMC_LOS alarm. Users should pay special attention to the PK_LOS root alarm when handling alarms. 2.

(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Alarm Correlation Analysis tab and select Output Report from the shortcut menu to export the information in the tab as an HTML file.

8-32

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

8.5.6

Viewing Alarm-related Services Viewing the alarm-related services helps quickly locate and eliminate failures.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Query Related Business to open the Navigate to Business tab to view the services corresponding to the alarm.

8.5.7

Alarm Statistics Users can know about the network overall faults and obtain related data via the alarm statistics, so as to facilitate the troubleshooting and network optimization.

8.5.7.1

Gathering Statistics of Alarms via the Alarm Panel You can view alarm statistics of different alarm levels or different statuses via the alarm panel.

Procedure 1.

Click

to the right of the alarm indicator on the toolbar to open the current

alarm panel, as shown in Figure 8-11. The current alarm panel displays the alarm statistical information on the current project by default. See Managing Alarm Statistical Templates for switching the statistical object of the current alarm panel.

Version: A

8-33


Figure 8-11

8.5.7.2

The Current Alarm Panel

Viewing the Current Alarm Statistical Report The OTNM2000 supports querying the number of current alarms in specified conditions and exporting the statistical result as an XML, Txt, CSV or XLS file.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click in the alarm display area of the Current Alarm tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu.

3.

In the displayed Set Current Alarm Query Condition dialog box, set query conditions and click OK.

4.

Right-click in the alarm display area of the Current Alarm tab and select Export from the shortcut menu.

5.

Enter the report statistical range in the Set Range dialog box that appears and click OK to open the Chart dialog box.

8-34

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

6.

Click Preview Report to open the Output Report tab and view the alarm information in the tab.

7.

Click the button at the bottom of the Output Report tab to set the page format and export the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XLS file.

Version: A

8-35


8.5.7.3

Viewing the Alarm History Statistical Report The OTNM2000 supports querying the number of alarm history entries in specified conditions and exporting the statistical result as an XML, Txt, CSV or XLS file.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Alarm History to open the Alarm History tab.

2.

Right-click in the alarm display area of the Alarm History tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu.

3.

In the displayed Set Alarm History Query Condition dialog box, set query conditions and click OK.

4.

Right-click in the alarm display area of the Alarm History tab and select Export→Select Row from the shortcut menu.

5.

Enter the report statistical range in the Range dialog box that appears and click OK to open the Chart dialog box.

6.

Click Preview Report to open the Output Report tab and view the alarm information in the tab.

8-36

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

7.

Click the button at the bottom of the Output Report tab to set the page format and export the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XLS file.

8.5.7.4

Exporting All Alarm History Data The OTNM2000 supports exporting all alarm history data as a CSV report, convenient for you to view the data.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Alarm History to open the Alarm History tab.

2.

Right-click anywhere in the tab and select Export→All from the shortcut menu.

3.

Click OK in the displayed alert box to generate the task of exporting all alarm history.

Note: Go to the D:\OTNM\md\task_result directory to view the exported alarm history report according to the prompt information in the alert box.

Version: A

8-37


4.

Select Management Tool→Statistics→Alarm Statistics→Alarm History Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm History Statistics tab and view the export task of all alarm history already generated, as shown in Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12

5.

The History Alarm Statistics Tab

Select the task and click Task Result Files to open the File Result List dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-13.

Figure 8-13

8-38

File Result List of Alarm History Statistics

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

6.

Select the desired file and click Save As to save the selected file to the specified directory.

Other Operations Delete a task or result report. 1.

Select the corresponding task and click Delete, or right-click the task to select Delete from the shortcut menu.

2.

Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the selected task.

3.

Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the result file of the task simultaneously.

Note: Click No to save the result file of the task.

8.5.8

Refreshing Alarms You can refresh alarms to make the alarm data displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI consistent with that in the OTNM2000 alarm database.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click the alarm displaying area in the tab and perform the following operations:

4

Select Refresh to obtain the newest alarm data from the OTNM2000 alarm database and display these data on the OTNM2000 GUI.

4

Select Auto Refresh to obtain the newest alarm data from the alarm database in the OTNM2000 every 5 seconds and display these data on the OTNM2000 GUI.

Version: A

8-39


8.5.9

Printing Alarm Data Print the queried alarm data.

Procedure 1.


2.

Print alarm data.

4

Print the selected data. Right-click the selected alarm data and select Print →Print Selected from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK .

4

Print all. Right-click in the alarm displaying area of the tab and select Print →All from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK.

8.5.10

Manage alarm help Users can check the alarm help information and record the alarm maintenance experience to facilitate troubleshooting of alarms in the same type.

Background Information The OTNM2000 presets some common failure diagnosis rules such R_LOS, TU_AIS, HP_TIM and B1_EXC.

Procedure 1.


2.

Select the alarm to be queried and check the alarm details and troubleshooting suggestions at the bottom of the tab, as shown in Figure 8-14.

8-40

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Figure 8-14

3.

Checking Alarm Help

(Optional) Right-click the alarm information that needs to customize help and select Customize Help from the shortcut menu and open the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-15. Type the user maintenance experience and click OK.

Version: A

8-41


Figure 8-15

4.

The Custom Reasons and Measures Dialog Box

(Optional) Select Help→Alarm and Performance Help in the main menu to open the Alarm and Performance Help tab. Select the type of the alarm in the left pane and the reasons and solutions of the selected alarm will appear in the right pane, as shown in Figure 8-16.

8-42

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Figure 8-16

Viewing the Alarm Help

Note: Click Change custom content... to record the user maintenance experience.

8.6

Saving Alarm History Data When the alarm history data stored in the database meet the save conditions, the system will delete the data from the database and save it to the hard disk as files, so as to improve the operating efficiency of the OTNM2000.

Version: A

8-43


Prerequisite The EMS_Dumper service is started up.

Procedure 1.

Select System→Save Data to open the Save Data tab.

2.

Click OK in the displayed alert boxes.

Note: The alert box prompts the number of remaining entries for each save item that will reach the save threshold. 3.

See Table 8-7 to set the save parameters in the Save Data tab.

Table 8-7

Data Save Parameters - Alarm History

Configuration Item Start Time to Save

End Time to Save Save

Path to Save

Settings

Description Sets the save start time. The value range is 0 to 23. It is 3 by default, indicating the data saving will start from three o’clock in the morning. Sets the save end time. The value range is 0 to 23. It is 7 by default, indicating the data saving will end at seven o’clock in the morning. The path of data save. Three file types are supported. u

Save File type

Default text: The data after save are in a TXT file, which cannot be imported into the database.

u

DbBackup text: The data after save are in a script file, which can be imported into the database.

u

Both: The data are saved according the default text and DbBackup text type simultaneously.

Type of Save

Sub-item of save

Save Threshold Current Capacity

8-44

It is Alarm History by default, which cannot be edited. If the number of alarm history data stored in the database reaches this value (an integer, greater than 0 entries), the data will be saved to another location in the specified period of time. Displays the number of alarm history entries in the database.

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Table 8-7

Data Save Parameters - Alarm History (Continued)

Configuration Item

Description

Number of

Displays the number of alarm history entries that will be deleted

Entries to

from the database and saved to a hard disk when the save

Save

condition is met.

Single File Capacity Number of Save Files

Time limit of Transfer (days)

Configures the number of information items saved in each file. Sets the maximum number of files to be saved. When the number of files exceeds the value, the earliest file of this type will be overwritten automatically. Sets the time condition that triggers the data save of alarm history. When the duration of the alarm history data saved in the database exceeds the value set here, the data will be saved to another location in the specified period of time.

Caution: If the quantity of actual save entries in the system is more than the Single File Capacity × the Number of Save Files, the data will be lost. 4.

After completing the above configuration, click the Settings at the bottom of the Save Data tab.

5.

8.7

Click OK in the Command Warning alert box that appears.

Managing the Alarm Filter Users can focus on the important alarms via filtering some designated alarms so as to facilitate the management.

8.7.1

Setting the Current Alarm Filter Users can filter some irrelevant alarms. After setting the report filter of the current alarms, the filtered alarms will be saved into the alarm database and will not display on the OTNM2000 GUI.

Version: A

8-45


Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 8-8 to open the Current Alarm tab.

Table 8-8

Access Method of Setting the Current Alarm Filter

Operation

Access Method Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Alarm→Current Alarm Filter from the shortcut menu. Then select the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click .

Setting the Current Alarm Filter

Select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Current Alarm Filter in the Operational Tree pane, select the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

.

Right-click the corresponding NE in the Main Topology tab, select Current Alarm Filter from the shortcut menu and select the desired project, network block or NE in the Operational Tree pane and click

2.

.

Select the alarm name to be filtered in the Current Alarm Filter tab, as shown in Figure 8-17.

Figure 8-17

3.

Setting the Current Alarm Filter

(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Set Alarm Filter tab to perform the following operations:

4 8-46

Click Select All to select all alarms in the current page.

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

4

Click Cancel All to clear all alarms in the current page.

4

Click Select the Selected Items to select the selected alarms in the current page.

4

Click Select the not Selected Items to select the alarms that are not selected in the current page.

4

Select Save Current Alarm Filter Setting to save the filtering configurations on the current tab.

4

Select Refresh Current Alarm Filter Setting to refresh the filter setting in the current tab.

8.7.2

Setting the Card Alarm Filter After setting the card alarm filter, the filtered alarms will not be reported to the OTNM2000 or be displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.

Prerequisite The desired card supports the filter setting function.

Procedure 1.

Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane, click the shelf in the rack view and click the corresponding card in the shelf view. Click MASK_SETTING in the Task Panel to open the card filter window, as shown in Figure 8-18.

Version: A

8-47


Figure 8-18

2.

Setting the Card Alarm Filter

See Table 8-9 for setting the card alarm filter.

Table 8-9

Descriptions of Items in the Card Alarm Filter

Parameter

Description There are three filter modes, namely, Line (alarm / PM)-based Filter, Alarm- / PM-based Filter and Line Filter. u

Select Line (alarm / PM)-based Filter, select the line name and specific alarm code at the right side of the pane to filter the specific

Filter Mode

alarm code of the selected line. u

Click Alarm- / PM-based Filter and select the alarm code and the corresponding line at the right side of pane to filter the alarm code of the selected line.

u

Click Line Filter and select the line name at the right side of pane to filter the alarm and performance of the selected line.

Filter all Alarms

Filters all alarms of the selected card.

Filter all Lines

Filters the alarm and performance on all lines of the selected card.

Clear Alarm Mask

Clears all alarm filters of the selected card. Clears the line filter of the selected card, that is, clearing the filter

Clear Line Filter

setting completed in the Line Filter mode. The filter setting completed in the Line-based Filter mode will not be influenced.

8-48

Clear All Filter

Clears all alarm and performance filters of the selected card.

Save to the database

Saves the filter setting to the database. Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Table 8-9

8.7.3

Descriptions of Items in the Card Alarm Filter (Continued)

Parameter

Description

Read from Device

Reads the filter setting of the selected card from the equipment.

Save to the device

Saves the filter setting to the equipment.

Setting the NE Alarm Filter After setting the NE alarm filter, the filtered alarms will not be reported to the OTNM2000 or be displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.

Background Information Only the IPRAN NE supports the NE alarm filter function.

Procedure 1.

Right-click the IPRAN NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the Main Topology tab and select Alarm→NE Mask Alarm from the shortcut menu to open the NE Mask Alarm window.

2.

Set the card alarm filter.

4 Version: A

Filter all alarms of the card.

8-49


4

a)

Select Mask All of the corresponding card and click Write To Device.

b)


Filter card alarms according to line and alarm codes. a)

Select the corresponding card and click Add.

b)

Set the line type, the line range and the filter code in the Add Item dialog box that appears and click OK.

Note: Mouse over the rules in the Line Range at the right side of the text box and check the setting rules of the line range in the alert box that appears.

8-50

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

c)

Confirm filter parameters are set correctly in the NE Mask Alarm window and click Write To Device.

Version: A

8-51


d)

8.7.4


Managing Alarm Filter Rules After the alarm filter rules are set, the system processes the reported alarms according to these alarm filter rules. The filtered alarms will neither be saved in the database nor displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.

Background Information The filter operation only applies to the alarms reported when the filter rules are enabled and valid; It does not apply to the alarms reported before setting the filter rules.

Procedure 1.

Select Alarm→Alarm Filtering Rule Management to open the Alarm Filtering Rule Management tab.

2.

Click Create at the lower right of the tab or right-click in the right pane and select Create to open the Add Alarm Filtering Rule dialog box.

8-52

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Figure 8-19

3.

Adding a Alarm Filter Rule

See Table 8-10 to set the alarm filter rule and click OK.

Table 8-10

Description of Items in the Card Alarm Filter Tab

Parameter

Description Rule Type

Basic Information

Rule Name Rule Remark Enable or not

Version: A

It is Current Alarm Filtering Rule by default, without the need to set. Specify the name of the current alarm filter rule. Set the description information of the current alarm filter rule.

Check Enable to enable the current alarm filter rule.

8-53


Table 8-10

Description of Items in the Card Alarm Filter Tab (Continued)

Parameter

Description It supports selecting the alarm source via the following three ways.

Alarm Alarm

u

All Objects: Select all alarm sources.

u

Select Equipment: Click

select the alarm object from the project tree with the

Source

Filtering

smallest granularity being card. u

Information

behind Object Name to

Select Equipment Type: Click

behind Object Name

and enter the keyword to search for the desired object by NE type or card type. Fuzzy search is supported. Click Alarm Code

behind Alarm Code to select the alarm codes to be

filtered. It supports entering multiple keywords to filter the alarm codes and quickly locate the desired one.

4.

(Optional) Quickly filter the current alarm. In the current alarm tab, right-click the corresponding alarm and select Filter Alarm. Then select the filter rule as needed and click OK. In the Filtering Rule Management tab, you can view the added alarm filter rule.

Other Operations Right-click any alarm filter rule and select Delete, Refresh, Modify Alarm Filtering Rule, Start Task or End Task to perform the corresponding operation.

8-54

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

8.7.5

Setting the History Alarm Filter You can filter some irrelevant history alarms. After the history alarms are filtered according to the alarm history filter, the database will no longer collect the information of these alarms.

Procedure 1.

Select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Alarm History Filter in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm History Filter tab.

2.

Right-click anywhere in the Alarm History Filter tab and select Setting History Alarm Filter to open the Alarm History Filter of the Filter Settings window, as shown in Figure 8-20.

Figure 8-20

The Filter Window - Alarm History

3.

Select the alarm code to be filtered in the Alarm History Filter tab.

4.

Select Action→Save the current filter settings or click

on the toolbar and

click OK in the displayed alert box.

Other Operations Select the submenus under the Action main menu or right-click anywhere in the Filter Settings window to perform the following operations:

Version: A

8-55


u

Select Refresh to refresh the data in the tab.

u

Select Filter All to select and filter all codes in the current tab.

u

Select Filter None to deselect all codes in the current tab.

u

Select Filter the Selected Items to filter the selected codes in the current tab.

u

Select Unfilter the Selected Items to not filter the selected codes in the current tab.

u

Select Save Current Alarm Filter Setting to save the filtering configurations in the current tab.

8.7.6

u

Select Save All to save the filtering configurations on all pages.

u

Select Exit to exit the Filter Settings window.

Viewing History Alarm Filter You can view the alarm codes already set in the alarm history filter to avoid the influence on the equipment alarm monitoring caused by misconfiguration.

Procedure 1.

Select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Alarm History Filter in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm History Filter tab, as shown in Figure 8-21.

Figure 8-21

Viewing History Alarm Filter

Other Operations Right-click any area in the Alarm History Filter tab to perform the following operations:

8-56

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

u


u

Select View Alarm History Filter to view the filter information of alarm history.

u

Select Setting History Alarm Filter to open the History Alarm Filter tab of the Filter Setting window and reset the alarm history filter rule.

u

Select View History Performance Filter to view the filter information of performance history.

u

Select Performance History Mask to open the History Performance Filter tab of the Filter Setting window.

u

Select View Command Log Filter to view the filter information of command logs.

u

Select Set Command Log Filter to open the Command Log Filter tab of the Filter Setting window.

8.8

u

Select Collapse All Nodes to collapse all nodes in the tab.

u

Select Expand All Nodes to expand all nodes in the tab.

Setting Alarm Suppression After setting the alarm suppression, the alarm and the affected alarm will not be reported. The alarm and the affected alarm will be reported when it occurs again.

Background Information The alarm suppression function is used in the NE start-up stage. A series of alarms, such as LOS alarms, occur because the NE service is not started up. In this case, the maintenance staff can ignore these alarms. However, after the service is started up, the NE should report the alarms normally.

Prerequisite The corresponding card supports the alarm suppression function.

Procedure 1.

Double-click the corresponding NE in the Logical Tree tab and select the desired card in the shelf view. Then click ALARM_INHIBIT on the Task Panel to open the Alarm Suppression tab.

Version: A

8-57


2.

Select the corresponding line in the Line Name column. Select the corresponding suppressed alarm in the Inhibited Alarm column. Right-click the upper part of the tab and select Save from the shortcut menu.

3.

Right-click the newly-added suppressed alarm items in the lower part of the tab and select Set Affected Alarm from the shortcut menu and the Inhibited Alarm column changes into the Affected Alarm column.

4.

Select the corresponding line in the Line Name column. Select the corresponding affected alarm in the Affected Alarm column. Right-click the upper part of the tab and select Save from the shortcut menu.

8-58

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

5.

Select the corresponding item in the lower part of the pane and right-click anywhere in the lower pane and select Save to the device from the shortcut menu.

6.


Other Operations Right-click in the lower pane and select the shortcut menus to perform the corresponding operations: u

Select Export to Template from the shortcut menu to export the alarm suppression items as an INH file to the designated directory.

u

Select Import from File from the shortcut menu to import the alarm suppression template previously backed up to the OTNM2000.

8.9

Customizing Alarm Levels Users can adjust the alarm level of the alarm code as needed so as to facilitate the management and improve the alarm monitoring efficiency.

Version: A

8-59


Procedure 1.

Select Alarm→Custom Alarm Level in the main menu to open the Customize Alarm Level dialog box.

2.

In the Customize Alarm Level dialog box, select the row where the corresponding alarm code is located and select the new alarm level in the dropdown box of the Customized Grade, as shown in Figure 8-22.

Figure 8-22

3.

Customizing the Alarm Level

(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Customize Alarm Level dialog box and select Restore Default Level from the shortcut menu to restore to the system default settings.

4.

Select Action→Save in the main menu or click

on the toolbar to save the

customized alarm levels.

8.10

Managing Alarm Report Users can set the alarm report conditions of the current project and the OTNM2000 will display the report content according to the alarm report conditions, so as to facilitate the users to know about the equipment alarm directly.

8-60

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

8.10.1

Setting the Alarm Reporting You can set the focused alarms to have them reported. After setting the alarm reporting, the alarms will appear in the reported content tab upon occurrence.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 8-11 to open the Set Report Condition window, as shown in Figure 8-23.

Table 8-11

Access Method of Setting the Alarm Reporting

Operation

Access Method

Setting the Alarm Reporting

Select Alarm→Alarm Report Settings in the main menu. Right-click a card in the shelf view and select Alarm Report Settings from the shortcut menu.

Figure 8-23

2.

Version: A

Setting the Reporting Condition

Set alarm report conditions according to Table 8-12.

8-61


Table 8-12 Parameter Switch

Description of Alarm Reporting Conditions Description If the Switch of an alarm is selected, the alarm will be displayed in the report window when it occurs. Click the down button in the Select Sound list box of an alarm to bring up two optional items.

Select Sound

u

Optional file: Select the sound file (*.wav) for the alarm. The system will generate a particular prompt sound when the alarm occurs.

u

No sound prompt: No alarm sound exists when the alarm occurs.

Selects an alarm report icon for the alarm. The alarm indicator of the alarmed Icon

object displays the icon when the alarm occurs. If more alarm icons are set and these alarms occur at the same time, the displaying priority of these alarm icons descends from the top down.

Line Number Included

Line Number Excluded

Double-click the Line Number Included of an alarm and enter the line number. Only the alarm of the designated line number is reported. Use comma to separate multiple line numbers. Double-click the Line Number Excluded of an alarm and enter the line number or separate multiple line numbers by comma. All alarms except the alarm of the designated line number will be reported.

Duration

Sets whether the sound of the alarm report sustains.

Time Filter

Sets the filtering time of the alarm report.

3.

Click

on the toolbar and click OK in the displayed Command Warning alert

box.

8.10.2

Viewing Alarm Report View the current alarm report content.

Procedure 1.

Select Alarm→View Report Alarm in the main menu or click

on the toolbar

to open the Report Content Display tab, as shown in Figure 8-24.

8-62

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Figure 8-24

2.

Viewing the Reported Content

(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the tab to perform the following operations:

4

Select Alarm Report Settings to open the Set Report Condition window to reset the reporting conditions.

4

Select Print All to print all information in the Report Content Display tab.

4

Select Clear All Items to delete all information in the Report Content Display tab.

4

Select Output Report to open the Output Report tab and export the reported alarms as a report. You can also set the format of the page and export the information as a XML, TXT, CSV or XLS file.

3.

Click Filter Content View to open the Filter Content View tab, as shown in Figure 8-25.

Figure 8-25

Viewing the Filter Content

The tab displays the alarm report contents according to the filtering conditions set by users. The related information of the alarm is identical with that in the Report Contents Display tab. Version: A

8-63


4.

(Optional) Right-click anywhere in the Filter Content View tab to perform the following operations:

4

Select Alarm Report Settings to open the Set Report Condition window to reset the reporting conditions.

4

Select Set Filter Condition to open the filter condition dialog box. You can set filter conditions according to the alarm level. The system selects Communication interrupted and Critical Alarm by default, as shown in Figure 8-26.

Figure 8-26

8.10.3

Setting the Filter Condition

Setting the Alarm Remote Notification After the alarm remote notification is set, the OTNM2000 will send the alarms matching the alarm reporting rules to the maintainers via email or SMS so that the maintainers can timely understand the alarm information and take measures accordingly when they are not on site.

Background Information SmsAgent is a proxy tool for SMSs and emails. It connects to the SMS center, SMS card, website or mail server and notifies the user of the alarm via SMS or email. The SmsAgent tool is embedded in the OTNM2000 and is installed upon the OTNM2000 installation.

8-64

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

Prerequisite To send the alarms to the maintainer by SMS via the SMS card, you need to install the wireless Modem first. For the installation procedures, see the documentation in the Modem accessory.

Procedure 1.

Configure the proxy service. 1)

Open the otnm.ini in the d:\OTNM\ui\ini\ directory.

2)

Set DTServerAddr under [OtnmSms] to the IP address of the OTNM2000 server and set OtnmSms_Run_Enable to 1.

3) 2.

Start the EMS_OtnmSms_Agent service.

Start the SmsAgent proxy software. Open the D:\OTNM\ui\bin\smsagent directory and double-click the SmsAgent file to start the SmsAgent proxy software.

Version: A

8-65


3.

To send the reported alarms to the maintainer via SMS, you need to set the SMS device. 1)

In the fiberhome - SmsAgent window, select Settings→Setting SMG or Card to open the SMS Device Settings dialog box.

8-66

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

2)

See Table 8-13 to set the SMS device parameters in the SMS Device Settings dialog box.

Version: A

8-67


Table 8-13

Description of the SMS Device Parameters

Parameter

Description The SMS device supports the following three types of settings:

SMS Device Settings

u

SMG

u

SMS Card

u

HTTP

Only when SMG is selected can the SMS gateway parameters be SMS gateway parameters

set. Select the SMS gateway type according to the gateway type applied. Other parameters are specified when applying for the SMS gateway. Only when SMS Card is selected can the SMS card parameters be set. Select the serial port No. from the COM No. drop-down list

SMS card parameters

according to the physical connection, enter the Telecom number in the Area Code text box, and set Baud Rate and Byte Size according to the mapping serial port properties of the device manager. Only when HTTP is select can the website parameters be set.

Website parameters

Specify the IP address and port of the proxy server for the SMS group-sending website as well as the username and password of the website account.

3) 4.

After completing the settings, click OK.

To send the reported alarms to the maintainer via email, you need to set the mail device. 1)

In the fiberhome – SmsAgent window, select Settings→Setting Mail Parameter to open the Mail Settings dialog box.

8-68

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

2)

Set the mail server parameters. ¡

Select LAN, set the mail server, mailbox username and password, and then click OK.

¡

Select RAS Dial-up, set the telephone number, dialing account and password, and then click OK.

5.

Connect to the gateway or SMS card manually.

Note: The SMS gateway may interrupt the service due to timeout, while the SMS modem interrupt the service due to hardware failure. In this situation, you can connect to the SMS device again manually. In the fiberhome – SmsAgent window, select Connection→Connect SMG or Card. A prompt appears, displaying it is connecting to the device. After the device is connected, the SMS notification is available.

8.11

Setting Alarm Audio-video Reminder Users can set the customized alarm audio-video reminder in the OTNM2000 to facilitate the maintenance.

Version: A

8-69


8.11.1

Setting the Alarm Sound Reminder Users can set different alarm sound reminders for alarms in various levels. When the new alarms occur in the OTNM2000, different alarm sounds prompt users that alarms in the corresponding levels are reported.

Procedure 1.

Click

to the right of the alarm indicator on the toolbar to open the current

alarm panel, as shown in Figure 8-27.

Figure 8-27

2.

The Current Alarm Panel

Right-click the buzzer before the alarm indicator and select Change voice file from the shortcut menu.

3.

Select the corresponding sound file and click Open.

Note: The alarm sound setting is only valid for the current client end. Other Operations Click the buzzer at the top of the current alarm panel to open the System Option Settings dialog box. See Setting Alarm-related Parameters for setting the sound broadcast strategy.

8-70

Version: A

8 Alarm Management

8.11.2

Setting the Alarm Indicator Color Users can modify the alarm indicator color of the designated alarm type to highlight the important alarms.

Procedure 1.

Select Management Tool→Alarm Management→Alarm Indicator Settings in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm Indicator Settings tab, as shown in Figure 8-28.

2.

Select the row of the alarm type whose alarm indicator color is to be modified and click

Figure 8-28

3.

in the Current colors column to select the desired color.

Setting the Alarm Indicator Color

Right-click anywhere in the Alarm Indicator Settings tab and select Save Settings from the shortcut menu.

Other Operations Right-click anywhere in the Alarm Indicator Settings tab and select Reset from the shortcut menu to restore color of the alarm indicator to the default color.

8.11.3

Setting the Alarm Flickering After the alarm flickering is set, the Main Topology tab flashes the icon of the NE upon the occurrence of the new alarm.

Version: A

8-71


Procedure 1.

Click

to enable the alarm flickering function.

Note: The alarm flickering function is disabled by default. When the alarm flickering icon appears as

8-72

, the alarm flickering function is enabled.

Version: A

9

Performance Management With powerful performance management function, the OTNM2000 can store various types of performance information of equipment in the network. Users can monitor the performance data to eliminate the potential problems in a timely manner and reduce the risks that will affect the reliable operation of the equipment.

Basic Concept Setting Performance-related Parameters Setting the Performance Parameter Collection Viewing Performance Setting Performance Query Profile Managing Performance Managing Performance History Data Managing Performance Filter Gathering Statistics of Optical Power Information Traffic Management

Version: A

9-1


9.1

Basic Concept

Current Performance and Performance History The performance includes the current performance and performance history. u

Current Performance: divided as 15-minute performance and 24-hour performance according to different monitoring periods.

4

15-minute performance: the latest 15-minute performance and the 1st to the 16th 15-minute performance.

4

24-hour performance: the latest 24-hour performance and the 1st 24-hour performance.

u

Performance history: The performance data of a period of 15 minutes or 24 hours before the query time, which is sent to the database according to the performance gathering settings.

Saving Performance When the performance history saved in the OTNM2000 exceeds a certain limit, it will influence the operations performed in the OTNM20000. The performance saving function saves the performance history data in the OTNM2000 to a specified file, improving the running performance of the OTNM2000. The OTNM2000 supports manual saving and automatic saving of performance history. u

Automatic Saving: You can set the performance history threshold and saving period (days) limit and the OTNM2000 will regularly check the performance history data. When the performance history data reaches the preset capacity or its saving period reaches the preset limit, the OTNM2000 will save the data to a designated file in the specified time.

u

Manual Saving: You can save the performance history data as a TXT file to the OTNM2000 server anytime.

9.2

Setting Performance-related Parameters You can set the performance-related parameters, including whether to save history performance query condition and whether to set the query condition before querying the performance history.

9-2

Version: A

9 Performance Management

Procedure 1.

Select System→Options to open the System Option Settings dialog box.

2.

Click Query Condition and see Table 9-1 to set the performance-related parameters in the right pane.

Table 9-1

Description of Performance-related Parameters

Menu Option Save History Performance Query Condition

When the item is selected, the system will automatically save the corresponding conditions configured during the current query. The two options are selected by default.

Set History Performance

When this item is selected, you need to set the query condition

Query Condition First

before querying performance history.

3.

Version: A

Description

Click OK.

9-3


9.3

Setting the Performance Parameter Collection The OTNM2000 only collects the performance history of the NE that has been set the performance parameter collection. To view the equipment performance history, users should set the performance parameter collection method of this equipment first.

Procedure 1.

Select Performance→Collection Task Settings in the main menu or select Management Tool→Performance Management→Collection Task Settings in the Operational Tree pane to open the Performance Collection tab.

2.

Select the desired NE or the network block in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane.

3.

Click Add in the PM Collection tab.

Note: Select the NE in the PM Collection tab and click Delete to delete the selected NE. Click Delete All to delete all NEs in the PM Collection tab. 4.

Set the time and type of the performance parameter collection in the PM Collection tab, as shown in Figure 9-1.

9-4

Version: A


Figure 9-1

Setting the Performance Collection Mode

Note: The Copy and Paste in the shortcut menu of the PM Collection tab can simplify the setting. 5.

9.4

Click Save and then Yes in the displayed Command Warning alert box.

Viewing Performance Users can know whether the equipment or service in the network is abnormal or not by viewing performances. Viewing performance also help the maintainers to handle the faults in a timely manner and prevent faults.

9.4.1

Viewing Current Performance View the performance status of equipment or service in the current network to conduct the current maintenance. Users can refresh, filter performance and check the related reports when viewing the current performance.

Version: A

9-5


Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 9-2 to open the Current Performance tab.

Table 9-2

Access Method of Viewing the Current Performance

Operation

Access Method Select Performance→Current Performance in the main menu and select the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane, and click

.

Right-click the desired network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Current Performance from the shortcut menu. Right-click the desired card in the shelf view and select Current Performance from the shortcut menu. Viewing Current

Select Management Tool→Performance Management→Current

Performance

Performance in the Operational Tree pane, select the desired project, network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

.

Select relevant submenus under the Business Management menu to open the service management tab, right-click the desired circuit or service and select Alarm/Performance Query→Query Current Performance from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Operation Object Selection dialog box, select the desired object and click OK.

2.

View the current performance information of the selected object in the Current Performance tab.

3.

(Optional) Right-click the title bar of performance list to bring up the title bar option list to select the item to be displayed, as shown in Figure 9-2.

9-6

Version: A


Figure 9-2

Option List of the Performance Title Bar

Other Operations In the Current Performance tab, right-click anywhere in the tab and select the corresponding shortcut menu to locate the performance, query accumulative performance and detect the real-time performance. For details, see Managing Performance.

9.4.2

Viewing Performance History View the performance history to obtain the abnormal performance data, so as to instruct the current routine operations. While viewing the performance history, users can refresh, filter and isolate the performance.

Prerequisite The performance collection task is set and at least one collection period (15 minutes or 24 hours) has passed.

Procedure 1.

Version: A

Select the path in Table 9-3 to open the performance history tab.

9-7


Table 9-3

Access Method of Viewing the Performance History

Operation

Access Method Click Performance→History Performance in the main menu, select the corresponding project, network block or NE in the lower pane of the Operational Tree tab and click .

.

Select Management Tool→Performance Management→History Performance in the Operational Tree pane, select the desired project, Viewing the Performance History

network block or NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click . Right-click the project, network block or NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Performance History from the shortcut menu. Select relevant submenus under the Business Management menu to open the service management tab, right-click the desired circuit or service and select Alarm/Performance Query→Query Performance History from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Operation Object Selection dialog box, select the desired object and click OK.

2.

Set filter conditions in the displayed Set Performance Query Condition dialog box and click OK.

Note: By default, you need to set the query condition before querying the performance history. See Setting Performance-related Parameters to modify the settings.

9-8

Version: A


Figure 9-3

3.

Setting the Performance Query Condition

View the performance history information of the selected object in the Performance History tab.

4.

(Optional) Right-click the title bar of performance list to bring up the title bar option list to select the item to be displayed, as shown in Figure 9-4.

Version: A

9-9


Figure 9-4

Option List of the Performance History Title Bar

Other Operations In the Performance History tab, right-click anywhere in the tab and select the corresponding shortcut menu to refresh, gather statistics of or analyze performance data. For details, see Managing Performance.

9.5

Setting Performance Query Profile To avoid setting conditions repetitively, users can save the set performance query conditions as the template for convenience of querying performance events via the template in the future.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Current Performance and Viewing Performance History for opening Current Performance / Performance History tab.

2.

Right-click anywhere in the current performance / performance history tab and select Modify Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Set Performance Query Condition dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-5.

9-10

Version: A


Figure 9-5

The Set Performance Query Condition Dialog Box

The performance in the current performance's query conditions is grayed-out, which is different from the above image. 3.

Set query conditions in the Set Performance Query Condition dialog box. Click Export... after completing setting to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 9-6.

Version: A

9-11


Figure 9-6

4.

Defining the Performance Profile Name

Enter the template name and click OK.

Note: u

The check box Only for this card can be selected when users define the performance query template of the card. The check box Only for this card is grayed out in other situations.

u

If users select the Only for this card check box, the query template can be imported only when users query the card performance.

9.6

Managing Performance After browsing the performance information, you can perform related operations as need to conveniently monitor the performance data.

9.6.1

Locating the Performance The performance locating function helps navigate to the object that generating the performance data.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Current Performance and Viewing Performance History for opening the Current Performance / Performance History tab.

9-12

Version: A


2.

Right-click the performance data and select Navigate to Logic Tree from the shortcut menu. The Logical Tree pane appears, highlighting the NE corresponding to the performance data.

9.6.2

Viewing the Accumulative Performance Accumulative performance indicates the accumulative performance value of an object since the latest power-on or performance clearing.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Current Performance for opening the Current Performance tab.

2.

Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select Accumulative Performance from the shortcut menu to view the accumulative performance of the object, as shown in Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7

9.6.3

Viewing the Accumulative Performance

Refreshing the Performance You can refresh performance data to make the performance data displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI consistent with that in the OTNM2000 performance database.

Procedure 1.


Version: A

9-13


2.

Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select the shortcut menus to perform the corresponding operations:

4

Select Refresh to obtain the newest performance data from the OTNM2000 performance database and display these data on the OTNM2000 GUI.

4

Select Auto Refresh to obtain the newest alarm data from the OTNM2000 performance database every 5 seconds and display these data on the network management GUI.

9.6.4

Filtering the Zero-value Performance You can filter the zero-value performance, that is, filter the performance whose value is 0.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select Do not display performance data whose value is 0 from the shortcut menu. The Current Performance / Performance History tab will not display the performance data whose value is 0.

9.6.5

Printing Performance Data You can print the performance data to save and analyze the device performance information.

Procedure 1.


2.

Print the performance data.

4

Print the selected rows. Right-click the selected performance data and select Print→Print Selected from the shortcut menu to print the selected performance data.

9-14

Version: A


4

Print all. Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select Print→All from the shortcut menu to print all performance data in the tab.

9.6.6

Detecting the Real-time Performance With the real-time performance detection, you can monitor the performance data of the selected resources in real time.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Current Performance for opening the Current Performance tab.

2.

Right-click in performance display area of the tab and select Real Time Performance Check from the shortcut menu.

3.

In the displayed Real Time Performance Check window, view the real-time performance of the selected object, as shown in Figure 9-8.

Figure 9-8

Version: A

Detecting the Real-time Performance

9-15


Other Operations On the menu bar and toolbar of the Real Time Performance Check window, you can select the display mode of the real-time performance data (pie chart or wave form graph) and output mode to conveniently gather statistics and analyze the realtime performance value.

9.6.7

Viewing Performance Reports You can view performance reports, set the report format and export them as an XML, TXT or CSV file.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click in the performance display area of the tab and select Export from the shortcut menu.

3.

In the displayed Range Settings dialog box, enter the report display range, which determines the number of performance entries to be displayed in the tab.

4.

In the Output Report tab, view the generated performance report, as shown in Figure 9-9.

9-16

Version: A


Figure 9-9

5.

Viewing Performance Reports

(Optional) Click the button at the bottom of the Output Report tab to set the page format and export the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XLS file.

9.6.8

Gathering Statistics of and Analyzing Performance History With the performance history statistics and analysis, you can understand the historical running status of the objects directly.

Procedure 1.

See Viewing Performance History for opening the Performance History tab.

2.

Right-click in the performance display area of the Performance History tab and select Performance Statistics and Analysis from the shortcut menu to open the Performance Statistics and Analysis tab.

3.

In the object query pane of the tab, select the desired object and view the performance statistics and analysis of the object, as shown in Figure 9-10.

Version: A

9-17


Figure 9-10

Viewing the Performance History Statistical and Analytical Report

Other Operations Select the shortcut menus to perform the corresponding operations. u

Right-click in the left pane of the Performance Statistics and Analysis tab and select Output Report from the shortcut menu to export the performance history statistics and analysis as an XML file.

u

Right-click in the right pane of the Performance Statistics and Analysis tab to set the display attribute of the performance history statistical and analytical chart.

9.6.9

Clearing Performance Data The following introduces how to clear the performance data. Clearing the performance data and then querying the performance data of the monitored object helps confirm whether the failures are eliminated.

Procedure u

9-18

Clear the performance of the network block.

Version: A


1)

Right-click the network block in the Logical Tree pane and select More Operations→Clear Part Performance Data from the shortcut menu.

2) u


Clear the NE performance. 1)

Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree tab or the Browse Tree tab or the Main Topology tab and select Performance→Clear NE Performance from the shortcut menu.

2) u


Clear the card performance. 1)

Double-click the desired NE in the Logical Tree pane and click the corresponding card in the subrack view. Then click the MASK_SETTING in the Task Panel pane on the right to open the Filter Settings.

2)

In the left lower part of the Filter Settings tab, select the type of performance to be cleared and click Clear PM. The performance types include 15-minute Performance, 24-hour Performance and Accumulative Performance.

3)

Version: A


9-19


9.6.10

Managing the Performance Help View the performance help information and customize the performance definition, so as to provide references for the maintenance engineers to deal with the performance events of the same type.

Procedure 1.


2.

Select the performance to be checked and view the information such as performance detail and performance explanation in the lower part of the tab, as shown in Figure 9-11.

Figure 9-11

3.

Checking the Performance Help

(Optional) Right-click the desired performance information and select Customize Help from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 9-12. Then enter the customized help information in the dialog box and click OK.

9-20

Version: A


Figure 9-12

4.

The Custom Reasons and Measures Dialog Box

(Optional) Select Help→Alarm and Performance Help in the main menu to open the Alarm and Performance Help tab. Select the type of performance in the left pane and the related information will display on the right, as shown in Figure 9-13.

Figure 9-13

Version: A

Checking All the Performance Help Information

9-21


Note: Click Change custom content... to record the user maintenance experience.

9.7

Managing Performance History Data When the performance history saved in the OTNM2000 exceeds a certain limit, it will influence the operations performed in the OTNM20000. The performance saving function saves the performance history data in the OTNM2000 to a specified file, improving the running performance of the OTNM2000. The OTNM2000 supports manual saving and automatic saving of performance history.

9.7.1

Saving Performance Data When the historical performance data meet the configured memory transfer conditions, the system will delete the data from the database and save it to the hard disk as files, so as to improve the operation efficiency of the OTNM2000.


Procedure 1.


2.



9-22


Version: A


Table 9-4

Data Save Parameters - Performance History



Path to Save

Settings


Save File type


u


u


Type of Save

It is 15-min Performance History by default, which cannot be edited. If the 15-minute historical performance data quantity in the

Save

database reaches this number, the data will be transferred within

Threshold

the configured time. (Unit: entry. Users can set any integer number above 0.)

Current

Displays the number of 15-minute performance history entries in

Capacity

the database.

Number of

Displays the number of 15-minute performance history entries

Entries to

that will be deleted from the database and saved to a hard disk

Sub-item

Save

when the save condition is met.

of save

Single File Capacity

Configures the number of information items saved in each file. Sets the maximum number of 15-minute historical performance

Number of

files to be transferred and stored. When the number of files

Save Files

crosses this number, the earliest file of this type will be overwritten automatically. Sets the time condition that triggers the data save of 15-minute

Time limit of

performance history. When the duration of the 15-minute

Transfer

performance history data saved in the database exceeds the

(days)

value set here, the data will be saved to another location in the specified period of time.

Sub-item of save

Version: A

Type of Save

It is 24-hour Performance History by default, which cannot be edited.

9-23


Table 9-4

Data Save Parameters - Performance History (Continued)

Configuration Item

Description If the 24-hour historical performance data quantity in the

Save

database reaches this number, the data will be transferred within

Threshold

the configured time. (Unit: entry. Users can set any integer number above 0.)

Current

Displays the number of 24-hour performance history entries in the

Capacity

database.

Number of

Displays the number of 24-hour performance history entries that

Entries to

will be deleted from the database and saved to a hard disk when

Save

the save condition is met.


Configures the number of information items saved in each file. Sets the maximum number of 24-hour historical performance files

Number of

to be transferred and stored. When the number of files crosses

Save Files

this number, the earliest file of this type will be overwritten automatically. Sets the time condition that triggers the data save of 24-hour

Time limit of

performance history. When the duration of the 24-hour

Transfer

performance history saved in the database exceeds the value set

(days)

here, the data will be saved to another location in the specified period of time.



5.

9.7.2


Saving the Performance History Data Manually You can save the specified performance history data that are stored in the OTNM2000 database to the hard disk on the OTNM2000 server as a TXT file. The data saved will not be deleted from the database

9-24

Version: A


Procedure 1.

See Viewing Performance History for opening the Performance History tab.

2.

Right-click anywhere in the Performance History tab and select PM Data Dump from the shortcut menu. The Send command successfully. alert box appears. Click OK to generate the performance data save task.

Note: You can view the generated task name in the d:\otnm\ui\job directory. 3.

Select Management Tool→Performance Management→PM Backup Management in the Operational Tree pane to open the PM Backup Management tab, as shown in Figure 9-14.

Figure 9-14

4.

The PM Backup Management Tab

Select the task and click Task Result Files to open the File Result List dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-15.

Version: A

9-25


Figure 9-15

5.

File Result List


Other Operations Delete a task or result report. 1.

Select the corresponding task and click Delete, or right-click the task to select Delete from the shortcut menu.

2.

Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the selected task.

3.

Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the result file of the task simultaneously.

Note: Click No to save the result file of the task.

9-26

Version: A


9.7.3

Managing Performance Reports Viewing the performance reports exported regularly help understand the mostconcerned performance in specified time.

Procedure 1.

Select Management Tool→Performance Management→PM-REPORT in the Operational Tree pane, select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

Figure 9-16

to open the PM-REPORT dialog box.

The PM-REPORT Dialog Box

2.

Set the relevant parameters in the dialog box as needed and click OK.

3.

After the task execution time is reached, go to the specified performance report save directory to view the exported performance report.

9.8

Managing Performance Filter Users can focus on the important performance events and filter some designated performance events to facilitate the management.

Version: A

9-27


9.8.1

Setting the Card Performance Filter After setting the card performance filter, the filtered performance will not be reported to the OTNM2000 or be displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.

Prerequisite The desired card supports the filter setting function.

Procedure 1.

Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane, click the shelf in the rack view and click the corresponding card in the shelf view. Click MASK_SETTING in the Task Panel to open the card filter window, as shown in Figure 9-17.

Figure 9-17

2.

9-28

Setting the Card Performance Filter

See Table 9-5 for setting the card performance filter.

Version: A


Table 9-5

Description of Items in the Card Performance Setting

Parameter

Description There are three filter modes, namely, Line (alarm / PM)-based Filter, Alarm- / PM-based Filter and Line Filter. u

Select Line (alarm / PM)-based Filter, select the line name and specific performance code at the right side of the pane to filter the

Filter Mode

specific performance code of the selected line. u

Click Alarm- / PM-based Filter and select the performance code and the corresponding line at the right side of pane to filter the performance code of the selected line.

u

Click Line Filter and select the line name at the right side of pane to filter the alarm and performance of the selected line.

Filter all Pm

Filters all performance events of the selected card.

Filter all Lines

Filters the alarm and performance on all lines of the selected card.

Clear Pm Filter

Clears all performance filters of the selected card. Clears the line filter of the selected card, that is, clearing the filter

Clear Line Filter

setting completed in the Line Filter mode. The filter setting completed in the Line-based Filter mode will not be influenced.

9.8.2

Clear All Filter

Clears all alarm and performance filters of the selected card.

Save

Saves the modification and clears the current GUI settings.

Cancel Modification

Cancels the modification and clears the current GUI settings.

Save to the database

Saves the filter setting to the database.

Read from Device

Reads the filter setting of the selected card from the equipment.

Save to the device

Saves the filter setting to the equipment.

Setting NE Filter Performance After setting the NE performance filter, the filtered performance events will not be reported to the OTNM2000 or be displayed on the OTNM2000 GUI.

Background Information Only the IPRAN device supports the NE performance filter function.

Version: A

9-29


Procedure 1.

Right-click the IPRAN NE in the Logical Tree pane or in the Main Topology tab and select PM→NE Mask PM from the shortcut menu to open the NE Mask PM window.

2.

Set card performance filter.

4

4

Filter all performance events of the card. a)

Select Mask All of the corresponding card and click Write To Device.

b)


Filter card performance according to line and performance codes. a)

Select the corresponding card and click Add.

b)

Set the line type, the line range and the filter code in the Add Item dialog box that appears and click OK.

Note: Mouse over the rules in the Line Range at the right side of the text box and check the setting rules of the line range in the alert box that appears. 9-30

Version: A


c)

Confirm filter parameters are set correctly in the NE Mask PM window and click Write To Device.

Version: A

9-31


d)

9.8.3


Setting the Performance History Filter You can filter the irrelevant performance history. After the performance history filter is set, the database will no longer collect the information of the related performance.

Procedure 1.

Select Performance→Performance History Filter in the main menu to open the History Performance Filter tab of the Filter Setting window, as shown in Figure 9-18.

9-32

Version: A


Figure 9-18

2.

The Filter Settings Window - Performance History

Select the performance code to be filtered in the History Performance Filter tab.

3.

Select Action→Save the current filter settings or click

on the toolbar and

click OK in the displayed alert box.

Other Operations Select the submenus under the Action main menu or right-click anywhere in the Filter Settings window to perform the following operations: u


u


u


u


u


u


u Version: A

Select Save All to save the filtering configurations on all pages. 9-33


u

9.8.4


Viewing History Performance Filter You can view the performance codes already set in the performance history filter to avoid the influence on the equipment performance monitoring caused by misconfiguration.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click anywhere in the Alarm History Filter tab and select Performance History Mask to open the History Performance Filter of the Filter Settings window, as shown below.

Figure 9-19

Viewing History Performance Filter

Other Operations Right-click any area in the Performance History Filter tab to perform the following operations:

9-34

Version: A


u


u


u

Select Setting History Alarm Filter to open the History Alarm Filter tab of the Filter Settings window.

u


u

Select Performance History Mask to open the History Performance Filter tab of the Filter Settings window and reset the performance history filter rule.

u


u

Select Set Command Log Filter to open the Command Log Filter tab of the Filter Settings window.

9.9

u


u

Select Expand All Nodes to expand all nodes in the tab.

Gathering Statistics of Optical Power Information You can gather statistics of optical power information of the query object and export the statistics as an HTML file.

Procedure 1.

Select the path in Table 9-6 to open the optical power information statistics window, as shown in Figure 9-20.

Table 9-6

Access Method of the Optical Power Statistics

Operation

Access Method Right-click the network block in the Logical Tree pane and select More Operations→Optical Power Statistics from the shortcut menu.

Viewing optical power information statistics

Right-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and select Performance→ Optical Power Statistics from the shortcut menu. Right-click the NE in the Main Topology tab and select Performance →Optical Power Statistics from the shortcut menu.

Version: A

9-35


Table 9-6

Access Method of the Optical Power Statistics (Continued)

Operation

Access Method Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and then right-click the corresponding card in the Shelf View on the right and select Optical Power Statistics from the shortcut menu.

Figure 9-20

Viewing the Optical Power Statistics

Note: When the optical power exceeds the specified threshold, it will be highlighted in red, convenient for you to locate the anomaly. 2.

(Optional) Click Output Report to export the optical power information statistics as an HTML file.

9-36

Version: A


9.10

Traffic Management The OTNM2000 supports the general management of device traffic. You can query the current traffic, traffic history and real-time traffic of the ports, fiber sections and services to analyze the bandwidth usage of the entire network, observe the network load increasing trend and make a plan for network capacity expansion and optimization in advance. The OTNM2000 traffic management includes the following functions: u

Queries the maximum and minimum traffic of the monitored object by browsing the performance history.

u

Monitors the performance of the NE at various layers, including the secondlevel performance of the port, VP layer (LSP) and VC layer (PW).

u

Supports second-level monitoring of the real-time traffic and displaying query and statistical results in table or line chart.

u

Supports long-term traffic monitoring and exporting long-term traffic monitoring data as a report or image.

u

Supports statistics of bandwidth usage, 15-minute traffic and 24-hour traffic and exporting as reports, which include the corresponding maximum, minimum and average values.

u

Supports setting the traffic thresholds and viewing the alarms of the port triggered by threshold-crossing traffic.

9.10.1

Querying the Traffic Values By browsing the current performance and performance history data, you can understand the current traffic and traffic history of the monitored object. When browsing the performance data, you can pay attention to the performance values of the following performance codes.

Version: A

u

TX_FLOW: Indicates the sent traffic.

u

MIN_TX_FLOW: Indicates the minimum sent traffic.

u

MAX_TX_FLOW: Indicates the maximum sent traffic.

u

AVERAGE_TX_FLOW: Indicates the average sent traffic. 9-37


u

RX_FLOW: Indicates the received traffic.

u

MIN_RX_FLOW: Indicates the minimum received traffic.

u

MAX_RX_FLOW: Indicates the maximum received traffic.

u

AVERAGE_RX_FLOW: Indicates the average received traffic.

u

The performance collection function is set for the monitored object.

u

The corresponding device supports this function.

Prerequisite

Procedure The following uses the 15-minute performance history as an example to introduce how to query the maximum and minimum traffic. 1.

Right-click the desired card and select Performance History.

Note: For the CiTRANS 630, CiTRANS 640 and CiTRANS 660 devices, you can query the device traffic performance on the cross-connect card. 2.

In the displayed Set Performance Query Condition dialog box, enter flow in the PM Code text box, and select the traffic-related performance codes in the Performance Code list. Then select the desired Start Time range, select the 15-minute Performance in the Performance Timestamp list and click Query.

9-38

Version: A


Figure 9-21

3.

Setting the Performance Query Condition

View the history sent / received traffic of the monitored object in the Performance History tab.

9.10.2

Monitoring the NE Traffic The OTNM2000 supports monitoring the traffic of the NE at various layers, including the port, section, LSP, PW and L2VPN. The real-time traffic, the 15 minutes or 24 hours history traffic can be monitored. The second-level monitoring is also provided as long as the card supports.

Version: A

9-39


Procedure 1.

Select Performance→Flow Monitor in the main menu or select Management Tool→Performance Tool→Flow Monitor in the Operational Tree pane. Then select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

to open the Flow Monitor window.

The Flow Monitor window contains five tabs. You can switch the tabs to view the traffic of different monitored objects. 2.

Right-click in the tabs and select the corresponding shortcut menus to query the current traffic or traffic history of different monitored object. The following example is to query the current transmitting traffic of the corresponding port in the Port Traffic Monitoring tab, and the query result is shown in Figure 9-22.

Note: u

If the query object is the LSP, PW or L2VPN service, the bandwidth usage = Traffic / (PIR x 1000000) x 100%. The unit of PIR is M, which needs to be converted to byte.

u

If the query object is the section or port, the bandwidth usage = Traffic / (Port bandwidth x 1000000) x 100%. The GE port bandwidth is 1,000M and the XGE port bandwidth is 10,000M.

9-40

Version: A


Figure 9-22

3.

Viewing the Port Traffic

(Optional) Enable the second-level sending / receiving traffic collection. 1)

Right-click in the tabs and select to enable collection of the second-level Tx / Rx traffic from the shortcut menu to open the Performance Collection Settings dialog box.

Figure 9-23

Version: A

The Performance Collection Settings Dialog Box

9-41


2)

Set the start time, end time and time interval (1 to 10 seconds are supported by the card at present) of the collection and set whether to enable the collection.

3)

Click OK. An alert box appears prompting the settings are saved successfully. Then click OK.

4.

(Optional) Right-click in the tabs and select the corresponding shortcut menus to query the second-level Tx / Rx traffic of different monitored object.

4

Select Query Performance to set the start time and time range, and click Query HistoryData to view the collected second-level history performance traffic data.

4

Deselect Query Performance to view the second-level real-time traffic data of the corresponding line.

4

Click Output Report to generate a statistical report for the traffic data and save it to the specified directory.

9-42

Version: A


9.10.3

Monitoring the Second-level Traffic The OTNM2000 supports monitoring the second-level performance of the NE at various layers, including querying the performance values of the port, VP layer (LSP) and VC layer (PW).

Prerequisite u

The corresponding device supports this function.

u

The EMS_PmDataGather service has been started.

1.

Set the second-level real-time performance collection task.

Procedure

1)

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→Performance Management→Card Performance Collection Settings.

2)


3)

Select the corresponding card in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane according to the prompt information and click

to open the Card

Performance Collection Settings tab. The Card Performance Collection Settings tab lists the real-time performance and line No. information of the selected card(s). 4)

In the Card Performance Collection Settings tab, set the start / end time and duration of the card real-time performance collection. In the real-time performance list that the card supports, select the Switch of the desired performance.

Version: A

9-43


5)

Right-click anywhere in the Card Performance Collection Settings tab and select Save Condition Settings from the shortcut menu.

6) 2.


View the second-level real-time performance collection data. 1)

In the Operational Tree pane, select Management Tool→Performance Management→View Card Performance Collection to open the View Card Performance Collection tab.

2)

Right-click the corresponding line and select View Chart of Collected Performance from the shortcut menu.

3)

9-44

View the collected data of the selected line in the displayed window.

Version: A


¡

Select View History Collection Data to set the start time and time range, and click View History Statistical Data to view the collected second-level history performance traffic data.

¡

Deselect View History Collection Data to view the second-level realtime traffic data of the corresponding line.

¡

Click Generate Statistical Report to generate a statistical report for the traffic data and save it to the specified directory.

9.10.4

Monitoring the Port Real-time Traffic The following introduces how to monitor the real-time traffic of the port.

Procedure 1.

Click the desired card in the shelf view and select Card Description in the Rack View pane on the right. Then right-click the port in the Port List and select the corresponding shortcut menu to query the current sent / received traffic of the port. The following introduces how to query the current Tx traffic of a port.

Version: A

9-45


Note: The CiTRANS 640 supports the performance mapping function. If the function is enabled, you can query the traffic information on the actual card.

Related Operations Enable the performance mapping function. 1.

Open the otnm.ini in the d:\otnm\ui\ini\ directory.

2.

Set PERFORMANCE_MAPPING_ENABLE to 1, and then save and close the otnm.ini file.

3.

9-46

Restart the EMS_Dtserver service.

Version: A


9.10.5

Monitoring the Long-term Traffic The OTNM2000 supports monitoring the long-term traffic and exporting long-term traffic monitoring data as a report or image.

Procedure 1.

Set the long-term traffic monitoring task. Select Performance→Long-term traffic monitoring settings to open the Long-term traffic monitoring settings tab, and then set the monitoring conditions, including monitored object range, saving period of monitoring and saving path of the long-term traffic data.

Version: A

9-47


Note: u

After the above settings are completed, the system will obtain the performance history data of the previous day from the database at 4 o'clock every morning according to the specified monitoring conditions. Then it computes the daily, weekly and monthly data and then save the data into files.

u

The file saving path cannot be modified once set. As modifying the file saving path will cause loss of previous data, the Saving path drop-down list will be greyed out after it is set.

2.

View long-term traffic and export it into a report / image. 1)

Double-click the NE in the Logical Tree pane and click the corresponding card in the shelf view.

2)

Click the Card Description tab in the right pane.

3)

In the Card Description tab, right-click a port in the Port List textbox and select View Long-term Receive Flow or View Long-term Send Flow.

4)

View the long-term traffic monitoring data in the displayed window. Select the submenus under Operate→Go to view the 15-minute traffic, daily traffic, weekly traffic or monthly traffic respectively.

5)

Select the submenus under the Output menu to export the traffic data as a report or an image.

9.10.6

Setting the Traffic Threshold The CiTRANS 600 series devices support setting traffic thresholds and reporting alarms triggered by threshold-crossing traffic.

Prerequisite The corresponding device supports this function.

9-48

Version: A


Procedure 1.

Click the desired card in the shelf view and click Card Configuration in the Task Panel pane.

2.

In the card configuration pane, select the corresponding tab to open the Traffic Threshold Settings window according to Table 9-7.

Table 9-7

The Traffic Threshold Setting Access Method of the Card

Card

Access Method

XSJ2

Line-Phy-Other-Config

GSJ2

LINE-Physical-Interface-Config

XCUJ2

GE-Port-Config

MPTN1

WAN-Config, LAN-Port-Config

XCUM2, XCUM1, XCUK1 and XCUK2

SYS-Interface-Senior-Config

3.

Set the traffic threshold as needed, as shown in the following figure: The unit of traffic threshold is Percent. If the traffic threshold is set to 1, the XSJ2 card is the 10GE card and 1% indicates 100M. For the MPTN1 card, the WAN interface is 1000M and 1% indicates 10M, while the LAN interface is 100M and 1% indicates 1M.

Figure 9-24

4.

Setting the Traffic Threshold

In the card configuration pane, select the Global-Config tab to set the "FlowExceed-Alarm-Delay-Time", as shown in the following figure.

Version: A

9-49


When "Flow-Exceed-Alarm-Delay-Time" is set to 0, the threshold-crossing alarm will be reported right after its occurrence; when the parameter is set to 10, the threshold-crossing alarm will be reported 10 seconds after its occurrence.

Figure 9-25

5.

Setting the Delayed Time to Report the Threshold-crossing Alarm

Click Write to Device and click OK in the displayed Command Warning alert box.When the settings are completed, the device will report the thresholdcrossing alarm once the traffic of the port exceeds the specified threshold, as shown in Figure 9-26.

Figure 9-26

9-50

Viewing Threshold-crossing Alarms

Version: A

10

Log Management The log records the operation information and important events in the OTNM2000. Users can query and output log information via the log management function.

Log Management Policy Viewing Command Logs Viewing User Logs Viewing Business Logs Viewing EMU Logs Viewing Reported Events Uploading NE Device Logs Managing the Command Log Filter Saving Command Logs

Version: A

10-1


10.1

Log Management Policy The security management of logs includes command log management, user log management, service log management, EMU log management, command log filter and command log save management.

Command Logs The command logs records the server operations performed in the OTNM2000 client and the operations that may influence the OTNM2000 security, such as creating NEs and confirming alarms. By viewing the OTNM2000 operation logs, you can accurately understand the operations performed in the OTNM2000 client, convenient for you to trace and check the user operations. This provides support to eliminating misoperations.

User Logs The user logs record the operations performed in the OTNM2000 that influence the OTNM2000 security, such as login, exit and unlocking. By viewing the OTNM2000 security logs, you can precisely understand the operations performed in the OTNM2000 client that influence the OTNM2000 security. Querying user logs regularly effectively ensures the security of the OTNM2000.

Business Logs The business logs record the service-related operations performed in the OTNM2000, such as querying service data and creating circuits. By viewing the OTNM2000 business logs, you can accurately understand the service-related operations performed in the OTNM2000 client, convenient for you to trace and check the user operations. This provides support to eliminating misoperations.

EMU Logs The EMU logs record the delivering object, time, command name and other information of the EMU commands, which facilitate the tracing, checking and fault isolating of the user operations. Only a part of the OTN equipment supports the function of viewing EMU log.

10-2

Version: A

10 Log Management

Command Log Filter The filtered command logs will not be saved into the database.

Command Log Saving When the command logs saved in the OTNM2000 exceeds a certain limit, it will influence the operations performed in the OTNM20000. The command log saving function can be used to remove the command logs from the database to a specified file, which improves the running performance of the OTNM2000. The OTNM2000 supports triggering the alarm saving function by the number of records or saving time. u

Saving triggered by number of records: You can set the command log threshold and the OTNM2000 will regularly check the command logs. When the command log data reach the preset capacity, the OTNM2000 will save the data to a designated file in the specified time.

u

Saving triggered by saving time: You can set the saving period (days) of command logs. When the command log data saved in the database reach the preset the time period, the OTNM2000 will save the data to a designated file in the specified time.

10.2

Viewing Command Logs The command logs record the user operations, facilitating tracing, checking and fault isolating of the user operations.

Procedure 1.

Select Security→View Command Log in the main menu or select Management Tool→System Management→Log View→View Command Log in the Operational Tree pane. Then select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

to open the View Command

Log tab.

Version: A

10-3


Figure 10-1

2.

Viewing Command Logs

(Optional) Set the query conditions to find out the command log which accords with the set conditions. 1)

Right-click the log displaying area in the View Command Log tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Query Condition dialog box.

2)

Set the new query conditions as needed, and click OK.

Other Operations u

Delete command logs. Right-click the log to be deleted and select Delete from the shortcut menu to delete the selected log.

Note: Only the users having the Delete Logs authority can delete command logs and the operation of deleting logs will be recorded in the command log. 10-4

Version: A

10 Log Management

u

Output the command log information.

4

Right-click the log displaying area in the View Command Log tab and select Output Report from the shortcut menu to display the log information in the current page in the form of report. You can set the format of the page and output the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XSL file.

4

Right-click the log displaying area in the View Command Log tab and select Print All from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK to print the all command log information.

4

Right-click the command log to be printed and select Print the Selected from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK to print the selected command log information.

u

Refresh the command logs. Right-click the log displaying area in the View Command Log tab and select Refresh from the shortcut menu to refresh the command logs.

10.3

Viewing User Logs The user logs enables you to understand the security operation information of the OTNM2000. Querying user logs regularly effectively guarantees the security of the OTNM2000.

Procedure 1.

Select Security→View User Log in the main menu or select Management Tool→System Management→Log View→View User Log in the Operational Tree pane. Then select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

Version: A

to open the View User Log tab.

10-5


Figure 10-2

2.

Viewing User Logs

(Optional) Set the query conditions to find out the user log which accords with the set conditions. 1)

Right-click the log displaying area in the View User Log tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Query Condition dialog box.

2)


Other Operations u

Delete user logs. Right-click the log to be deleted and select Delete from the shortcut menu to delete the selected log.

Note: Only the users having the Delete Logs authority can delete user logs and the operation of deleting logs will be recorded in the command log.

10-6

Version: A

10 Log Management

u

Output the user log information.

4

Right-click the log displaying area in the View User Log tab and select Output Report from the shortcut menu to display the log information in the current page in the form of report. You can set the format of the page and output the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XSL file.

4

Right-click the log displaying area in the View User Log tab and select Print All from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK to print the all user logs.

4

Right-click the user log to be printed and select Print the Selected from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK to print the selected user log.

u

Refresh user logs. Right-click the log displaying area in the View User Log tab and select Refresh from the shortcut menu to refresh the user logs.

10.4

Viewing Business Logs By viewing the OTNM2000 business logs, you can accurately understand the service-related operations performed in the OTNM2000 client, convenient for you to trace and check the user operations. This provides support to eliminating misoperations.

Procedure 1.

Select Security→View Business Log in the main menu to open the View Business Log tab.

2.

Version: A

View the service logs in the View Business Log tab.

10-7


Figure 10-3

10.5

Viewing Business Logs

Viewing EMU Logs The EMU logs record the delivering object, time, command name and other information of the EMU commands, which facilitate the tracing, checking and fault isolating of the user operations.

Background Information Only a part of the OTN equipment supports the function of viewing EMU log.

Procedure 1.

Select Security→View EMU Log in the main menu or select Management Tool→System Management→Log View→View EMU Log in the Operational Tree pane. Then select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

2.

to open the View EMU Log tab.

(Optional) Set the query conditions to find out the EMU command log which accords with the set conditions. 1)

Right-click the log displaying area in the View EMU Log tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu to open the Query Condition dialog box.

10-8

Version: A

10 Log Management

2)


Other Operations u

Output the EMU command log information.

4

Right-click the log displaying area in the View EMU Log tab and select Output Report from the shortcut menu to display the log information in the current page in the form of report. You can set the format of the page and output the report as an XML, TXT, CSV or XSL file.

4

Right-click the log displaying area in the View EMU Log tab and select Print All from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK to print all EMU command logs.

4

Right-click the EMU log to be printed and select Print the Selected from the shortcut menu. Set the parameters in the Print dialog box and click OK to print the selected EMU command log.

u

Refresh the EMU command logs. Right-click the log displaying area in the View EMU Log tab and select Refresh from the shortcut menu to refresh the EMU logs.

10.6

Viewing Reported Events Users can know about the equipment current operating status via viewing report events.

Procedure 1.

Select Security→View Report Event in the main menu to open the Report Event tab and view the events related to the ASON equipment.

Version: A

10-9


2.

(Optional) Right-click any area in the Report Event tab and select Query Condition from the shortcut menu to set the reporting time range of the events and click Query to display the reported events in the specified time range.

Note: You can select System→Network Status Monitor in the main menu and click Event in the Network Status Monitor tab to view the information of related events.

10.7

Uploading NE Device Logs You can view the NE device logs to isolate the device failures.

Background Information Only the IPRAN NE supports uploading NE device logs.

Procedure 1.

Right-click the corresponding NE and select Config→NE Device Log to upload the NE device logs.

10.8

Managing the Command Log Filter Managing the command log filter includes setting the command log filter and viewing the command log filter.

10.8.1

Setting the Command Log Filter You can filter the alarms no longer needed. The filtered command logs will not be saved into the database.

Procedure 1.


10-10

Version: A

10 Log Management

2.

Right-click anywhere in the Alarm History Filter tab and select Set the Command Log Filter to open the Command Log Filter of the Filter Settings window, as shown in Figure 10-4.

Figure 10-4

The Filter Settings Window - Command Logs

3.

Select the command types to be filtered in the Command Log Filter tab.

4.

Select Action→Save the current filter settings click

on the toolbar and click

OK in the displayed alert box.

Other Operations Select the submenus under the Action main menu or right-click anywhere in the Filter Settings window to perform the following operations: u


u


u


u


u


u


Version: A

10-11


10.8.2

u

Select Save All to save the filtering configurations on all pages.

u


Viewing the Command Log Filter You can view the command types already set in the command log filter to avoid the influence caused by misconfiguration on the equipment security monitoring.

Procedure 1.


2.

Right-click anywhere in the Alarm History Filter tab and select View Command Log Filter. In the Command Log Filter window, view the command log filter information.

Other Operations Right-click anywhere in the Command Log Filter tab to perform the following operations: u


u


u

Select Setting History Alarm Filter to open the History Alarm Filter tab of the Filter Setting window.

u


u

Select Performance History Mask to open the History Performance Filter tab of the Filter Setting window and reset the performance history filter rule.

u


u

Select Set Command Log Filter to open the Command Log Filter tab of the Filter Setting window.

10-12

u


u

Select Expand All Nodes to expand all nodes in the tab. Version: A

10 Log Management

10.9

Saving Command Logs When the command logs meet the configured memory transfer conditions, the system will delete the data from the database and save it to the hard disk as files, so as to improve the operation efficiency of the OTNM2000.


Procedure 1.


2.




Table 10-1

Description of the Parameters in the Save Data Tab - Command Logs



Path to Save

Settings


Save File type


u


u


Sub-item of save Version: A

Type of Save

It is Command Log by default, which cannot be edited. 10-13


Table 10-1

Description of the Parameters in the Save Data Tab - Command Logs (Continued)

Configuration Item Save Threshold Current Capacity

Description If the command log quantity in the database reaches this number, the data will be transferred within the configured time. (Unit: entry. Users can set any integer number above 0.) Displays the number of alarm history entries in the database.

Number of

Displays the number of command logs that will be deleted from

Entries to

the database and saved to a hard disk when the save condition

Save

is met.


Configures the number of information items saved in each file. Sets the maximum number of command log files to be

Number of

transferred and stored. When the number of files crosses this

Save Files

number, the earliest file of this type will be overwritten automatically.

Time limit of Transfer (days)

Sets the time condition that triggers the data save of command logs. When the duration of the command logs saved in the database exceeds the value set here, the data will be saved to another location in the specified period of time.



5.

10-14


Version: A

11

Statistical Management The OTNM2000 provides the statistical management and supports the setting of task statistics of the equipment status, the bandwidth utilization ratio and traffic.

Access Method of the Menu

Service Data Query Report Stock Statistics Alarm Statistics Version: A

11-1


PM Statistics Managing VOA Status Statistics IP Statistics Viewing the Opposite End Port Information Viewing Software Version Viewing IP Configuration

11-2

Version: A

11 Statistical Management

11.1

Service Data Query Report The Statistics menu provides the Service Data Query Report function, which enables you to query various data statistics related to configured services and export the statistical information as a report in the specified format.

11.1.1

Gathering Statistics of Link Resource Usage The Link Resource Usage window includes the Timeslot Usage, Bandwidth Usage and Wavelength Usage.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→Link Resource Usage in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

Select the desired link in the left pane of the Link Resource Usage window.

4

If you select All Links, the system will query the resources of all links.

4

Click

of Start NE to select the start NE. The link resource list displays

the links related to the start NE, as shown in the following figure:

Version: A

11-3


3.

In the link resource list, select the desired link and click

, as shown in

the following figure:

11-4

Version: A


4.

Click the Export Report button, as shown in the following figure:

5.

Click the

drop-down list of Transfer Type and select the file type.

Note: Click Preview to view the file pattern of the selected transfer type. 6.

11.1.2

Enter File Name and click Save.

Gathering Statistics of Circuits on the Link You can gather statistics of the circuit information on the selected link, including Link Name, Cross-connect Resource, Path Code, Path Name, Path Direction, Network Type, Service Layer, Client Name and Route Info.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→Circuit Statistics on Link in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

Select the desired link in the left pane of the Circuit Statistics on Link window.

4

If you select All Links, the system will query the resources of all links.

4

Click

of Start NE to select the start NE. The link resource list displays

the links related to the start NE, as shown in the following figure:

Version: A

11-5


3.

In the link resource list, select the desired link and click

, as shown in

the following figure:

4.

11-6


Version: A


5.

Click the



11.1.3


Gathering Statistics of the Tributary Port Usage of the NE You can gather statistics of the tributary port usage of the NE, including NE, Slot, Port, Port Type, Timeslot Usage and Bandwidth Usage.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→NE-Tributary-Port Usage in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

Version: A

Select the desired NE and click

, as shown in the following figure:

11-7


Note: In case there are massive data, click Previous Page or Next Page to view all data. 3.


4.

Click the



11.1.4


Gathering Statistics of the Tributary Port Circuit of the NE You can gather statistics of basic information and related circuit information of the NE tributary port.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→Tributary-Port Circuit Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

11-8

Version: A


2.



3.


4.

Click the



Version: A


11-9


11.1.5

Gathering Statistics of Circuits Between NEs You can gather statistics of circuit information between the source NE and the sink NE, including the SDH Circuit Type, PTN Circuit Type and OTN Circuit Type.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→Paths Between NEs in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

11-10



Version: A


3.


4.

Click the



11.1.6


Gathering Statistics of NE Cross-connect Capacity The following introduces how to gather statistics of the cross-connect capability of the online NE.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→NE Cross-connect Capacity in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

Version: A



11-11


3.


4.

Click the



11.1.7


Gathering Statistics of the NE Port Usage You can gather statistics of the NE port usage, including the Port Type, Total Ports, Idle Ports and Port Usage.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→NE Port Usage Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

11-12

Version: A


2.



3.


4.

Click the



Version: A


11-13


11.1.8

Gathering Statistics of the NE Port Protection LSP The following introduces how to query the quantity of the NE port protection LSP.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→NE Port Protection LSP in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

11-14

2.



3.


4.

Click the


Version: A



11.1.9


Gathering Statistics of the NE VPWS The following introduces how to query the quantity of the NE VPWS.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→NE VPWS Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

Version: A



11-15


3.


4.

Click the



11.1.10


Gathering Statistics of the NE VPLS The following introduces how to query the quantity of the NE VPLS.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→NE VPLS Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

11-16

Version: A


2.



3.


4.

Click the



Version: A


11-17


11.1.11

Gathering Statistics of the Port Service Traffic The following introduces how to gather statistics of the service traffic of the port.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→Port Flow Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

Select the desired NE port in the left pane of the Port Flow Statistics tab.

4

If you select All NE Ports, the system will gather statistics of the traffic of all NE ports.

4

Click the NE and Port drop-down lists to select the desired NE and port, as shown in the following figure:

11-18

Version: A


3.

Version: A

Click


11-19


4.


5.

Click the



11.1.12


Gathering Statistics of the PTN Services /Labels The following introduces how to gather statistics of the ingress or egress PTN services / labels.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→PTN Service/Label Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

11-20

Version: A


2.



3.


4.

Click the



Version: A


11-21


11.1.13

Querying Services at L2 / L3 Bridge Point The following introduces how to query the services at L2 / L3 bridge point.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→L2/L3 bridge access point in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

For procedures of querying services and exporting reports, see Step 2 to 5 in Gathering Statistics of the PTN Services /Labels.

11.1.14

Querying PTN NE LSR ID Addresses The following introduces how to query the PTN NE LSR ID addresses.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→Query PTN NE LSR ID in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

11-22

Version: A


2.

Select the desired PTN NE and click

, as shown in the following

figure:

3.

Version: A

Modify the IP Address of the NE. 1)

Double-click the IP Address entry of the NE.

2)

Re-enter the IP address.

11-23


3)

Click Duplicate Detection to detect whether conflicting LSR ID exists, as shown in the following figure:

4)

11-24

Click Modify, as shown in the following figure:

Version: A


Caution: When the IP address conflicts after being modified, click Duplicate Detection. The NEs with conflicting LSR IDs will be highlighted in green. In this situation, the modification operation cannot be performed, as shown in the following figure:

4.


5.

Click the



11.1.15


Querying the Used Labels This function is used to gather statistics of labels used by the configured circuits.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→Used Label Information in the main menu, as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

11-25


2.

Export the Label Continuous Interval Report. 1)

In the Used Label Information tab, click the Label Continuous Interval Report button, as shown in the figure below:

2)

Click the


Note: Click Preview to view the file pattern of the selected transfer type. 3) 3.


Adjust the label. 1)

In the Used Label Information tab, click the Adjust Label button, as shown in the figure below:

11-26

Version: A


2)

In the Adjust Label dialog box, click the radio button

to select the Path

Type. 3)

Enter the To be Adjusted Label according to the exported Label Continuous Interval Report information.

4.

4)

Enter the Adjusted Label Start according to the requirement planning.

5)

Click the Adjusted Label and Report Export button.

Export the Used Label Information Report. 1)

In the Used Label Information tab, click the Export Report button.

2)

Click the


Note: Click Preview to view the file pattern of the selected transfer type. 3)

11.1.16


Querying L2VPN Reports You can query the L2VPN data information, including Path Name, Path Basic Attributes, Circuit Flow Properties and Circuit Tunnel/PW Properties.

Version: A

11-27


Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→L2VPN in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

In the L2VPN filter dialog box, enter the filter information according to your needs and click Filter, as shown in the following figure:

11-28

Version: A


3.

In L2VPN Report tab, click

4.

Click the Export Report button.

5.

Click the

to filter the L2VPN entries again.



11.1.17


Gathering Statistics of the OAM&BFD Enabling Reports The following introduces how to gather statistics of the OAM&BFD enabling information of the protected tunnel.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→OAM&BFD Enable Report in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

Version: A

11-29


2.


3.

Click the



11.1.18


Gathering Statistics of the OTN Station Capacity The following introduces how to gather statistics of the OTN station capacity.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→OTN Station Capacity in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

11-30

Version: A


2.


3.


4.

Click the




Version: A


11-31


11.1.19

Gathering Statistics of OTN Wavelength Resources The following introduces how to gather statistics of OTN wavelength resources.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→OTN Wavelength Resource in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

11-32

2.


3.


4.

Click the



Version: A



11.1.20


Querying the Protection Information You can query the details of protection circuits.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Service Data Query Report→Protection Information in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.


3.

Click the



Version: A


11-33


11.2

Stock Statistics You can gather statistics of data in use at a specified time.

11.2.1

Gathering Statistics of NEs You can gather statistics of basic information of all NEs in the OTNM2000 system, including NE Name, NE Type, EMU Card Type, NE No., Switch, NEIP, etc.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→NE Statistic in the main menu to open the NE Statistic tab, which displays the data of all NEs, as shown in the following figure:

2.

Click Filter and enter the keyword in the Text Filter text box. The system automatically lists the NEs related to the keyword, as shown in the following figure:

11-34

Version: A


3.

Click Export and enter the output information in the Option dialog box, as shown in the following figure:

4.

Click OK to export the report.

5.

In the NE Statistics tab, select any NE entry and click Locate Shelf. The NE Information tab appears, locating the subrack of the selected NE.

6.

In the NE Statistics tab, select any NE entry and click Locate Topo. The Main Topology tab appears, locating the selected NE.

11.2.2

Gathering Statistics of Cards You can gather statistics of basic information of all cards in the system, including Card Name, Card Type, Card Address, Rack Name, Shelf Name, etc.

Version: A

11-35


Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Board Statistic in the main menu to open the Board Statistic tab, which lists the card information of all cards, as shown in the following figure:

2.

See Gathering Statistics of NEs to perform Steps 2 to 6 to exporting the statistical report.

11.2.3

Gathering Statistics of Slots You can gather statistics of slot information of all NEs in the system, including Object Name, Slot Total Counts and Idle Slot Counts.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Slot Used Statistic in the main menu to open the Slot Used Statistic tab, which lists the slot information of all NEs, as shown in the following figure:

11-36

Version: A


2.


11.2.4

Gathering Statistics of Serial Numbers The SN Statistics allows you to only export the device SNs read by the system as reports, but also perform the Expand/Collapse OP, Sync, Download, Read, Write and Import operations.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→SN Statistics in the main menu to open the SN Statistics tab, which lists the SNs of all the devices. as shown in the figure below:

Version: A

11-37


2.


Extended Functions The extended functions in the SN Statistics tab are described in Table 11-1. Table 11-1

Introduction to Extended Functions

Button Expand / Collapse OP

Expand or collapse the module SN in the statistics list.

Sync

Read SN from the device.

Download

Write the SN into the device.

Read

Read data from the database.

Write

Write data into the database.

Import

11.2.5

Function

Import the SN report file exported previously into the OTNM2000.

Gathering Statistics of NE Fiber Connections The statistics of NE fiber connections includes Source/Destination NE, Source/ Destination Port and Source/Destination Port Mark.

11-38

Version: A


Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→NE Link Info Statistics in the main menu, as shown in the following figure:

2.

Select the desired NE in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click , as shown in the following figure:

Version: A

11-39


3.

In the NE Link Information List tab, click the Export to CSV File button.

4.

Select the save path and enter the file type in the displayed Save as dialog box, and then click Save.

11.3

Alarm Statistics The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of device-related alarms and outputting reports.

11.3.1

Alarm Filter Statistics The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of lines whose alarms are filtered and outputting the CSV reports.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Alarm Filter Statistics in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→Alarm Statistics→Alarm Filter Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm Filter Statistics tab.

2.

Select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click Add or right-click anywhere in the Alarm Filter Statistics tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-1.

11-40

Version: A


Figure 11-1

3.

The Add Dialog Box - Alarm Filter Statistics

See Table 11-2 to set the statistical task parameters.

Table 11-2

Description of Alarm Filter Statistics Parameters

Parameter

Description Task Name Task Enable

Sets the name of the statistics task. Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by default. Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is by default. u

Basic setting

The system automatically executes the statistics task at the designated time when the

Task Type

Timing Run is selected. u

The system executes the statistics task in the Running Time when the Manual Run is selected.

File Output

Version: A

Sets the output format of the file and CSV is by default.

11-41


Table 11-2

Description of Alarm Filter Statistics Parameters (Continued)

Parameter

Description u

If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time are used to set the time range of the timing task and show the statistics time range of the alarm filter information.

Task Time Setting

u

If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time should not be later than the current time and are used to set the statistics time range of the alarm filter information.

Running Time is the time for executing the Timing Run task and Manual Run task. Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is selected for the task type. Sets the period of executing the task and there are two types including Day and Week. Task Period

u


u


Sets the desired alarm filter type, including Line No Filter Type Setting

with all the alarms filter and Line No with part of alarms filter.

4.

Click OK and view the statistical task in the Alarm Filter Statistics tab.

5.

(Optional) Select the corresponding statistical task and click Modify or rightclick the desired task and select Modify from the shortcut menu. See Table 11-2 to modify the parameters and click OKTable 11-2.

6.

(Optional) Select the corresponding statistical task and click Delete or rightclick the desired task and select Delete from the shortcut menu. See the alert box to select the corresponding operation.

11-42

Version: A


4

Click Yes in the displayed alert box to delete the selected task and its result report.

7.

4

Click No in the displayed alert box to delete the selected task only.

4

Click Cancel in the displayed alert box to cancel the operation.

Select the desired statistical task and click Task Result Files or right-click the desired task and select Task Result Files from the shortcut menu to open the File Result List dialog box.

8.

Select the file to be checked and click OK to save the selected file to the designated directory.

11.3.2

Gathering Statistics of Alarm History The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of alarm history and outputting the CSV reports.

Prerequisite The task of exporting all alarm history is set. See Exporting All Alarm History Data.

Procedure 1.

Select Management Tool→Statistics→Alarm Statistics→Alarm History Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the Alarm History Statistics tab, as shown in the following figure:

Version: A

11-43


2.

Select any entry in the Alarm History Statistics tab and click Task Result Files, as shown in the following figure:

3.

11-44

Select the file and click Save as.

Version: A


11.4

PM Statistics The OTNM2000 supports the performance statistics of the equipment and outputs the related report.

11.4.1

Managing Bandwidth Usage Statistics The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of device bandwidth usage and outputs the report in the format of CSV or HTML.

Procedure 1.

Select StatisticsPM StatisticsBandwidth Utilization Statistics Management in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→PM Statistics→ Bandwidth Utilization Statistics Management in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane to open the Bandwidth Utilization Statistics Management tab.

2.

Select the object in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane. Click Add or right-click any area of the Bandwidth Utilization Statistics Management tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-2.

Version: A

11-45


Figure 11-2

3.

The Add Dialog Box - Bandwidth Utilization Ratio Statistics

See Table 11-3 to set the statistical task parameters in the Add dialog box.

Table 11-3

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the Bandwidth Usage

Statistics Description

Parameter Task Name

Sets the name of the statistics task.

Task Enable

Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by default. Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is by

Basic

default.

setting Task Type

u

The system automatically executes the statistics task at the designated time when the Timing Run is selected.

u


11-46

Version: A


Table 11-3

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the Bandwidth Usage

Statistics (Continued) Description

Parameter File Output

Sets the file output formats and includes CSV and HTML; CSV is by default. u

If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time are used to set the time range of the timing task and show the statistics time range of the bandwidth utilization ratio.

Task Time

u

Setting

If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time should not be later than the current time and are used to set the statistics time range of the history data of the bandwidth utilization ratio.


u


u


Only displays the fiber-

When this item is selected, the Object Selection List dialog box

Object type

connected

only displays the fiber-connected port.

setting

port.

4.

Packet loss

Sets the type of the port whose packet loss rate is to be included

rate statistics

in the statistics.

Click Run and select the object in the Object Selection List dialog box, as shown in the following figure:

Version: A

11-47


5.

Click OK and check the statistics task in the Bandwidth Utilization Statistics Management tab.

6.

(Optional) Select the corresponding statistical task and click Modify or rightclick the desired task and select Modify from the shortcut menu. See Table 11-3 to modify the parameters and click Run.

7.

(Optional) Select the corresponding statistical task and click Delete or rightclick the desired task and select Delete from the shortcut menu. See the following alert box to select the corresponding operation.

4

Click OK in the displayed Delete the selected task? alert box. The Delete the result file simultaneously? alert box appears, as shown in the following figure:

11-48

Version: A


Note: u

Click Yes to delete both the task and result file.

u

Click No to delete the task only, with the result file reserved.

4

Click Cancel in the displayed Delete the selected task? alert box to cancel the operation.

8.


9.


11.4.2

Managing 15-minute Traffic Statistics The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of equipment 15-minute traffic and outputs the report in the format of CSV or HTML.

Procedure 1.

Select StatisticsPM Statistics15min Traffic Statistics Management in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→PM Statistics→15min Traffic Statistics Management in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane to open the 15min Traffic Statistics Management tab.

2.

Select the object in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane and click Add or right-click any area of the 15min Traffic Statistics Management tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-3.

Version: A

11-49


Figure 11-3

3.

The Add Dialog Box - 15min Traffic Statistics


Table 11-4

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 15min Traffic Statistics Description

Parameter Task Name


Task Enable

Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by default. Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is

Basic

by default.

setting Task Type

u


u


11-50

Version: A


Table 11-4

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 15min Traffic Statistics

(Continued) Description



If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time are used to set the time range of the timing task and show the statistics time range of the 15-minute traffic.

Task Time

u

Setting

If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time should not be later than the current time and are used to set the statistics time range of the history data of the 15-minute traffic.


u


u


Only displays Object type setting

4.

the fiberconnected port.

When this item is selected, the Object Selection List dialog box only displays the fiber-connected port.

Packet loss rate

Sets the type of the port whose packet loss rate is to be

statistics

included in the statistics.


Version: A

11-51


5.

Click OK and check the statistics task in the 15min Traffic Statistics Management tab.

6.


7.


4


11-52

Version: A


Note: u


u


4


8.


9.


11.4.3

Managing 24-hour Traffic Statistics The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of equipment 24-hour traffic and outputs the report in the format of CSV or HTML.

Procedure 1.

Select StatisticsPM Statistics24hour Traffic Statistics Management in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→PM Statistics→24hour Traffic Statistics Management in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane to open the 24hour Traffic Statistics Management tab.

2.

Select the object in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane and click Add or right-click any area of the 24hour Traffic Statistics Management tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-4.

Version: A

11-53


Figure 11-4

3.

The Add Dialog Box - 24hour Traffic Statistics


Table 11-5

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 24-hour Traffic Statistics Description

Parameter Task Name


Task Enable


Basic

default.

setting Task Type

u


u


11-54

Version: A


Table 11-5

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the 24-hour Traffic Statistics

(Continued) Description



If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time are used to set the time range of the timing task and show the statistics time range of the 24-hour traffic.

Task Time

u

Setting

If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time should not be later than the current time and are used to set the statistics time range of the history data of the 24-hour traffic.


u


u


Only displays Object type setting

4.

the fiber-

When this item is selected, the Object Selection List dialog box

connected

only displays the fiber-connected port.

port. Packet loss

Sets the type of the port whose packet loss rate is to be included

rate statistics

in the statistics.


Version: A

11-55


5.

Click OK and check the statistics task in the 24hour Traffic Statistics Management tab.

6.


7.


4


11-56

Version: A


Note: u


u


4


8.


9.


11.4.4

Managing Device Environment Parameter Statistics The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of device environment parameters and outputs the report in the format of CSV.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Device Environment Parameters Statistics in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→PM Statistics→Device Environment Parameters Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the Device Environment Parameters Statistics tab.

2.

Select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click Add or right-click anywhere in the Device Environment Parameters Statistics tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-5.

Version: A

11-57


Figure 11-5

3.

The Add Dialog Box - Device Environment Parameter Statistics


Table 11-6

Description of Device Environment Parameters Statistics Description

Parameter Task Name Basic setting Task Enable

11-58

Sets the name of the statistics task. Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by default.

Version: A


Table 11-6

Description of Device Environment Parameters Statistics (Continued) Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is by default. u

The system automatically executes the statistics task at the designated time when the Timing Run

Task Type

is selected. u


File Output

Sets the output format of the file to CSV. u

If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time are used to set the time range of the timing task and show the statistics time range of the device environment parameters.

Task Time Setting

u

If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time should not be later than the current time and are used to set the statistics time range of device environment parameters.


u


u


Device Environment Parameter Settings

4.

Select the device environment parameters to be included in the statistics, including TEMP, BOARD_ TEMP and POWER.

Click Run and view the statistical task in the Device Environment Parameters Statistics tab.

5.


Version: A

11-59


6.


4


Note: u


u


4


7.


8.


11-60

Version: A


11.4.5

Managing Optical Power Performance Statistics The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of optical power performance and outputs the report in the format of CSV.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→Option of Power Statistics in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→PM Statistics→Option of Power Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the Option of Power Statistics tab.

2.

Select the object in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane and click Add or right-click any area of the Option of Power Statistics tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-6.

Figure 11-6 Version: A

The Add Dialog Box - Optical Performance Statistics 11-61


3.


Table 11-7

Description of Optical Power Performance Statistics Description

Parameter Task Name Task Enable

Sets the name of the statistics task. Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by default. Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is by default.

Task Type

u


u


File Output

Sets the output format of the file and CSV is by default. u

If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time are used to set the time range of the timing task, which indicates the statistics time range of the optical power performance.

Basic setting

Task Time

u

Setting

If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time should not be later than the current time and are used to set the statistics time range of the optical power performance.


u


u


Setting the Optical Power

Select the desired optical power performance parameters,

Performance

including IOP and OOP.

4.

Click Run and select the object in the displayed Object Selection List dialog box, as shown in the following figure:

11-62

Version: A


5.

Click OK and view the statistical task in the Option of Power Statistics tab.

6.


7.


4


Version: A

11-63


Note: u


u


4


8.

Select the corresponding statistics task and click Task Result Files to open the File Result List dialog box.

9.


11.4.6

Gathering Statistics of NE CPU and Memory Usage The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of NE CPU and memory usage as well as exporting CSV reports.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→CPU MEM Statistics in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→PM Statistics→CPU MEM Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the CPU MEM Statistics tab.

2.

Select the desired object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click Add or right-click anywhere in the CPU MEM Statistics tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-7.

11-64

Version: A


Figure 11-7

3.

The Add Dialog Box - NE CPU and Memory Usage Statistics


Table 11-8

Description of NE CUPU and Memory Usage Statistical Parameters. Description

Parameter Task Name


Task Enable


Basic

default.

setting Task Type

u


u


Version: A

11-65


Table 11-8

Description of NE CUPU and Memory Usage Statistical Parameters. (Continued) Description



If Timing Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time are used to set the time range of the timing task and show the statistics time range of the bandwidth utilization ratio.

Task Time

u

Setting

If Manual Run is selected for the task type, the Begin Time and the End Time should not be later than the current time and are used to set the statistics time range of the history data of the bandwidth utilization ratio.


u


u


Statistics of NE CPU

NE CUPU

and

and Memory

Memory

Usage

Select the statistical data type, including CPU and MEM.

Usage

4.

Click Run. View the statistical task set in the CPU MEM Statistics tab.

5.


6.


11-66

Version: A


4


Note: u


u


4


7.


8.


11.5

Managing VOA Status Statistics The OTNM2000 supports the statistics of the VOA status of the WDM / OTN equipment and outputs the report in the format of CSV.

Version: A

11-67


Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→VOA Status Statistics Management in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→Device Status Statistics→VOA Status Statistics Management in the Operational Tree pane to open the VOA Status Statistics Management tab.

2.

Select the object in the Operational Tree tab in the object tree pane and click Add or right-click any area of the VOA Status Statistics Management tab and select Add from the shortcut menu to open the Add dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-8.

Figure 11-8

3.

11-68

The Add Dialog Box - VOA Status Statistics

See Table 11-9 for setting related parameters of the statistics task.

Version: A


Table 11-9

Description for the Items in the Parameter Setting of the VOA Status Statistics Description

Parameter Task Name


Task Enable

Sets the enabling status of the task, and Enable is by default. Includes Timing Run and Manual Run, and Timing Run is by default.

Task Type

u


u

The system executes the task immediately after setting the task when the Manual Run is selected.

File Output

Sets the output format of the file and CSV is by default. Sets the task time only when the Timing Run is selected for the task type.

Basic setting

Task Time

The Begin Time and the End Time are optional setting items

Setting

and used to set the time range of the scheduled task. The Running Time is the compulsory item used for setting the time for running the scheduled task. Sets the task period only when the Timing Run is selected for the task type. Sets the period of executing the task and there are two types including Day and Week.

Task Period

u


u


Object type setting

4.

Sets the card type.

Click Run and check the statistical task in the VOA Status Statistics Management.

5.


6.


Version: A

11-69


4

Click OK in the displayed Delete the selected task? alert box. The Delete the result file simultaneously alert box appears. as shown in the figure below:

Note: u


u


4


7.


8.


11.6

IP Statistics The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of the IP addresses of the devices in the entire network, which is convenient for you to perform unified management of IP addresses.

11-70

Version: A


11.6.1

Statistics of Management Interface IP Addresses The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of the device management interface IP addresses and exporting a CSV report.

Procedure 1.

Select Statistics→IP Statistics→ManagePort IP Statistics in the main menu or select Management Tool→Statistics→IP Statistics→ManagePort IP Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the ManagePort IP Statistics tab.

2.

Select the corresponding object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

to import the management interface IP data, as shown in the figure

below:

3.

In the Filter text box, enter the keyword and click Filter to filter the IP data entries matching the keyword.

4.

Click Save As to save the statistical data to the specified directory.

5.

(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to NE Config. The NE Config tab appears.

6.

(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to Shelf. The corresponding shelf view appears.

7.

(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to Topo. The Main Topology tab appears.

Version: A

11-71


11.6.2

Statistics of Logical Interface IP Addresses The OTNM2000 supports gathering statistics of the device logical interface IP addresses and exporting a CSV report.

Procedure 1.

Select StatisticsIP StatisticsLogicPort IP Statistics in the main menu or select Management ToolStatisticsIP StatisticsLogicPort IP Statistics in the Operational Tree pane to open the LogicPort IP Statistics tab.

2.

Select the corresponding object in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

3.

to import the logical interface IP data, as shown in the figure below:

In the Filter text box, enter the keyword and click Filter to filter the IP data entries matching the keyword.

4.

Click Save As to save the statistical data to the specified directory.

5.

(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to NE Config. The NE Config tab appears.

6.

(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to Shelf. The corresponding shelf view appears.

7.

(Optional) Select a data entry and click Locate to Topo. The Main Topology tab appears.

11-72

Version: A


11.7

Viewing the Opposite End Port Information You can view the information of the opposite end port of the NE, including the local port, the card that the local port belongs to, the opposite end port, and the card and NE that the opposite end port belongs to.

Procedure 1.

Right-click an NE in the Logical Tree tab or logical view and select Show Opposite End Port Information to open the Show Opposite End Port Information dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-9. You can view the information of the opposite end port.

Figure 11-9

11.8

Viewing the Opposite End Port Information

Viewing Software Version By browsing the software version, you can obtain the related NE information, such as the card type and software /hardware version number.

Procedure 1.

Select Management Tool→Card Management→Software Version View in the Operational Tree pane.

2.

Select NE whose software version you want to view in the lower part of the Operational Tree pane and click

3.

.

View the software version and other related information of the selected NE in the Software Version View tab that appears, as shown in Figure 11-10.

Version: A

11-73


Figure 11-10

4.

Viewing Software Version

(Optional) Click Re-Query Failed Object to query the object whose query status is Failure again.

5.

(Optional) Click Export to CSV File to save the software version information as the *.Csv file in the designated directory.

11.9

Viewing IP Configuration Check the IP addresses of the NEs.

Procedure 1.

In the Operational Tree, select Management Tool→Card Management→ Browse IP Configuration.

2.

Select the NE whose IP address is to be viewed in the pane under the Operational Tree and click

11-74

.

Version: A


3.

View the IP address of the selected NE in the Browse IP Configuration tab that appears, as shown in Figure 11-11.

Figure 11-11

Version: A

The Browse IP Configuration Tab

11-75

12

Data Management Backing Up / Restoring the OTNM2000 Data Managing Data Sources Backing Up / Restoring Service Data

Version: A

12-1


12.1

Backing Up / Restoring the OTNM2000 Data To ensure the security of the network data, the OTNM2000 provides the backup and restoration function for the network data. The backup and restoration functions provided by the OTNM2000 are described in Table 12-1. You can select the backup and restoration functions according to the actual situation. Table 12-1

Description of the OTNM2000 Backup and Restoration

Backup / Restoration Mode

Description The OTNM2000 supports manual or automatic backup of the OTNM2000 configuring data. The configuration to be

Back up / restore the OTNM2000 configuration data

backed up includes the OTNM2000 configuring data and service configuration data. For manual backup procedures, see Backing Up the OTNM2000 Configuration Data Manually. For automatic backup procedures, see Backing Up DCG Files. The OTNM2000 supports importing / exporting configuration data through the network management tool. See Network Management Tool.

Import / export configuration data

u

It supports setting the backup server. You can select the local backup or the FTP backup and set the

through the network management

parameters related to the backup server, including

tool

backup folder on the local server and the IP address / port of the FTP server. u

You can also set a timer to export the OTNM2000 configuration automatically.

12-2

Version: A

12 Data Management

Table 12-1

Description of the OTNM2000 Backup and Restoration (Continued)

Backup / Restoration Mode

Description When backing up the cross-connect data of service management, the service management data will be saved

Back up / restore the cross-

as a SNC file.

connect data of service

For detailed procedures, see Backing Up the

management

Configuration to the File and Restoring the Configuration from the File. The OTNM2000 provides the import / export of dynamic data, including the alarm history, performance history, command logs, alarm reporting settings and performance collection settings. This function implements the smooth

Back up / restore dynamic data

upgrading of the configuration data upon OTNM2000 version upgrading. For detailed procedures, see Exporting the Dynamic Data and Importing the Dynamic Data.

12.1.1

Backing Up the OTNM2000 Configuration Data Manually The following introduces how to back up the configuration data of the OTNM2000 manually through the Devcfg. In case of loss of the OTNM2000 data, you can use the data backed up to restore the system data quickly.

Background Information When the configuration data is saved to the database by default, the OTNM2000 will automatically back up the original data in the database to the D:\OTNM\ui \backup directory.

Procedure

1.

Double-click the

icon to open the Devcfg window.

2.

Select File→Login or click

3.

In the displayed User Login dialog box, enter the username and password

on the toolbar.

(both are admin by default) and click Login. Version: A

12-3


4.

Click

on the toolbar to read the information from the database to

the Devcfg configuration GUI. 5.

Select File→Save As to save the information in the database to the file, convenient for invoking and querying later on.

Other Operations Restore the OTNM2000 configuration data. 1.

In the Devcfg window, select File→Open to select the OTNM2000 configuration file backed up previously and click Open.

2.

12.1.2

Click

to restore the configuration file backed up to the database.

Backing Up Configuration Data via the Network Management Tool The OTNM2000 supports backing up and restoring the configuring data through the network management tool.

Background Information The OTNM2000 supports backing up and restoring the configuring data through the network management tool. u

Supports setting the backup server to select local backup or FTP backup.

u

Supports exporting the OTNM2000 configuration data manually or setting the timer to automatically export the configuration data.

12-4

Version: A

12 Data Management

Prerequisite The EMS_unmcmagent and EMS_unmcmservice services have been started up at the server end.

Procedure 1.

Enter "http://IP:52302/nmtool" in the address bar of the browser (here, IP refers to the IP address of the computer running the OTNM2000 server) to open the login GUI as shown in the figure.

2.

Enter the username and password, and click Login to access the GUI of the network management tool.

Note: The system provides two users by default: u

The username and password of the administrator are Admin.

u

The username and password of the ordinary query user are Query, which only has the authority to view and export data.

Version: A

12-5


3.

On the GUI of the network management tool, click Import/Export to open the import / export GUI.

4.

Set the timer. You can set a timer to export the OTNM2000 configuration data automatically. 1)

Click set timer to set whether to enable the timer and set the backup interval and backup time.

2)

After completing the settings, click OK and then click OK in the displayed alert box.

5.

Set the backup server. 1)

Click set backup server to select the local backup or the FTP server and set the parameters related to the backup server, including backup folder on the local server and the IP address / port of the FTP server.

2)

After completing the settings, click OK and then click OK in the displayed alert box.

6.

Export the configuring data manually. 1)

Click Export, enter the file description information in the file description text box and click OK.

2)

When exporting is completed, click OK in the displayed alert box.

Other Operations Import the configuring data manually.

12-6

Version: A

12 Data Management

1.

Click Process, select all OTNM2000 processes and click Stop.

2.

When all the processes are stopped, click Import/Export to select the file type and the file to be imported. Then click OK.

3.

12.1.3


Backing Up the Configuration to the File To prevent configuration loss caused by misoperation. you can generate the service configuration as an SNC file and back it up to the specified directory.

Prerequisite u


u

The configuration data to be backed up are correct.

1.

Select Business Management→Backup/Restore→Backup to File in the

Procedure

main menu. 2.

In the displayed Save As dialog box, enter the Filename, specify the saving directory and then click Save.

12.1.4

Restoring the Configuration from the File In case of service configuration loss caused by EMS failures or misoperation, you can restore the data to the normal status via the configuration file backed up previously.

Prerequisite

Version: A

u


u

The configuration data to be restored are correct.

u

The OTNM2000 is switched to the offline mode.

12-7


Procedure 1.

Select Business Management→Backup/Restore→Recovery from File in the main menu.

2.

In the displayed Open dialog box,select the service configuration file and click Open.

12.1.5

Exporting the Dynamic Data The OTNM2000 supports exporting data history in the database through the Dtbackup tool and saving them on a hard disk as a file.

Prerequisite You have logged out of the OTNM2000.

Procedure 1.

Select Start→Programs→OTNM2000→Dtbackup to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 12-1.

Figure 12-1

2.

Dynamic Data Export / Import Tool

Select the Data export radio option and click Browse to select the save directory of the data history. The save directory is D:\Otnm2000DataBck by default. It is not recommended to modify the save directory for convenient search.

3. 12-8

Click the Table options button to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 12-2. Version: A

12 Data Management

Figure 12-2

4.

Selecting Items to Be Exported

Click the >> button to move all the items from the left list to the right list. To move a certain item from the left list to the right list, double-click the item, or select the item and click >. The items available in the left list are described in Table 12-2.

Table 12-2

Version: A

Description of the Items in the Left List

Name

Description

alarmhis

Alarm history.

pmhis15

15-minute performance history.

pmhis24

24-hour performance history.

commandlog

Command logs.

userlog

User logs.

nofaulttype

Alarm history filter settings.

nopmtype

Performance history filter settings.

nocommandlog

Command log filter settings.

filedatasource

Service data.

asonalarm

ASON alarms.

alarmdetailcond

Alarm reporting settings.

pmtask

Performance collection settings.

alarmnewgrade

Alarm level settings. 12-9


Table 12-2

Description of the Items in the Left List (Continued)

Name

Description

cmdauthorize

Command authorization settings.

t_dcndev

DCN network device.

t_dcntopolink

DCN topology fiber connection.

t_userinfo

User information. The unended and unconfirmed current alarms and the

newalarm

confirmed but unended current alarms.

newalarmmonth

The ended but unconfirmed current alarms.

5.

Click “OK” to return to the Dynamic data import/export tool dialog box.

6.

Click Begin to start exporting the data history.

7.

When the export is completed, the alert box as shown in Figure 12-3 appears. Click Finish and then Quit.

Figure 12-3

8.

Export Success Alert Box

(Optional) When exporting data in versions later than Version 05.28, the export logs will be generated. Go to the log directory displayed on Figure 12-3 to view the logs. If no error appears in the log, the data is exported successfully.

12.1.6

Importing the Dynamic Data The OTNM2000 supports importing the data history backed up previously through Dtbackup tool to implement smooth upgrading of configuration data upon the OTNM2000 version upgrading.

12-10

Version: A

12 Data Management

Prerequisite You have logged out of the OTNM2000.

Procedure 1.

Select Start→Programs→OTNM2000→Dtbackup to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 12-4.

Figure 12-4

2.

Dynamic Data Export / Import Tool

Select the Data Import radio option. Click Browse to select the file folder saving the data history backup and then click OK.

3.

Version: A

Click the Table options button to open the dialog box as shown in Figure 12-5.

12-11


Figure 12-5

4.

Selecting Items to be Restored

Click the >> button to move all the items from the left list to the right list. To move a certain item from the left list to the right list, double-click the item, or select the item and click>. The items available in the left list are described in Table 12-2.

5.

Click OK to return to the dialog box as shown in Figure 12-4.

6.

Click Begin to import the data history to the OTNM2000 database.

7.

When the import is completed, the alert box as shown in Figure 12-6 appears. Click Finish and then Quit.

12-12

Version: A

12 Data Management

Figure 12-6

8.

Import Success Alert Box

(Optional) Go to the log directory displayed on Figure 12-6 to view the logs. If no error appears in the log, the data is imported successfully.

9.

Restart the related services of the OTNM2000 to validate the imported data history. 1)

Open the D:\OTNM\ui\sbin\service directory and double-click stop_ems_main_service to stop the OTNM2000 relevant services.

2)

When the services are stopped, double-click start_ems_main_service to start the OTNM2000 relevant services again.

12.2

Managing Data Sources This version places the submenus Import from File, Merge Config and Clear Config Data under Datasource, used for configuring the data source (such as files).

12.2.1

Importing Configuration from the File The multi-service management platform adopts the Import from File to import the data source file.

Version: A

12-13


Background Information After the multi-service management platform of the OTNM2000 is introduced and applied, the service configuration efficiency concerns users. The multi-service management platform adopts the Import from File, effectively improving the efficiency of configuring the circuit data.

Prerequisite u


u

Make sure the imported configuration data file will not influence the normal communication of the current network.

Procedure 1.

Select Business Management→Datasource→Import from File in the main menu.

2.

In the displayed Open dialog box, select the desired file and click the Open button to import the file.

Note: The type of the imported / exported circuit data file is *.dat by default.

12.2.2

Clearing the Configuration Data This function is used to clear all service configuration data at the OTNM2000 side. Please handle with care.

Prerequisite

12-14

u


u

The configuring data to be deleted has been backed up.

Version: A

12 Data Management

Warning: The Clear Config Data operation is a high-risk operation. Please handle with care. Procedure 1.

Select Business Management→Datasource→Clear Config Data in the main menu.

2.

In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes, as shown in the figure below:

3.


12.3

Backing Up / Restoring Service Data The Backup/Restore submenu is moved from the Business Data menu (V2.0R5 (Build04.20.05.50)) to the Business Management menu and added with two functions: Backup to File and Recovery from File.

Version: A

12-15


12.3.1

Synchronizing All Configuration Data This function uses the multi-service background to perform inversion algorithm of the device-to-NE configuration data, and meanwhile generates the subnet-side data and save them into the database.


Scenarios 1: In case that the subnet circuit data is lost but the device circuit data is normal, the multi-service background obtains the NE configuration by performing inversion algorithm of device-side data . Then it performs service data synchronization, generates the subnet-side circuit data and reports to the multi-service GUI.

u

Scenario 2: In the early period of the project, the device ran as a dynamic service model and did not involve the OTNM2000 for service configuration and management. As it is required to implement unified management and configuration in the later period of the project, you can use the "Synchronize All Configuration Data" function to synchronize all service data configured through the CLI to the OTNM2000.

Prerequisite u


u

Make sure the Synchronize All Config Data operation will not cause communication failure of the network.

Procedure 1.

Select Business Management→Backup/Restore→Synchronize All Config Data.

2.

In the displayed Configuration Synchronize All Config Data tab, click Total Search. The multi-service background obtains the result by performing inversion algorithm of device data and writes the result to the NE configuration. Besides, it summarizes the number of circuits of different types and presents the result on the GUI, as shown in the figure below:

12-16

Version: A

12 Data Management

3.

Click Synchronize All to notify the multi-service background to generate the circuit data and report the circuits to the GUI, which will save the reported data to the database, as shown in the figure below:

12.3.2

Switching to the Offline Mode Only after switching the offline mode can you perform the Recovery from File, Download Data to the Client End and Uploaded Data to the Server operations and reload the service data configured in offline mode.

Prerequisite u

You have the Operator privileges or higher privileges.

u

Make sure the operation will not cause communication failure of the network.

1.

Select Business Management→Backup/Restore→Switch to Offline Mode

Procedure



Version: A

12-17


12.3.3

Backing Up the Configuration to the File To prevent configuration loss caused by misoperation. you can generate the service configuration as an SNC file and back it up to the specified directory.

Prerequisite u


u

The configuration data to be backed up are correct.

1.

Select Business Management→Backup/Restore→Backup to File in the

Procedure

main menu. 2.

In the displayed Save As dialog box, enter the Filename, specify the saving directory and then click Save.

12.3.4

Restoring the Configuration from the File In case of service configuration loss caused by EMS failures or misoperation, you can restore the data to the normal status via the configuration file backed up previously.

Prerequisite u


u

The configuration data to be restored are correct.

u


1.

Select Business Management→Backup/Restore→Recovery from File in

Procedure

the main menu. 2.

In the displayed Open dialog box,select the service configuration file and click Open.

12-18

Version: A

12 Data Management

12.3.5

Downloading Data to the Client End In offline mode, you can download the service configuration data on the server to the local client end.

Prerequisite u


u

The service configuration data to be downloaded from the server are correct.

u


1.

Select Business Management→Backup/Restore→Downloaded Data to the

Procedure

Client End in the main menu. 2.

In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes to complete data download, as shown in the figure below:

12.3.6

Uploading Data to the Server In offline mode, you can upload local the service configuration to the server.

Prerequisite u


u

The local service configuration data to be uploaded are correct.

u


1.

Select Business Management→Backup/Restore→Uploaded Data to the

Procedure

Server in the main menu. Version: A

12-19


2.

In the displayed Business Management alert box, click Yes to complete service uploading, as shown in the figure below:

12-20

Version: A

Appendix A OTNM2000 Service List The OTNM2000 relevant services are described in Table A-1. Table A-1

Description of the OTNM2000 Services

Service

Description

EMS_cfgdatamgr

Configuration import / export service. Data communication basic component, the message bus

EMS_DataBusServer

responsible for communication between components and modules.

EMS_DispServer

EMS_Dtserver

processing results. Data processing component, receiving and processing the commands sent from other components.

EMS_Dumper

Data save service, managing the capacity of the database.

EMS_FileServer

FTP file transfer service

EMS_IceNode

ICE node management component.

EMS_IceRegister

ICE registry service.

EMS_Manager2

Device communication management service.

EMS_MSMPServer

Multi-service management service.

EMS_NeCfgService

NE configuration service.

EMS_OtnmApiServer EMS_OtnmCfgService EMS_QueryServer

Version: A

Data distribution component, distributing the data

API interface component, providing data interface based on RPC. Configuration management service. Query service component, providing services for alarm, performance and log query.

EMS_RsyncServer

File synchronization service.

EMS_unmcmagent

Service management client.

EMS_unmcmservice

Service management server end.

A-1

Appendix B Setting the Web Browser Procedure 1.

Set the default browser. If the default browser is Internet Explorer 8, skip this step. 1)

Open the Internet Explorer 8 browser, select Tools→Internet Options in the main menu to open the Internet Options dialog box.

2)

Click the Programs tab, select the Tell me if Internet Explorer is not the default web browser. check box under Default web browser.

3)

Click OK and restart the Internet Explorer 8 browser. In the displayed alert box, click Yes to complete the settings.

2.

Set the display mode of the browser tab. 1)


2)

Select the General tab, click Settings under Tabs to open the Tabbed Browsing Settings dialog box.

Version: A

B-1


3)

Select the Enable Tabbed Browsing (requires restarting Internet Explorer), that is, enable the multi-tab browsing mode.

4)

Select to open links in The current tab or window, indicating that the new help tab will replace the original help tab.

B-2

Version: A

Appendix B Setting the Web Browser

5) 3.

Click OK. The settings take effect after the browser is restarted.

Allow to open the help document. 1)


2)

Select the Privacy tab and make sure the Turn on Pop-up Blocker option is not selected.

Version: A

B-3


3) 4.

Click OK. The settings take effect after the browser is restarted.

(Optional) After the online help document is open, select Tools→Compatibility View Settings in the browser main menu to make sure the document can be normally and completely displayed.

B-4

Version: A

Appendix C Abbreviations

Version: A

BCT

Board Control Terminal

BML

Business Management Layer

BMS

Business Management System

CPU

Central Processing Unit

DCC

Data Communication Channel

DCN

Data Communication Network

DDN

Digital Data Network

EML

Element Management Layer

EMS

Element Management System

EMU

Element Management Unit

FTP

File Transfer Protocol

GE

Gigabit Ethernet

GNE

Gate Network Element

GUI

Graphic User Interface

IP

Internet Protocol

LSP

Label Switched Path

NE

Network Element

NEL

Network Element Level

NML

Network Management Layer

NMS

Network Management System

OTN

Optical Transmission Network

PW

Pseudo Wire

QoS

Quality of Service

SML

Service Management Layer

SMS

Service Management System

SSM

Synchronization Status Message

TCP

Transfer Control Protocol

TMN

Telecommunications Management Network

UDP

User Datagram Protocol

UPS

Uninterrupted Power System

VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network

WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing

C-1

Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survery Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for no other purposes than to respond to your feedback. Name Phone Number Email Address Company To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete documentation set. Documentation Name Code and Version Usage of the product documentation: 1. How often do you use the documentation? □ Frequently □ Rarely □ Never □ Other (please specify) 2. When do you use the documentation? □ in starting up a project shooting

□ in installing the product

□ in daily maintenance

□ in trouble

□ Other (please specify)

3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the documentation? □ 100% □ 80%

□ 50% □ 0%

□ Other (please specify)

4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation? □ Satisfied

□ Unsatisfied (your advice)

5. Which documentation form do you prefer? □ Print edition

□ Electronic edition □ Other (please specify)

Quality of the product documentation: 1. Is the information organized and presented clearly? □ Very

□ Somewhat

□ Not at all (your advice)

2. How do you like the language style of the documentation? □ Good

□ Normal

□ Poor (please specify)

3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?

4. Is the information complete in the documentation? □ Yes □ No (Please specify) 5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for you to get known and use the product? □ Yes □ No (Please specify) 6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation? □ Yes (Please give an example) □ No (Please specify the reason) 7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?

8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?

9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation? □ Beautiful

□ Unbeautiful (your advice)

□ Practical

□ Unpractical (your advice)

10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation? □ Beautiful

□ Unbeautiful (your advice)

11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare our documentation to them? Product documentations from other companies: Satisfied (please specify) Unsatisfied (please specify) 12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:

Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at [email protected]

E-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System Operation Guide

Recommend Documents